Copyright: Copyright © Corel Corporation Limited. 1996, 1997.   Tuesday, September 02, 1997 07:04:08. All Rights Reserved.
Citation: Copyright © Corel Corporation Limited. 1996, 1997. %date. All Rights Reserved.


First Page
Click Help [image] Help Topics to find information about using this feature.


About Font Properties

Use Font Properties to determine the font, point size, relative size, position, style, color, fill, and outline of lettering anywhere text appears in your drawing or slide show.

When you create a font combination you want to use in all new text areas and text lines, you can set it as your default font by selecting Use as default on the Font tab (this option is unavailable when you are creating a slide show).

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose fonts

To change the relative size of text

To choose text colors and outlines

To position text as superscript or subscript


About Object Properties

Use Object Properties to select fill colors, patterns, gradients, textures, pictures, line color, style, width, joint, and cap options.

Click [image] on the Property Bar to select pattern and gradient fills and [image] or [image] on the Property Bar to select foreground and background colors.

Click [image] on the Property Bar to select colors for lines, [image] on the Property Bar to select line styles, and [image] to select line width.

For more information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To animate an image

To choose line color, style, and width

To fill objects with textures

To fill objects with pictures

To choose shadow attributes

To choose line joints and line caps

To animate a bulleted list

To create a QuickLink

To choose fills for objects

Related Concepts


About Corel Web Site

Through Corel Web Site, you can go to the Corel Presentations home page on the World Wide Web.

Internet

If you have installed the Netscape Navigator or another browser, and have a modem or network connection to an Internet service provider, you can go to the Corel Presentations 8 home page which contains links to:

Download software manuals (in Envoy format)

Technical Information Documents

Sound clips and video clips for slide shows

Hints and tips, demos (in AVI format), and other task-oriented resources

To connect to an online information service

Related Concepts


To fill objects with textures
To fill objects with textures,

1	Click Format [image] Object Properties [image] Fill.

2	Click [image] as the fill style.

3	Select the category of textures you want to use.

4	Click the texture you want to use.

Tips

Click Texture Settings to choose how the texture will fill the object.

Click Browse to choose any bitmap image (*.BMP) to use as a texture.

You can right-click an object, then click Object Properties from the QuickMenu to apply changes to that object only.

If you do not select an object, the properties you choose will apply to all new objects.

Related Topics

About Object Properties


To fill objects with your own textures
To fill objects with your own textures,

1	Right-click the object, click Object Properties, then click the Fill tab.

2	Click [image] as the fill style.

3	Click Browse.

4	Specify the bitmap image file (*.BMP) you want to use as a texture.

Tips

Click Texture Settings to choose whether the texture will be aligned to the page or to the object.

You can right-click an object, then choose Object Properties to apply changes to that object only.

If you do not select an object, the properties you choose will apply to all new objects.

Related Topics

About Object Properties


To import text data
To import text data,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Data [image] Import.

3	Select ASCII Delimited Text or ANSI Delimited Text as the data type you want to import.

4	Specify the path and filename of the text data file you want to import.

5	Select a field and record delimiter for the imported text.

6	Select an option for encapsulated and strip characters in the imported text.

7	Select the data import options you want.

Related Topics

About Import Data


About Show Pointer Position

Use Show Pointer Position to display the exact position of the pointer. This display helps you create, arrange, and move objects precisely. The position display appears at the bottom right of the screen, in the Application Bar, and uses the units of measure you specify in Tools [image] Settings [image] Display.

To display the position of the pointer in the Application Bar

Related Concepts


Example 1
Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the right.


Example 2
Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the right.


Example 3
Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the right.


Example 4
Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the right.


Example 5
Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the right.


Example 6
Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the right.


Example 7
Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the right.


Example 8
Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the right.


Example 9
Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the right.


Example 10
Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the right.


Example 11
Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the right.


Example 12
Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the right.


About Corel Presentations

Corel Presentations for Windows 95 is a presentation graphics package you can use to create dazzling slide shows with colorful charts, exciting bitmaps, soundtracks, animated objects, eye-catching transitions, and even Internet links. You can present your slide shows as on-screen slide shows, easily publish them to HTML, or print them as overhead transparencies. Corel Presentations also makes it easy for you to accompany your slide show with speaker notes, audience notes, and effective handouts.

You can also use Corel Presentations to create posters, drawings, and charts to use in other documents.

Click Help [image] About Corel Presentations to see the Corel Presentations logo, the product version number and copyright, your serial number and PIN, and the program and PerfectFit releases and paths, along with network and memory information.

If you need to call customer support, the information in About Presentations will help the technician assist you.

Tips for Displaying and Editing Your License Number

Related Concepts


About Layout/Type Properties

Use Layout/Type to select the type of data chart you want to use and to control how data charts appear. Layout options change, depending on the type of data chart you are working on.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To design data charts

To create data charts


About Acquire Image

Use Acquire Image to scan an image (photograph, drawing, and so on) directly into Corel Presentations as a bitmap so you can size, rotate, and skew the image. You can also double-click it to edit it with the bitmap tools.

You must have an image scanner with a TWAIN-compatible driver. Each scanner has different capabilities which will affect how you can use it. Please refer to your image scanner manual for more information.

You must use 32-bit TWAIN (TWAIN_32.DLL), or the Acquire Image feature will not be available. If your scanner's TWAIN drivers are designed for an earlier version of Windows, you may need new drivers from your scanner's manufacturer.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To set up a scanner

To scan images into the drawing window


About the Axis Menu

Use X, Primary Y, and Secondary Y Axis Properties to choose how and where labels appear on the axis, the scale for the axis, the label font, the axis title orientation, title font, and tick options for the axis.

You can use more than one Y axis in a single data chart. The primary Y is the left vertical axis, and the secondary Y is the right vertical axis.

The secondary Y axis lets you chart one or more components on a different scale from the other components. For example, if you use a bar chart on the primary Y axis to show the income of individual regions over a period of time, you could use a line chart on the secondary Y axis to show the total income for all regions during that period. You would use the secondary Y because the scale could be as much as four times larger than the primary Y scale.

You can also create a chart with two different Y axes to compare series of data that differ in numeric type. For example, you could measure dollars on the primary Y axis and units sold on the secondary Y axis.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose y-axis options

To use two y axes in a chart

To choose x-axis options


About Elliptical Arc

Use Elliptical Arc to draw pointed, elongated arcs.

Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw elliptical arcs.

To draw elliptical arcs


About Subtitle Properties

Use Subtitle Properties to create, edit, and display the chart's subtitle, and to select the font, fill, outline, box type, box fill, and position options for the subtitle.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To create and edit chart subtitles


About Adding a Background

Use New Background to create and add a new background to a slide show master.

To add backgrounds to a master

To add backgrounds to the current slide show

Related Concepts


About Polyline

Use Polyline to draw multiple-segment or zig-zag lines and unfilled angular shapes.

Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw lines with several points.

To draw zig-zag lines

Related Concepts


About Adding a Layout

Use New Layout to create and add a new layout to a slide show master.

To add layouts to a master

To add layouts to the current slide show

Related Concepts


To draw straight lines
To draw straight lines,

1	Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

2	Drag to create the line.

Tips

This tool creates a single, straight line. If you want to create a zig-zag line, click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

Related Topics

About Line


About Closed Curve

Use Closed Curve to draw curved shapes filled with the current color and pattern.

Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw closed curves.

To draw closed curves


About QuickFonts

Use the QuickFonts drop-down list on the Property Bar to select a font, size, and attribute combination to re-use. It displays a list of the last few font combinations you used so that you can quickly and easily select fonts you use often without having to re-create the combinations.

To re-use a font, size, and style combination

To choose fonts

To choose text colors and outlines


About Polygon

Use Polygon to draw angular shapes filled with the current color and pattern.

Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw polygons.

To draw polygons


To re-use a font, size, and style combination
To re-use a font, size, and style combination,

1	Click [image] on the Property Bar to select the font combination you want to use.

2	Click [image] or [image] from the Text Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

3	Drag to create a text box or click to create a text line.

4	Type your text.

Tips

To change the font of existing text, select the text you want to change, then click the font combination you want to use from the QuickFonts drop-down list on the Property Bar.

Related Topics

About QuickFonts


About Rounded Rectangle

Use Rounded Rectangle to draw rectangles or squares with rounded corners.

Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw rounded rectangles.

To draw rounded rectangles


About QuickLinks

A QuickLink is an object on a slide with an action or event attached to it. When you click a QuickLink object during a slide show, it could launch a web browser and go to a specified address on the Internet (such as a web page or an FTP site), open a software application like Corel WordPerfect or Corel Quattro Pro, play a sound file, or move to another part of the slide show.

Any slide object that is not part of the slide's layout layer can have a QuickLink attached to it. You can also create consistent QuickLinks by drawing your own object and saving it. Then, you simply retrieve the drawing into a slide and attach an event to it.

You can also create a QuickLink object that is invisible on a slide during playback. This is particularly useful if you want to use an unfilled object as a QuickLink covering a layout object like a bulleted list or subtitle. When you play the slide show, the layout element remains visible and appears to be the "object" you click to trigger the action or event.

During a slide show, you can find the location of an invisible QuickLink by moving the arrow cursor over the screen until it changes to a hand pointer over the "hotspot" where the QuickLink is located.

QuickLinks vs. QuickKeys

A QuickLink is similar to a QuickKey. Both can launch the same type of events or actions described above. The main difference is how they are attached to a slide and how you activate them during playback.

A QuickKey is attached to the entire slide or slide show and is activated when you press an assigned keystroke. A QuickLink, however, is attached to a single object on a slide (such as a Clipart image, bitmap, or text box) and is activated when you either click the object or press an optional assigned keystroke.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a  control.

To add text to a QuickLink

To create an invisible QuickLink on a slide

About QuickLinks in Internet Slide Shows

To edit a QuickLink

To create a QuickLink

To clear a QuickLink from an object

Related Concepts


About New Slide

Use New Slide to add one or more slides to your show. The slides are added after the current slide.

You can also add slides by clicking the Slide Outliner tab, placing the insertion point at the end of a line, and pressing Ctrl+Enter.

To add a slide to the current slide show


To fill objects with pictures
To fill objects with pictures,

1	Click Format [image] Object Properties [image] Fill.

2	Click [image] the fill style.

3	Select the category of pictures you want to use.

4	Click the picture you want to use.

Tips

Click Picture Settings to choose how the picture will fill the object.

Click Browse to choose any bitmap image file (*.BMP) to use as a picture.

You can right-click an object, then click Object Properties to apply changes to that object only.

If you do not select an object, the properties you choose will apply to all new objects.

Related Topics

About Object Properties


About Text Box

Use Text Box to create two or more lines of text. When you work in a text box, Corel Presentations sizes the area for you to accommodate the amount of text you type. While the text box is open, you can click menu options to control the appearance, content, and layout of the text.

Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to create text boxes. If you only need one line of text, click [image] to create a single text line.

When returned to the drawing window, text becomes an object that you can size and move as you would a drawing object. When you size text by selecting a corner handle and sizing it as an object, the point size of your text increases or decreases.

You can select any active text and drag it to a new position. For example, you can quickly rearrange the order of bullets in a bulleted list by simply dragging bullet text to a new position.

Use the Line and Paragraph menu options to make the current line of text line up within text boxes. In the case of Indent, you affect the current paragraph. You can also apply Center or Flush Right to the lines that you select.

Text created in a bitmap can be edited only as painted letters, not as text.

Here are the editing and movement keys:

Position	Keystroke
Left one character	Left arrow
Right one character	Right arrow
Up one line	Up arrow
Down one line	Down arrow
Left one word	Word Left (Ctrl+Left arrow)
Right one word	Word Right (Ctrl+Right arrow)
Beginning of line	Home
End of line	End
First line of text	PgUp
Last line of text	PgDn
Before all codes	Ctrl+Home twice
After all codes	Ctrl+End twice
Keys	Action
Backspace	Deletes the character to the left of the insertion point
Delete (Del)	Deletes the character to the right of the insertion point
Insert (Ins)	Toggles between Insert Mode and Typeover Mode
To size text boxes

To choose fonts

To use text boxes and text lines

To choose text colors and outlines

To re-use a font, size, and style combination

To shape objects and text (QuickWarp)

Related Concepts


To choose line joints and line caps
To choose line joints and line caps,

1	Click Format [image] Object Properties [image] Line.

2	Click a joint option from the Joints palette.

3	Click the Starting cap and Ending cap palettes to select the line cap option you want.

Tips

Select "X" from the Style palette if you do not want to display drawn lines or lines around objects.

You can also right-click an object and click Object Properties to apply new attributes to that object.

If you do not select an object, the properties you choose will apply to all new objects.

Related Topics

About Object Properties


About the Air Brush

Use the Air Brush to spray colors and patterns in a bitmap area. The slower you drag the mouse, the denser the spray becomes.

To use the Air Brush in the Bitmap Editor, click [image] on the toolbar, then click and drag.

To spray paint a bitmap area


About Orientation

Use Orientation to select the direction each branch in your organization chart will go (top to bottom or left to right, for example).

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To orient organization charts

To create organization charts

To space positions in organization charts


About the Align Objects Menu

Use Left, Right, Top, and Bottom on the Align Objects submenu to align selected objects with the top, bottom, or sides of the drawing window. If one object is selected, it is aligned within the drawing window. If two or more objects are selected, they are aligned in relation to each other.

Use the Center options on the Align submenu to center single objects horizontally and vertically in the drawing window, or to arrange several objects horizontally and vertically in the selection area.

Some objects may be superimposed after you align them. If you do not want them to overlap try grouping the objects first, then applying an alignment option to the group.

To align objects in the drawing window


To orient organization charts
To orient organization charts,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select a box with subordinates to change its branch orientation.

3	Right-click a box with subordinates, then click Orientation.

4	Click the orientation you want for the selected branch.

Related Topics

About Orientation


About Assigning Backgrounds to Layouts

Use Assign Background to assign a background to a type of layout in a master or to change a current assignment. The background you select will appear behind that layout each time it appears.

For example, you may want to attach the Title layout to a background with a logo in the corner.

To create a master

To assign backgrounds to layouts in a master

To assign backgrounds to layouts in the current slide show

Related Concepts


To space positions in organization charts
To space positions in organization charts,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the boxes with subordinates whose spacing you want to change.

3	Click Format [image] Box Spacing.

4	Slide the indicator to set the amount of spacing between parent and child (manager and subordinate) positions.

5	Slide the indicator to set the amount of spacing between sibling and sibling (co-worker) positions.

Tips

Click Maximize spacing to eliminate excessive white space around positions in a selected branch or level.

Use closer spacing between manager and subordinate (parent to child) positions when you have a tall, thin chart.

Use closer spacing between co-worker (Sibling-to-sibling) positions when you have a wide, flat chart.

Related Topics

About Orientation


About Arrow

Use Arrow to draw straight, curved, and double-curved arrows. You determine the length of the arrows; the width is predefined. After you create an arrow, you can modify its width by editing its points or by stretching it.

Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw arrows.

To add arrowheads to the ends of lines, use the Line tab in Object Properties.

To draw arrows

To draw double-curved arrows

To draw curved arrows


About Expand and Collapse Subordinates

Use Expand Subordinates to view all currently collapsed subordinate positions for the selected box. Use Collapse Subordinates to hide all subordinate positions for the selected box.

You must select a position with subordinates to use these options.

To insert subordinate positions

To view or hide subordinate positions


About Bezier

 Use Bezier to create a smooth, curved line as a series of segments you can move and edit with the control handles that appear at various points in the curve. In this diagram, the points on the curve indicate where you should click to create the curve.

Drag the handles outside of the curves to define the height and sweep of the curves.

Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw Bezier curves.

 You can also use Bezier to create cusps. Cusps (pointed corners) connect curved segments that meet at different angles. Create a cusp to abruptly change direction at the end of a curve by pressing Alt while dragging. You can also create a cusp later when you edit the curve.

To create cusps

To draw Bezier curves

To edit Bezier curves


To view or hide subordinate positions
To view or hide subordinate positions,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the position whose subordinates you want to view or hide.

3	Click View [image] Expand Subordinates or Collapse Subordinates.

Tips

Click View [image] Expand Subordinates or Collapse Subordinates again to reverse the operation.

Related Topics

About Expand and Collapse Subordinates


About the Bitmap Editor

Use the Bitmap Editor to create or edit a bitmap image. A bitmap is a graphics image formed by a series of dots (pixels). A bitmap image is also referred to as a paint image, a raster image, or a pixel image. Scanned photographs and images created in "paint" applications are bitmap images.

Click [image] on the toolbar to create bitmaps.

If you run out of room while creating bitmaps, you can enlarge the bitmap frame. Changing the size of the frame not only alters the bitmap image, but also changes its size and position when you return it to the drawing window. You can also resize the bitmap frame to cut away parts of the bitmap image, such as extra white space or unwanted parts of the image.

Any part of the image moved outside the resized frame is deleted when you return the bitmap image to the drawing window.

To size bitmap frames

Tips for Using Foreground and Background Colors in Bitmaps

To edit bitmap pixels

To create bitmaps


About Zoom to Chart

Use Zoom to Chart to display an organization chart from the topmost position down to the last. Zoom to Chart does not expand currently collapsed positions.

To view or hide subordinate positions

To view only the selected branch

To view all branches in an organization chart


About Bulleted Lists

Use Bulleted List to display a series of text lines as a bulleted list. Edit any bulleted list that you create by adding, deleting, and changing bullet levels and text. You can delete a bullet character at any level in a list, and you can create your own bullet styles.

Click [image] from the Text Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to create bulleted lists.

You can add blank bulleted lists to layouts to create your own bulleted list templates. When you add a bulleted list to a slide layout, you are simply adding a placeholder for the list. You will add your actual text to the list when you double-click the placeholder in the Slide Editor.

To create bulleted lists

Tips for Creating Bulleted Lists

To design bulleted lists

Related Concepts


To view all branches in an organization chart
To view all branches in an organization chart,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Click View [image] Zoom to Chart.

Tips

Click Zoom to Branch to view only the selected manager position and its subordinate positions.

Zoom to Chart does not expand any currently collapsed branches; use it to return to a full-chart display after you have used Zoom to Branch.

Related Topics

About Zoom to Chart


About Circle

Use Circle to draw circles.

Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw circles.

To draw circles


About Zoom to Branch

Use Zoom to Branch to see the box you have selected and the subordinate positions under it, and to hide the rest of the organization chart. This is especially helpful when you need to display large and complicated organizations as smaller charts.

To view or hide subordinate positions

To view only the selected branch

To view all branches in an organization chart


About Circular Arc

Use Circular Arc to draw portions of circles.

Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw circular arcs.

To draw circular arcs


To view only the selected branch
To view only the selected branch,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the position you want to appear at the top of the chart view.

3	Click View [image] Zoom to Branch.

Tips

Click View [image] Collapse Subordinates to view only the currently selected position.

Click View [image] Zoom to Chart to view your organization chart starting at the original topmost position. If you have collapsed any subordinate positions, they will not display.

Related Topics

About Zoom to Branch


About Curve

Use Curve to draw a continuous curved line.

Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw curves.

To draw curves


About Subordinates

Use Subordinates to add positions beneath the currently selected box. You must select a box to insert its subordinates.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To insert subordinate positions

To insert staff positions

To insert coworker positions


About Data Chart Gallery

Use the Data Chart Gallery to choose the type of data chart you want to create, then add data and format your chart. Choose the chart type most appropriate for your particular kind of information.

Click [image] on the toolbar to create data charts.

These are the types of data charts you can create:

Area

Bar

Bubble

High/Low

Line

Mixed

Pie

Radar

Scatter

Surface

Table

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

Tips for Creating Data Charts

To design data charts

Tips for Estimating Unknown Data Values

To create data charts

Related Concepts


To insert subordinate positions
To insert subordinate positions,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the box for which you want to add subordinates.

3	Click Insert [image] Subordinates.

4	Specify the number of subordinates you want to add.

Tips

To copy subordinates, select the subordinate box you want to copy, then hold down the Ctrl key while dragging it to another manager. This copies the selected position and all its subordinates.

You can drag and drop subordinate positions by dragging a box onto another box and dropping it when the cursor changes to an up- or down-pointing arrow.

You can also add subordinate positions by pressing the Insert key, or right-clicking a box and clicking Insert [image] Subordinate(s).

Related Topics

About Subordinates


About Ellipse

Use Ellipse to draw circles and ellipses (ovals).

Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw ellipses.

To draw ellipses


About Coworkers

Use Coworkers to add positions under the same manager and at the same level as the currently selected box. You must select a box to add coworkers to it.

You cannot add coworkers to the top position in an organization chart.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To insert subordinate positions

To insert staff positions

To insert coworker positions


About Flood Fill

Use Flood Fill to quickly replace the solid color or pattern of a group of connecting pixels with another color, pattern, or gradient.

Click [image] on the toolbar to fill bitmap areas.

To selectively replace colors in bitmaps

To fill bitmap areas with the same color


To insert coworker positions
To insert coworker positions,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the box to which you want to add coworkers.

3	Click Insert [image] Coworkers.

4	Specify the number of coworkers you want to add.

5	Click Left or Right to position the new co-workers in relation to the selected box.

Tips

You can drag and drop coworker positions by dragging a box onto another box and dropping it when the cursor changes to a right- or left-pointing arrow.

You can also add coworkers by right-clicking a box and clicking Insert [image] Coworker(s).

You cannot add coworkers to the top position in your organization chart.

Related Topics

About Coworkers


About Freehand

Use Freehand to draw fluid lines with your mouse as you would with a pen or pencil.

Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw freehand.

To draw freehand


To insert staff positions
To insert staff positions,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the box for which you want to add staff positions.

3	Click Insert [image] Staff.

4	Specify the number of staff positions you want to add.

Tips

You can also add a staff position by right-clicking a box and clicking Insert [image] Staff from the QuickMenu.

Related Topics

About Staff


About Line

Use Line to draw single, straight lines.

Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw two-point lines.

To draw straight lines

Related Concepts


About Staff

Use Staff to add staff positions to the currently selected box. You must select a box to insert its staff.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To insert staff positions

To insert coworker positions


About Organization Chart

Use Organization Chart to create a chart showing an organization's structure, or relationships of people and positions. You can add additional information, such as a telephone number, a FAX number, or a department name, to any position in your organization chart. Keep any additional information short and simple to avoid cluttering your chart with too much text.

Click [image] on the toolbar to create organization charts.

To change information in an organization chart, click a box to select it, then double-click the text you want to change. Use the tab and arrow keys on your keyboard to move from field to field within a box and between boxes.

If you are creating an organization chart to use in an earlier version of Corel Presentations, be sure to save the chart style and information separately.

Tips for Creating Organization Charts

To design organization charts

To create organization charts


About Manager

Use Manager to add a manager position above the currently selected box. You must select a box to insert its manager.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To insert subordinate positions

To insert a manager position

To insert staff positions


About Paint Brush

Use Paint Brush to paint freehand colored lines, patterns, pictures, and textures in a bitmap.

Click [image] on the toolbar to use the paint brush.

To use the paint brush


To insert a manager position
To insert a manager position,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the box for which you want to add a manager.

3	Click Insert [image] Manager.

Tips

You can also add a manager by right-clicking a box and clicking Insert [image] Manager from the QuickMenu.

Related Topics

About Manager


About Pickup Color

Use Pickup Color to change the currently selected foreground color to a particular color used in the bitmap image. You can then select the paint brush, air brush, or flood fill tool and use the copied color anywhere in the bitmap. Some colors are a blend of different color pixels. The color you pick up depends on what pixel you are on when you click the bitmap.

Click [image] on the toolbar to pick up colors in bitmaps.

To pick up colors in bitmaps


About Import Outline

Use Import Outline to bring an organization structure into a Corel Presentations organization chart. You can use a Corel WordPerfect outline file, a Microsoft Word outline file, and a tabbed ASCII text file as an imported outline.

To create organization charts

To import an organization chart outline


About Eraser

Use Erase on the Edit menu in the Bitmap Editor to delete a selected area in a bitmap. Use the Eraser tools on the toolbar in the Bitmap Editor to change pixels in a bitmap to the transparent color.

Click [image] on the toolbar to erase colors in bitmaps.

To make bitmap colors transparent

To selectively replace colors in bitmaps

To erase areas in bitmaps

To erase in bitmaps


To import an organization chart outline
To import an organization chart outline,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Import Outline.

3	Specify the filename of the outline to import.

Tips

You can also drag a text outline file or select an outline in another application and drop it on the organization chart to import it. Drag selected positions in an organization chart to an open document on your Application Bar to quickly move positions from one chart to another.

Related Topics

About Import Outline


About Rectangle

Use Rectangle to draw rectangles or squares filled with the current color and pattern.

Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools popout on the toolbar to draw rectangles.

To draw rectangles


About Branch Layout

Use Branch Layout to determine how the branches of an organization chart appear--in single row or multiple columns, staggered, or to the left or right of the connecting line, and to specify the orientation of the chart.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose a branch structure for organization charts

To space positions in organization charts

Related Concepts


About Regular Polygon

Use Regular Polygon to draw angular shapes that have sides with equal lengths, such as triangles and octagons. The shapes expand from a center point.

Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar to draw regular polygons, then specify the number of sides you want your shape to have. For example, specify 3 to create a triangle.

The Regular Polygon dialog box is dismissed when you choose another tool on the toolbar or when you choose another object from a menu. You can also close the dialog box by double-clicking its control box.

To draw regular polygons


To choose a branch structure for organization charts
To choose a branch structure for organization charts,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select a box with subordinates to change its branch structure.

3	Right-click a box, then click Branch Structure.

4	Click a branch structure.

Related Topics

About Branch Layout


About Clipart

Use Clipart to add interest, emphasis, and underscore ideas in slides, charts, and drawings.

Many Clipart images and photos are provided with the Corel WordPerfect Suite. During a standard installation, only some of these images are copied to your hard drive. The remaining Clipart images are stored on the Corel WordPerfect Suite CD. You can drag the .WPG images from the Clipart Scrapbook and drop them into a Corel WordPerfect, Corel Presentations, or Corel Quattro Pro document.

You can also insert other types of images into your documents. Corel Presentations can automatically read and convert images in many standard formats, including .JPG, .BMP, .PCX, and more.

Try using Grid/Guides and Snap to Grid or Snap to Guides to help you combine and overlay Clipart with precision.

You can add images to the Scrapbook by copying and pasting .WPG files into the Clipart folder.  You can also create your own group of images and display them as a new category folder in the Scrapbook by creating a new folder, then copying and pasting .WPG image files into it.

To add .WPG files to the Scrapbook

To delete a .WPG file from the Scrapbook

To add new folders to the Scrapbook

To insert a Clipart image from the Scrapbook

To insert a Clipart image from the CD-ROM


About Box Fields

Use Box Fields to add and remove fields from organization chart boxes. You can add more information fields to the currently selected box or boxes. When you create new boxes, they use the same fields as the previous box on the same level.

You can also rename the placeholder text in the box fields. For example, you can change the box field name "< Title >" to "< Position >" or "< Extension >."

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To add fields to organization chart boxes

To rename box fields in organization charts

To add more information to organization charts


About the Select Menu

Use the options on the Select submenu to select one object, all objects, or similar objects for editing. Selected objects are surrounded on the corners and sides by small solid squares called handles.

Click [image] on the Property Bar to automatically select all objects similar to the first one you selected. For example, if you select an arrow, then click [image], Corel Presentations selects all other arrows in the drawing, whether they are curved or straight.

Click [image] on the toolbar to select single objects or areas.  Click [image] to select all objects (you can also right-click a blank area of the drawing or slide, then click Select All from the QuickMenu.)

To select text

To select objects

Related Concepts


To add fields to organization chart boxes
To add fields to organization chart boxes,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the boxes to which you want to add more information.

3	Right-click a box, then click Box Fields.

4	Type the placeholder text for the field you want to add, then click Add.

5	Click Move Up and Move Down to position the new field in the box.

Tips

Select a field, then click Delete to remove it from the box.

To add a new field to all the boxes in your chart, press Ctrl+A to select all positions, then follow steps 3-5.

You can also right-click a box, then click Box Fields.

Related Topics

About Box Fields


About Selective Replace

Use Selective Replace to replace a selected color in the bitmap image, without erasing any other color. For example, you can replace the background color in a pattern while leaving the foreground color untouched.

Click [image] on the toolbar to selectively erase colors in bitmaps.

To erase areas in bitmaps

To selectively replace colors in bitmaps

To erase in bitmaps


To automatically correct errors as you type
To automatically correct errors as you type,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Select the Replace words as you type check box to let QuickCorrect replace misspelled or mistyped words as you enter text.

Tips

QuickCorrect uses its Replace list to find proper spellings, expand abbreviations, and so on. If words you frequently mistype are not on the list, you can also easily add word/correction pairs.

Click Options, then select other types of corrections you want to happen automatically, such as capitalization, spacing, and quote style.

Related Topics

About QuickCorrect


About Special Effects

Use Special Effects to enhance an entire bitmap image or a selected bitmap area by applying one or more of the available effects, such as mosaic, brightness, or wind.

These are the special effects you can use:

Blur

Brightness

Contrast

Emboss

Equalize

Mosaic

Rain

Saturation

Sharpen

Smooth

Spike Removal

Stereogram

Trace Contours

Wind

For information about the controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To use special effects in bitmaps


To create a QuickLink
To create a QuickLink,

1	Right-click an object, then click QuickLink.

2	Click Go to or Action, then select the option you want from the drop-down list.

3	To make the object transparent, select Invisible while playing or printing slides.

Tips

If you are adding more than one QuickLink to a slide, you may find it helpful to give each one a name in the QuickLink Name text box.

If a slide contains animated objects you have to advance manually, all objects must be displayed before you can activate any QuickLinks.

QuickLinks are available only in slide shows (not in drawings). They become active when you play the slide show.

Related Topics

About QuickLinks


About Cancel Bitmap

Cancel Bitmap closes the bitmap editor without saving changes.

To reverse the last change to the bitmap, use Undo (Edit  [image] Undo).

To remove the bitmap without saving changes, and leave the bitmap editor open, use Clear (Edit  [image] Clear).

To close the bitmap editor without saving changes

To clear the bitmap editor

Related Concepts


To edit a QuickLink
To edit a QuickLink,

1	Right-click an object with a QuickLink assigned, then click QuickLink.

2	Make the changes you want, then click OK.

Tips

You can also click Tools [image] QuickLink List to display a slide-by-slide list of all the QuickLinks in your slide show. Click the QuickLink you want to edit, click Edit, and make any changes you want.

Related Topics

About QuickLinks


About Close Bitmap Editor

Use Close Bitmap Editor to return the current bitmap to the drawing window for further editing (such as sizing, rotating, or positioning) or for saving.

To create bitmaps

To close the bitmap editor without saving changes


To clear a QuickLink from an object
To clear a QuickLink from an object,

1	Right-click an object with a QuickLink assigned to it, then click QuickLinks.

2	Click Unassigned.

Tips

The object remains on the slide but does not function as a QuickLink.

You can also click Tools [image] QuickLink list to display a slide-by-slide list of all the QuickLinks in your slide show. Click the QuickLink you want to edit, click Edit, and make any changes you want.

Related Topics

About QuickLinks


About Trace Bitmap

Use Trace Bitmap to convert a bitmap image into a vector object. This feature is most useful on simple black and white or color bitmaps. You should avoid using Trace Bitmap for converting complex images such as grayscale or photographic bitmaps.

When you trace a bitmap, it becomes one or more vector objects and you cannot edit it as a bitmap. Therefore, you may want to save your bitmap before you trace it. You can return the vector object(s) to a bitmap by clicking Tools [image]  Convert to Bitmap or by clicking Edit [image] Undo.

Corel Presentations converts the bitmap into a series of objects with editing points around each object. To move, copy, size, or rotate the parts of the former bitmap as a single object, click Group from the Graphics drop-down list on the Property Bar.

To deselect the objects, click anywhere outside the objects in the drawing window.

To convert a vector object into a bitmap image

Bitmaps vs. Vector Objects

To convert a bitmap image into a vector object

To group objects


About Undo

Use Undo to reverse changes in a drawing or bitmap. Use Undelete to restore deleted text. Undo remembers the last 10 actions of the current session and moves backward through the order.

To undo changes

Related Concepts


To add text to a QuickLink
To add text to a QuickLink,

1	Click [image].

2	Drag to create a small text box on the object you want to appear to be a QuickLink.

3	Type the word(s) you want.

4	Click outside the text box to return to the slide.

Tips

You can also add a predesigned 3-D, gray button with text on it. Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play [image] Textbttn.wcm. After you have typed the text you want to appear on the button, size and position it on the slide. Right-click the button, click QuickLinks, and create a QuickLink for it.

Related Topics

About QuickLinks


About Zoom Bitmap

Use Zoom to magnify a bitmap and edit it one pixel at a time.

To magnify bitmaps


fit exponential

Fits the data in a row or column to an exponential curve: 1n(y)=a+bx.


About Black and White

Use Black and White to take the fill color out of bitmaps, Clipart, drawing objects, and text, and to make the outline black and the interior white. If an object has a black fill, it remains black. If an object has a texture or picture fill, this option is unavailable.

To change objects to black and white


fit linear

Fits the data in a row or column to a straight line: y=a+bx.


About Blend

Use Blend to add objects that gradually go from the shape, size, and color of the first selected object to the second object:

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To contour text around objects

To blend objects


fit log

Fits the data in a row or column to a logarithmic curve: y=a+bx(1n(x)).


About Box Properties

Use Box Properties to define the box type, fill, and size of all boxes in your organization chart. Boxes appear around each position in organization charts.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose box properties for organization charts

Related Concepts


fit polynomial

Fits the data in a row or column to polynomial curves: y=c0+c1*+c2...+cn*xn (where n is the order of the fit). The higher the order (any number up to one less than the number of data points), the more curvature is allowed. This formula provides the most accurate and close fit for inconsistent and fluctuating data. Fit polynomial is useful for filling in the unknown Y axis data points along a curve, but is not as useful for forecasting.


About Brush Attributes

Use Brush Attributes to change the density of the air brush tool, and to select a brush width and shape for the paint brush, air brush, eraser, and selective eraser.

You can also select a brush shape, brush width, and pixel density from the lists on the Property Bar in the Bitmap Editor.

To choose brush attributes


fit power

Fits the data in a row or column to a power curve: y=ax^b.


About Bulleted List Properties

Use Bullet List Properties to control the appearance of bullets, fonts, boxes, and bullet spacing in your bullet chart.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To define bullets

To change the spacing between bulleted items

To change level justification in bulleted lists

To choose fonts for bulleted lists

To choose box options for bulleted lists

Related Concepts


To choose y-axis options
To choose y-axis options,

1	Create or double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis [image] Primary Y or Secondary Y.

3	To specify scale and label values, click the Scale/Labels tab, select Display labels, then specify the maximum, minimum, and major grid values, or select Automatic for each value.

4	Specify a Label scale factor.

5	Click a scaling method.

6	To select a font face, style, size, color, and appearance for y-axis labels, click the Label Font tab.

7	To display a title for the y axis, click the Title Font tab, select Display title, type the title, then specify a Font face, style, size, color, and appearance.

8	To orient y-axis titles, click the Title Orientation tab, then click a title position.

9	To select a display option for your ticks, click the Tick Options tab.

Tips

You can also double-click an axis, then select the axis options you want.

You must have a data series attached to the Secondary Y axis to change its properties.

Related Topics

About the Axis Menu


About Area Chart

Use Area to create a chart that shows the height of all values under the line defined by the data points. Area charts can also display continuous solid areas measuring the data in your Datasheet. Use area charts to show change over time, emphasizing the amount of change rather than the rate of change.

Tips for Creating Data Charts

To create data charts

Related Concepts


About Handouts

Use Handouts when you want to give your audience printed copies of each slide in your presentation. You can specify how many slide thumbnails you want to appear on a page.

To send a slide show to Corel WordPerfect

To print audience notes, speaker notes, and handouts

Related Concepts


About Properties

Use Properties to display the document summary information for the current slide show or drawing. Document summary information includes the original author's name, the name of the person who last saved the document, the title, the subject, any keywords you want to assign, and any comments. It also displays the master file the document is using and the revision number.

To add or edit document summary information

Related Concepts


About Slide Properties

Use Slide Properties as a convenient one-stop place to choose a variety of options for the slides in your slide show. Select the slide you want to work on from the drop-down list at the bottom of the dialog box. You can also apply your choices to all the slides in the slide show, and mark specific slides to skip while playing the slide show.

For more information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

About Selecting Layouts

Related Concepts


About Auto Redraw

Use Auto Redraw to automatically update your chart to reflect the current data or text modifications, to recalculate formulas, and to correct temporarily distorted graphics.

You can also press Ctrl+F3 to manually correct display problems in both the Chart Editor and drawing window.

To redraw charts automatically


About Bar Chart

Use Bar to create a chart that displays the data as bars of varying heights or lengths for easy comparison. You can create vertical or horizontal bar charts. Use bar charts to compare totals over time and show a trend.

Tips for Creating Data Charts

To create data charts

Related Concepts


About Clear All Data

Use Clear All to clear all current data and formatting from your Datasheet.

To clear the Datasheet

Related Concepts


About Animating Objects

Use animation to capture your audience's attention and reinforce your points in a dramatic, fun way. You can animate objects so they move across the screen, or make them appear in place. You can animate any element of a slide except titles, subtitles, data charts, and organization charts that are part of a slide's layout. You can animate the charts and text that you add manually.

These are just some of the things you can do with animations:

Display bulleted list items one at a time, highlight the current point, and display points in reverse order.

Animate Clipart and other objects so that they appear dramatically or move across the slide.

Set the animation speed and direction.

Specify which objects are displayed first, second, third, and so on.

After you have chosen animations for the objects in your slide show, you can also specify when and how the animated objects display. For example, you can display animated Clipart images before bulleted lists, or have a chart appear automatically after a slide has been displayed for a specified number of seconds.

Object Animation has replaced Overlays. Any Corel Presentations 3.0 slide shows that use overlays will convert into object animations. This means the slide show will have fewer slides and smoother animations.

To add a cascade effect to bullets

To animate a bulleted list

To animate an image

Related Concepts


About Clear Data

Use Clear while editing a chart to erase the data in a cell, the cell format, or both.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To clear Datasheet cells

Related Concepts


To choose transitions for slides
To choose transitions for slides,

1	Right-click a slide, then click Transition.

2	Select a transition effect from the list.

3	Specify a direction and speed for the transition if necessary.

4	Select the next slide you want to choose a transition for from the drop-down list at the bottom of the dialog box.

Tips

To use the same transition for every slide in the show, select Apply to all slides in slide show.

Related Topics

About Slide Transitions


About Close

Use Close to exit the active drawing window. If you have made changes to the file since you last saved it, you will be prompted to save the file. Close lets you work on another document without exiting the current session.

To close documents

To close active objects


To add a cascade effect to bullets
To add a cascade effect to bullets,

1	Right-click the bulleted list you want to animate, then click Object Animation.

2	Click Animate object in place to have each bullet point appear in its place in the chart, or click Animate object across screen to have each bullet point move across the slide.

3	Select the animation effect you want to use from the list box.

4	Specify a direction and speed if necessary.

5	To have your bullet points come in one at a time, select Display one at a time.

6	To highlight each bullet point as it appears and have it remain highlighted until the next bullet point appears, select Highlight current bullet.

7	To display the bullet points starting with the last, select Display in reverse order.

Tips

Select Apply to all to use these cascade options for all the bulleted list slides in your slide show.

Steps 5 through 7 apply to bulleted lists you create using bulleted list layouts. Bulleted lists you create manually act as single objects instead of a series of bullets.

Related Topics

About Slide Transitions


About Copy

Use Copy to place objects, text, and data onto the Clipboard without removing it from your chart or document.

The information will remain on the Clipboard until you Cut or Copy new information or until you exit Windows.

To copy and paste objects, positions, and text

To copy and paste data

Related Concepts


To choose a transition for multiple slides
To choose a transition for multiple slides,

1	Click the Slide Sorter tab.

2	Select the slides you want to apply a transition to.

3	Right-click a selected slide, then click Transition.

4	Select the transition effect you want to use for all selected slides.

5	Specify a speed and direction if necessary, then click OK.

Tips

To select consecutive slides, click the first slide, hold down Shift, then click the last slide. To select non-consecutive slides, click the first slide, hold down Ctrl, then click each slide.

You can also apply transition settings to all the slides by selecting Apply to all slides in slide show.

Related Topics

About Slide Transitions


About Cut

Use Cut to remove objects, text, and data from your document and store it on the Clipboard.

The information will remain on the Clipboard until you Cut or Copy new information or until you exit Windows.

You can also drag text, Clipart, drawing objects, and organization chart positions from the drawing window or slide to a document name on the Application Bar for fast and easy cutting and pasting.

To cut and paste objects, positions, and text

To cut and paste data

Related Concepts


About Gradient Settings

Use Gradient Settings to select the gradient type, angle, offsets, blending, and fill methods for gradient fills.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose fills for objects

Related Concepts


About Axis Properties

Use Axis Properties to control the display of the axes in your chart. Click the axis you want to change the properties for.

You can create a chart with two different Y axes to compare series of data that differ in numeric type. For example, you could measure dollars on the primary Y axis and units sold on the secondary Y axis.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose x-axis options

To choose y-axis options


About Pattern Settings

Use Pattern Settings to select the transparent color and fill method for objects filled with patterns.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose fills for objects

Related Concepts


About Column Width

Use Column Width to set a common width for all columns in a Datasheet. Specify how many characters wide the columns are.

You can also move the mouse pointer over the right edge of the Legend button on the Datasheet until it becomes a double-sided arrow, then drag to size the columns. All the columns will be the same width.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose column widths in the Datasheet


About Texture Settings

Use Texture Settings to select whether the texture will be aligned to the page or to the object.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To fill objects with textures

Related Concepts


About Exclude Row/Col

Use Exclude Row/Col to specify which data in your Datasheet should not display in your chart. Unless you exclude some data, the chart displays all current data. The excluded cells appear dimmed in the Datasheet. You can change data in the excluded rows and columns, but the changes will not appear in the chart until you include them again.

To exclude data in charts

Related Concepts


About Picture Settings

Use Picture Settings to specify how the bitmap picture will fill the object.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To fill objects with pictures

Related Concepts


About Data Fill

Use Fill in a Datasheet to fill selected cells with a linear, growth, or date data series. These options apply to all selected Datasheet cells, including multiple columns and rows. You can specify negative values if you want a descending series.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To automatically fill in chart series


About Explode Slice

Use Explode Slice to specify the slice of a pie chart you want to move away from the rest of the pie and the distance you want to move it.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To separate pie slices from a pie chart

Related Concepts


About Format

Use Format to control how numbers and dates are displayed in a Datasheet.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To format numeric data

To format chart data

To format dates in charts


About Box Spacing

Use Box Spacing to set the amount of space between subordinates and managers and coworkers in an organization chart.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To orient organization charts

To choose a branch structure for organization charts

To space positions in organization charts


About Formulas

Use Formulas to apply standard mathematical formulas to entire rows and columns of Datasheet data.

You can also use the Fit functions to create a linear regression trend chart to predict such things as future costs or sales potential. Using a statistical function and data plotted on a chart, you can calculate a trend line.

Here are the formulas you can use:

absolute value

average

cosine

cumulative total

difference

fit exponential

fit linear

fit log

fit polynomial

fit power

maximum

minimum

moving average

none

percent of total

sine

sum

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To use formulas in the Datasheet

To display statistics about chart data


To format numeric data
To format numeric data,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Data [image] Format.

3	Select Numeric from the Format type drop-down list.

4	Select User Defined from the Numeric formats list.

5	Deselect Floating, then specify the number of digits you want to display after a decimal point.

6	Select the numeric types you want to use.

7	Select an option for displaying negative numbers.

Tips

To change the format of only a few cells, select the cells you want to change, then follow steps 2-6.

You can also right-click the Datasheet, then click Format.

Related Topics

About Format


About Frame Properties

Use Frame to control how the base and frame(s) of your data chart display. A chart frame is a group of lines enclosing the back, front, left, right, top, and/or bottom of a chart. Each line in a chart frame represents a data value. You can select frame border width, color, fill attributes, and the base height.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose frame options


To format dates in charts
To format dates in charts,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Data [image] Format.

3	Select Date from the Format type drop-down list.

4	Select User Defined from the Date/Time formats list, then click Custom.

5	Build the date format you want by clicking the tabs, inserting the date and time codes, and typing text and punctuation in the Edit date/time format text box.

Tips

The date format you create appears in the Date/time sample field at the bottom of the dialog box.

You can also right-click the Datasheet, then click Format.

When you enter two-digit years (dd/mm/yy) in the Datasheet, 00 to 50 corresponds to the years 2000 to 2050, and 51 to 99 corresponds to the years 1951 to 1999. For example, if you entered the two-digit year 26 in the Datasheet, it would correspond to the year 2026.  If you entered the two-digit year 61, it would correspond to the year 1961.

Related Topics

About Format


About Grid Properties for Data Charts

Use Grid Properties to control how grid lines display in a data chart. Grid lines represent value increments in a chart frame, parallel to the x axis and y axis in a chart.

Major grid lines usually have labels, while minor lines fall between the labels. You can specify how many minor grid lines should fall between each pair of major grid lines, and how many major grid lines you want for each value increment.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose grid options for charts


To create 3-D charts
To create 3-D charts,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar.

2	Click the drawing window to create a full-window chart or drag to define a chart area.

3	Select a chart type.

4	Select 3-D to give the chart a three-dimensional appearance.

5	Click the pre-defined chart style you want to use, then click OK.

6	Type your data in the Datasheet.

Tips

To change your chart to 3-D after creating it, click Chart [image] Layout/Type, then select 3-D.

Deselect 3-D to make your chart two dimensional.

About Layout/Type Properties


About Include Row/Col

Use Include Row/Col to specify which data in your Datasheet should be displayed in your chart. Use this option to include data that was previously excluded.

To include data in charts

Related Concepts


To create horizontally-oriented charts
To create horizontally-oriented charts,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar.

2	Click the drawing window to create a full-window chart or drag to define a chart area.

3	Select a chart type.

4	Click a pre-defined chart style, then click OK.

5	Click Chart [image] Layout/Type.

6	Select Horizontal.

Tips

Selecting Horizontal makes the Y axes horizontal and the X axis vertical for the current chart.

You can make area, bar, high/low, line, and scatter charts horizontal.

About Layout/Type Properties


About Data Labels

Use Data Labels to choose the position, font, box type, and fill attributes for the data labels for your chart. Labels include text that shows the numeric value, time period, or category of a bar, line, pie slice, or other object in a data chart. A label leader or slice pointer is a line that attaches a data label to a slice in a pie chart. You can drag pie chart labels where you want.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To label data charts

To label pie charts


To change data chart appearance
To change data chart appearance,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/Type.

3	Select a chart type.

4	Click a chart style.

5	Specify an Angle, Depth, Height, Size, Tilt, Width, and/or Overlap amount, if these options apply to the chart type you selected.

6	Select any other appearance options.

Tips

The available appearance options change, depending on the type of chart you are creating.

Related Topics

About Data Chart Gallery


To change radar chart appearance
To change radar chart appearance,

1	Create or double-click a radar chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/Type.

3	Click a radar chart style.

4	Click the Appearance and Grid options you want.

5	Select Separate Y axis to put each series on a different Y axis.

Related Topics

About Radar Chart


To change surface chart appearance
To change surface chart appearance,

1	Create or double-click a surface chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/Type.

3	Select 3D to create a three-dimensional topography.

4	Select Outline contours, then select an outline color for the lines between each series of data.

5	Select a color for each 10% increment of data.

6	Click Blend Range Colors to create a smooth transition from the color for the 1-10% category to the color for the 91-100% category.

Related Topics

About Surface Chart


About Legend

Use Legend to select the type, position, text font, title, title font, box type, and box fill for a descriptive legend for your chart. A legend is a list of the colors, patterns, or symbols used in a chart to show which series label corresponds to which bar, line, pie slice, and so on.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose legend options


To display pie charts as stacked columns
To display pie charts as stacked columns,

1	Create or double-click a pie chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/Type.

3	Select the pie chart you want to display as a column from the Current pie drop-down list.

4	Click Column.

Tips

Displaying one pie as a column makes linked pie charts more clear and readable.

Related Topics

About Pie Chart


About Perspective

Use Perspective to adjust the viewing angle in your 3-D chart.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose perspective options


To link a pie slice to another pie chart
To link a pie slice to another pie chart,

1	Create or double-click a pie chart with two pies in it.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/Type.

3	Select Pie 1 from the Current pie drop-down list.

4	Select Link pie 2 to slice, then specify the slice in Pie 1 that should be connected to Pie 2.

Tips

You can link pies only when you have two pies in the same chart.

Explode Slice is disabled in a linked pie chart.

Select Proportional to make the pies reflect their data values in their size.

Related Topics

About Pie Chart


About Language

Use the Language tab in Environment Settings to select the content language you want to use when you enter or edit text. This tells Corel Presentations which language to use for Spell Checker, Thesaurus, Dates, and so on. You can also select an interface language to use for menu items, dialogs, Help prompts, and messages.

At least one additional language module must be installed in order to use this feature.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose language modules


About Recalculate

Use Recalculate in a Datasheet to update calculated values after you make changes in a row or column that is affected by a formula. You must have previously defined a formula which includes that particular row or column.

To recalculate formulas


To change pie chart appearance
To change pie chart appearance,

1	Create or double-click a pie chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/Type.

3	Specify how thick you want your 3-D pie to appear in the Depth text box.

4	Specify how large the pie chart is compared to the chart area in the Size text box.

5	Specify the angle on which to rotate the pie slices around the pie chart in the Angle text box.

6	Specify how much you want your 3-D pie to tilt in the Tilt text box.

7	Select Sort slice in the Appearance area to arrange the pie slices from largest to smallest data value.

8	Select Proportional in the Appearance area to size pies in the chart according to their data values.

Tips

The Depth, Size, Angle, and Tilt you specify apply to the pie you select from the Current pie drop-down list.

You can drag pie labels and the title where you want in the chart.

You can also right-click the chart and click Layout/Type Properties.

Related Topics

About Pie Chart


About Series Properties

Use Series Properties to select the type, axis, fill attributes, and line width/style for each data series in your chart. You can create mixed charts by changing the type of an individual series to emphasize it. For example, you can display one series in a bar chart as a line or area, or assign a series to different Y axis.

You can also change series colors to focus attention on important data, using brighter colors and darker colors. Use a pattern, gradient, texture, or picture fill and different bar shapes to better distinguish series in a black-and-white chart.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To change series colors

To fill a data series with pictures

To change series types and shapes

To change series line widths, styles, and colors

To choose series options


To assign a data series to the secondary y axis
To assign a data series to the secondary y axis,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Series.

3	Click the arrow buttons in the dialog box to select the series you want to assign to the secondary y axis.

4	Click Secondary (Y2) to specify it as the axis you want for the series.

Tips

Use two y axes to compare series of data of different numeric types. For example, you could measure revenue on the primary y axis and units sold on the secondary y axis. Use a different type of series (for example, a line series on a bar chart) to further emphasize the differences.

You can also double-click a series to change its properties.

Related Topics

About Axis Properties


About Sort Data

Use Sort to sort rows or columns in a Datasheet. Numeric values appear first, text values second, and empty cells last. Select the entire row or column, including the legends and labels, to sort data using the Legend or Labels headings.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To sort chart data


To fill a data series with pictures
To fill a data series with pictures,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click [image].

3	Click the left or right arrow button in the dialog box to select the series you want to fill with a picture.

4	Click the Fill tab, then click [image] as the fill style.

5	Select a category of pictures, then click a picture.

6	Click Picture Settings, click an option to fill the series with the picture, then click OK.

7	Click the Line tab, then select "X" from the Style drop-down list to turn off the lines around the series, leaving just the picture.

Tips

You can also double-click the series you want to change, then select series options.

Related Topics

About Series Properties


About Data Statistics

Use Statistics to display statistical and curve fit information about data in a row, a column, or a group of selected cells in a Datasheet.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To use formulas in the Datasheet

To display statistics about chart data

Related Concepts


To change series line widths, styles, and colors
To change series line widths, styles, and colors,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select a series in the chart.

3	Click [image], then select a line color.

4	Click [image], then select a line style for the series, or select "X" for none.

5	Click [image], then select a line width for the series.

Tips

You can also double-click the series you want to change, then select series options.

Related Topics

About Series Properties


About Title Properties

Use Title Properties to create, edit, and display the chart's title, and to select the font, fill, outline, box type, box fill, and position options for the title.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To create and edit chart titles


To label pie charts
To label pie charts,

1	Create or double-click a pie chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Data Labels, then click the Position tab.

3	Select a position for the Value, Percent, and Label data label boxes.

4	Select a Leader length for labels outside the charts.

5	Click an Orientation for labels containing more than one value.

6	To select the font, size, style, and appearance of the label text, click the Font tab.

7	To select a box style, border, and color, click the Box Type tab.

8	To select the fill style and options for the label boxes, click the Box Fill tab.

Tips

You can also double-click a label, then select label options.

You can drag a title, subtitle, and labels where you want in a pie chart. To restore a label or title to its original position, right-click the text, then select Reset Text.

Related Topics

About Data Labels


About Delete Row/Column

Use Delete while editing a chart to remove rows and columns from the Datasheet.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To delete rows and columns


To display x-axis labels
To display x-axis labels,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis [image] X, then click the Labels tab.

3	Select Display labels.

4	Select Show ticks on labels only to put labels on displayed ticks only.

5	Select Stagger to alternate labels up and down along the axis.

6	Click a pre-defined number of labels to skip, or specify the number of labels to skip.

7	Click the Label Font tab, then specify a font face, style, size, appearance, and Text color for the x-axis labels.

Tips

You can also double-click the axis labels, then select label options.

Related Topics

About Axis Properties


About Edit

Use Edit to activate text, drawing objects, Clipart, charts, or bitmaps so you can edit them. This item changes its text and action to fit the object you have selected.

Edit Bitmap: Click to activate an existing bitmap for pixel-by-pixel editing. You can rotate, skew, and stretch bitmaps like other drawing objects while in the drawing window.

Edit Chart: Click to activate an existing chart for editing, with the Datasheet displayed.

Edit Group: Click to activate an image for editing.

Edit Points: Click to activate a drawn object for editing by moving editing handles. To select multiple handles, press Ctrl while you click the handles you want to select. Drawn objects include lines, curves, filled objects, arrows, rectangles, circles, and so on. These are the menu items included in the QuickMenu for editing objects:

Add: Click to insert a new point between the selected handle and the next handle.

Delete: Click to remove the selected handle.

Open: Click to remove the segment between the selected point and the next point drawn to create an open object.

Close: Click to complete the outline of an object by connecting the first and last handle of an object's outline. When an outline is closed, the object can be filled with a color, pattern, gradient, texture, or picture.

To Curve: Click to create a curve at the selected handle.

To Line: Click to replace the curve with straight lines.

Smooth: Click to soften a curve.

Symmetric: Click to even the length of the direction lines on a curve.

Edit Text: Click to activate text for editing, font changes, justification, and so forth.

To edit drawn objects

To edit embedded objects

To edit linked objects

To edit charts

To edit bitmap pixels

To edit text


To display an axis title
To display an axis title,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis [image] X, Primary Y or Secondary Y, then click the Title Font tab.

3	Select Display title, then type the title for the axis in the text box.

4	Select a font face, size, style, color, and appearance.

5	Click the Title Orientation tab, then click the direction you want the title to run.

Tips

You can also double-click the axis titles, then select title options.

Related Topics

About Axis Properties


About Edit Current Cell

Use Edit Current Cell while editing a chart to modify data in an individual cell in the Datasheet.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To edit cells


To display ticks on an axis
To display ticks on an axis,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis [image] X, Primary Y or Secondary Y, then click the Tick Options tab.

3	Click an option for displaying major ticks on the axis, or click None to display no major ticks.

4	Click an option for displaying minor ticks on the axis, or click None to display no minor ticks.

Tips

You can also double-click an axis, then select the axis options you want.

Related Topics

About Axis Properties


To display y-axis labels
To display y-axis labels,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis [image] Primary Y or Secondary Y, then click the Scale/Labels tab.

3	Select Display labels.

4	Specify the Minimum, Maximum, and Major Grid values, or select Automatic for each to have Corel Presentations read in the current data values.

5	Specify a Label scale factor.

6	Click a Scaling method.

7	Click the Label Font tab, then select a font face, size, style, color, and appearance for the y-axis labels.

Tips

You can also double-click the axis labels, then select the label options you want.

You must have assigned a series to the secondary y axis to change its properties.

Related Topics

About Axis Properties


To display titles and subtitles with boxes around them
To display titles and subtitles with boxes around them,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Title or Subtitle, then click the Box Type tab.

3	Make sure Display chart title is selected (near the top of the dialog box) otherwise the title and/or subtitle will not appear with your chart.

4	Click a box style and select a border color.

5	Click the Box Fill tab, then click a fill style button and fill you want to use in the box.

6	Click the Position tab, then click a position for the chart title or subtitle.

Tips

You can also double-click the title or subtitle, then select the options you want.

Select and drag the title and subtitle to position them on the chart. To restore a title or subtitle to its original position, right-click the text, then select Reset Text.

Related Topics

About Title Properties


To choose picture or texture page backgrounds
To choose picture or texture page backgrounds,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup, then click the Page Color tab.

2	Click [image] or [image] as the fill style.

3	Select a texture or picture category.

4	Click a texture or picture.

Tips

You can also right-click the drawing window and click Page Setup.

Related Topics

About Page Setup


To add or edit document summary information
To add or edit document summary information,

1	Click File [image] Properties.

2	Type or edit the document summary information for the current document.

Tips

The Revision number updates automatically each time you open and save the document.

Related Topics

About Properties


About Go to Cell

Use Go To Cell while editing a chart to move to any cell in the Datasheet. Specify the column and row of the cell you want to move to. For example, C4 specifies the cell at the intersection of the fourth row and the C column.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To move to a cell


About Publishing Slide Shows as HTML Documents

Share your ideas with the world in less time and with less effort using Corel Presentations Internet Publisher to format your slide shows as HTML documents!

Convert a copy of a slide show to HTML format to put on the World Wide Web.

Allow Internet users around the world to view your slide show on the web, with or without a copy of Corel Presentations on their own computer, and without the use of a special viewer.

Select a web page arrangement option, and the color of web page text, background, and hyperlinks.

Automatically generate a separate, hyperlinked table of contents page and/or a Go to Slide bar for each page.

Include any speaker notes you have prepared for a slide.

Easily create framed web pages for enhanced viewing in the Netscape Navigator 2.0 and higher browsers.

Enjoy full support and integration with Internet Publisher in Corel WordPerfect for Windows 95--just open your web slide show in Corel WordPerfect for quick access to a variety of in-depth, easy-to-use HTML authoring and editing tools!

When you publish a new or existing slide show to the Internet, each slide is converted to a JPEG, GIF, or PNG image and, depending on the page arrangement option you have selected, it is placed in one or more HTML (HyperText Markup Language) files with a .HTML or .HTM extension. Each HTML file created represents a single web page and a slide that your reader will view on their browser.

You can add a variety of navigation and slide information options to each web page including page numbers, page titles, a Go to Slide bar, speaker notes, and a link to the slide shows' table of contents page.

To create an Internet slide show with full multimedia capabilities

To publish a document in JAVA format using Corel Barista

To publish documents to Envoy

To publish documents to HTML

Related Concepts


About High/Low Chart

Use High/Low to create a line chart that uses lines and bars to show the high and low values compared over time. For example, a high/low chart could compare daily low and high values of a stock over five days; or it could show the opening, closing, and range of stock prices in a single day. A vertical line or bar connects high and low values for the time period; horizontal marks or bars show opening and closing values. Type a new label in every fourth column. For each label, type all four data values in each row. The data values should be entered in this order: High, Low, Open, Close.

Tips for Creating Data Charts

To create data charts

Related Concepts


To publish documents to Envoy
To publish documents to Envoy,

1	Open or create the slide show or drawing you want to publish in Envoy format.

2	Click File [image] Send To [image] Envoy.

Tips

Publishing to Envoy converts the document to Envoy format and opens it in the Envoy Viewer. Envoy has its own comprehensive online Help system, so you can find answers to all your Envoy-related questions.

Related Topics

About Publishing Slide Shows as HTML Documents


About Import Data

Use Import Data to retrieve either a spreadsheet file created in another application or Datasheet data saved as an ASCII or ANSI file into your chart. Imported data will overwrite any existing data in the chart. You can import charts saved with the spreadsheet along with their data and attributes by choosing them from the list of range names.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To import spreadsheet data

To import text data


About Selected Object Viewer

Use Selected Object Viewer to display which objects are currently selected. This is especially helpful if, for example, you have a Clipart image composed of many groups of small objects and need to see which object you have selected or want to edit. The selected objects appear in the Viewer window, in the same position and arrangement as in the drawing window. As you select and deselect objects, they appear and disappear from the Viewer. You can also size the Viewer and move it to any location on the screen.

To select objects

To display which objects are currently selected

Related Concepts


About Line Chart

Use Line to create a data chart that shows change over time, emphasizing the rate of change rather than the amount of the change, or show a trend for a particular set of dates.

Tips for Creating Data Charts

To create data charts

Related Concepts


To display which objects are currently selected
To display which objects are currently selected,

1	Select one or more objects.

2	Click View [image] Selected Object Viewer.

Tips

Click View [image] Selected Object Viewer again to close the Viewer window.

To select multiple objects, press Ctrl while clicking them.

Related Topics

About Selected Object Viewer


About Auto Select

Use Auto Select to automatically select objects as soon as you finish drawing them.

To automatically select objects as you finish drawing them

Related Concepts


To automatically select objects as you finish drawing them
To automatically select objects as you finish drawing them,

1	Click View [image] Auto Select.

Related Topics

About Auto Select


About Open

Use Open to open as many as nine previously saved documents in separate windows in Corel Presentations. You can import slide shows from Freelance, Harvard Graphics, and PowerPoint. A copy of the imported file is converted into the Corel Presentations slide show format (.SHW). You can then edit and save the file as you would any other slide show in Corel Presentations.

The name of any opened document appears along the Application Bar at the bottom of the window. Click the document name to quickly move between documents. You can drag text, Clipart, drawing objects, and organization chart positions to a document name in the bar for fast and easy cutting and pasting.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To open documents


About Symbols

Use Symbols to access characters and symbols that do not appear on your keyboard, such as phonetic symbols in other alphabets. You can insert these symbols at the insertion point in a text box or text line. Not all fonts include all symbols. Excluded symbols are represented by hollow boxes on your screen.

You can also use symbols as bullets to add variety to bulleted lists.

To insert symbols into text

Related Concepts


About Paste

Use Paste to place objects, text, and data from the Clipboard into the drawing window, Datasheet, or organization chart.

For data charts, place the cursor where you want the text to appear. If you cut or copied a block of data from more than one cell in the Datasheet, the cell you click becomes the top-left corner of the block, and the data fills the cells to the right and down from it. Pasted information will overwrite any existing information in a Datasheet.

For organization charts, just select the position where you want the cut or copied branch to appear.

In the drawing window, the object appears in the same place as the original. If you haven't moved the original, the copy appears on top of it.

In bitmaps, you can move the object after you paste it; however, once you deselect it, you must use Select Area to move it again.

To cut and paste objects, positions, and text

To cut and paste data

To copy and paste data

To copy and paste objects, positions, and text

Related Concepts


To insert symbols into text
To insert symbols into text,

1	Create or double-click a text box, text line, or bulleted list.

2	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the symbol.

3	Click Insert [image] Symbol.

4	Select the symbol set you want, then select a symbol.

5	Click Insert to insert the symbol and leave the dialog box open, or click Insert and Close to insert the symbol and close the dialog box.

Tips

The Symbols dialog box provides more than 1,500 different symbols grouped into fifteen symbol sets. Each symbol set is numbered, and the combination of set number and symbol number identifies the symbol. For example, the musical note is in symbol set 5, and its number is 9, so its identifying number is 5,9. Therefore, if you know the number of the symbol you want, you can type it into the Number text box directly, without selecting the symbol set.

Related Topics

About Symbols


About Paste Transposed

Use Paste Transposed while editing a chart to switch the rows and columns of selected cells. Data from left to right will appear from top to bottom. Data in the first row will be inserted in the first column and so on. The examples below show data before and after using Paste Transposed:

Before	After
1   4   7	1   3   6
3   9   2	4   9   8
6   8   5	7   2   5
The selection should contain the same number of rows and columns. If you select more rows than columns (or vice versa), Paste Transposed takes the larger of the two numbers and performs the function as if you had specified that number of rows and columns. If that happens, the transposed data may overwrite other data in your Datasheet.

To transpose data


About Select Levels

Use Select Levels to specify how many of the organization chart levels you want to select.

To select levels in organization charts

Related Concepts


About Pie Chart

Use Pie to create a circular chart that shows each data cell in the Datasheet as a slice of the circle, what proportion that slice is, and how it relates to the whole. You can create as many as nine pie charts in the same Datasheet.

Tips for Creating Data Charts

To create data charts

Related Concepts


To select levels in organization charts
To select levels in organization charts,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Click Edit [image] Select [image] Levels.

3	Specify the level you want to begin your selection with.

4	Specify the number of levels below the starting level you want to select.

Tips

You can also select a box, right-click, then click Select Level to select all boxes on that level.

Hold down the Ctrl key and click only the positions you want, to select them.

Related Topics

About Select Levels


About Radar Chart

Use Radar to create a chart that uses a radial grid to compare totals and show variations and trends over time, or show the relationships and proportions of parts to a whole.

Tips for Creating Data Charts

To create data charts

Related Concepts


About Export to Bitmap Formats

Use Export bitmap to specify the size, units of measure, screen resolution, and compression for objects or documents you are saving in bitmap format.

You can save Corel Presentations objects to many different bitmap file formats, including .BMP (Windows bitmap), .CPT (Corel Photo-Paint), .GIF (Graphics Interchange Format), .JPG (Joint Photographic Experts Group), .MAC (MacPaint), and .TIF (Tagged Image File Format).

For more information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To export files to different formats

To save selected objects

To convert a vector object into a bitmap image

To create bitmaps

To save documents as bitmaps


About Save Style

Use Save Style to save a chart style so you can use the same box options and attributes, bullets, and other chart characteristics for other charts. Data and text are not saved.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To save chart styles


To connect to an online information service
To connect to an online information service,

1	Click Help [image] Corel Web Site.

Tips

You must have a modem, and Internet Service Provider, and Internet software (Corel WordPerfect Suite already comes with Netscape Navigator) to connect to the Web.

About Corel Web Site


About Scatter Chart

Use Scatter to create a chart that plots the interception points of one set of X values and one or more set of Y values to detect a correlation.

Tips for Creating Data Charts

To create data charts

Related Concepts


About Ask the PerfectExpert

Corel Presentations comes with its own built-in expert which is ready to help you with any task. Ask the PerfectExpert lets you type in your own words, phrases, and sentences, then displays the Help information you need. Ask the PerfectExpert is available on the Help menu and on the Help dialog box tab.

Related Concepts


About Select All Data

Use Select All while editing a chart to select all columns and rows in the Datasheet that have data in at least one of the cells.

To select all Datasheet cells


About Linked and Embedded Objects

Objects may be either linked or embedded. Both methods place a copy of the object in your drawing or slide. When you link an object, you place a copy of the object in your document with a link to the original. Linking is dynamic, meaning that whenever the original is changed, the copy is automatically updated.

When you embed an object, you place a copy of the object in your document without a link to the original. This means that you can edit the copy without altering the original.

In most cases, when you double-click an embedded object in the client application, its source application launches (providing that the source application is installed). You can then edit the object in its source application as desired. Your changes do not affect any file other than the document you embedded the object into. (Double-clicking an embedded media object sets the object in motion or play. To edit this object type, select the object first, then choose the appropriate editing command from a pull-down menu.)

When you double-click a linked object, its source application opens the source file. The changes you make are saved in the original file, as well as in your linked document.

The primary difference between linking and embedding is the location where the actual data for the object is stored. The data for a linked object remains in the source file. In contrast, the data for an embedded object is stored in the destination file.

Linked objects cannot travel with documents outside the local file system of the computer, but they are more efficient than embedded objects because a single instance of the object's data can serve many different documents. You should keep this difference in mind when deciding whether to link or embed information. Generally speaking, if you want to use the information in one document only, it's better to embed. In most other cases, it's better to link.

Related Topics

About Links


To change the spacing between bulleted items
To change the spacing between bulleted items,

1	Create or double-click a bulleted list.

2	Right-click the bulleted list, click Bulleted List Properties, then click the Spacing tab.

3	Specify the main bullet, subordinate bullet, and line spacing you want to use.

Tips

You can also right-click the bulleted list, then click Bulleted List Properties from the QuickMenu.

Related Topics

About Bulleted List Properties


About Shadow

Use Shadow to create and change shadow properties for objects.

To choose shadow attributes

Related Concepts


To display the position of the pointer in the Application Bar
To display the position of the pointer in the Application Bar,

1	Click View [image] Show Pointer Position.

Tips

The position display uses the units of measure you specify in the Screen Elements tab of Display Settings (click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click Display).

You can also right-click the bottom right of the Application Bar, then select Display Pointer Position.

Related Topics

About Show Pointer Position


To publish documents to HTML
To publish documents to HTML,

1	Open an existing slide show or create a new one that you want to convert to a web document.

2	Click File [image] Internet Publisher [image] Publish to HTML.

3	The Internet Publisher will guide you through creating an HTML slide show for the Internet. Follow each step as it appears, then click Next.

4	When you have made your selections, click Finish.

Tips

To increase the versatility of your Internet slide show, you can allow users to download the original version of your show with all sound, transitions, animation, and advance options intact. Select Include slide show file for downloading.

If you want your readers to be able to play your slide show on the Internet, click Publish to Show It! in the Internet Publisher dialog box.

Related Topics

About Internet Publisher


About Surface Chart

Use Surface to create a chart that represents data values as a three-dimensional area that bulges and dips like the contour of a landscape as it connects the data points. For example, you can use a surface chart to show business profits and losses as the peaks and valleys of a mountain range. The color of the solid area changes as the surface rises and falls.

To change surface chart appearance

Tips for Creating Data Charts

To create data charts

Related Concepts


Macros Included with Corel Presentations

When you installed Corel Presentations the following macros were included to help you simplify and automate several common tasks. Try them!

To play a macro, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play, then double-click a macro (.WCM) filename.

CHNGFNT.WCM

Changes all the fonts (face, color, and appearance) throughout your slide show to the font you specify.

HEADFOOT.WCM

Adds a Header/Footer to your document, including the date, filename, slide number, slide title, and other information you specify.

IMGEMAP. WCM

Creates HTML Image Map codes for your existing bitmaps so you can use them on the Internet.

MACEDIT.WCM

Displays a macro to edit in Corel Presentations.

MASTCONV.WCM

Converts your PR30 and PR20 masters to PR7 masters. Corel Presentations 7 and Corel Presentations 8 both use the 7 file type.

OBJ2BACK.WCM

Moves the selected object(s) on the slide layer to the background layer of a slide show master.

SHW2WPG. WCM

Converts all slides in a slide show to separate WPG files.

TEXTANIM.WCM

Animates each letter in a selected text box or text line.

TEXTBTTN.WCM

Creates a three-dimensional button graphic with text you type in.

For more detailed information about creating and editing macros, click Help [image] Help Topics [image] Contents [image] Macros [image] Macro Programming to open the Corel Presentations Macros Help file.

To play a macro

Related Concepts


About Table

Use Table to create a two-dimensional list that displays data in rows and columns. You can use tables alone, or display them with charts by clicking the Table button on the Layout/Type dialog box. Use tables to show numerical information in columns and rows.

Any adjustments you make to the column width(s) in the Datasheet are also reflected in the column width(s) of your Table (you may need to click [image] to update the Table chart display).

Tips for Creating Data Charts

To create data charts

Related Concepts


About Internet Publisher

Share your ideas with the world in less time and with less effort using Corel Presentations Internet Publisher!

Publish to HTML

When you publish a new or existing slide show to the Internet, each slide is converted to a JPEG, GIF, or PNG image and placed in one or more HTML (HyperText Markup Language) files with a .HTM extension. Each HTML file created represents a single web page and a slide that readers will view on their browsers.

When you use PNG images, your browser may need to use extra add-on viewers to display them. Please see your browser documentation for information about how it handles PNGs.

Publish to Corel Barista

Use Corel Barista to publish rich documents for display in a Java window on the World Wide Web. Anything you can publish from Corel WordPerfect or Corel Presentations can be viewed in any Java-enabled Web Browser. For example, you can view columns, multiple fonts, and text contoured around an object. Corel Barista also supports slide transitions and sound.

Publish to Show It!

Publish your slide show to the World Wide Web with full animation, transition, sound, and video support. You can play your slide show over the Internet just like you would on any computer. Your viewers can watch the show by clicking or pressing the Spacebar to advance slides, or you can create a self-running demonstration with full narration and automatic transtions to advertise your ideas, company, and products on the Web.

Browse the Web

Launch your chosen browser and surf the Internet.

Basic Internet Facts and Requirements

To publish documents to HTML

Related Concepts


About View Datasheet

Use View Datasheet to display the Datasheet as a floating palette, or to hide it. Clicking the menu option or the toolbar button [image] toggles the display off and on.

To display or hide the Datasheet


More Information about DirectDraw

Corel Presentations takes advantage of DirectDraw technology to use video memory to display your slide shows with smoother transitions. DirectDraw is a program that helps manage the memory in your video card.

With DirectDraw, you can decide how you want to use the video memory your computer has. You can use the available video memory for smoother transitions without changing how the slide show looks, or you can choose to use the memory to keep your slides in high resolution or truer color palettes.

If you have not installed DirectDraw, these options are unavailable.

If you do not have it already, you (or a friend with Internet access) can download DirectDraw absolutely free from the Corel Presentations 8 home page on the Corel Web Site.

Related Topics

About Display Settings


About Clear

Use Clear to erase objects in the current drawing or slide show without opening a new window. Clear does not return temporary settings (like grid and ruler displays) to the defaults. For backgrounds and layouts, use Clear to erase objects in the current master.

When you use Clear, it will also empty any actions temporarily stored in Undo and Redo, up to that point in your session.

To clear the drawing window


About Movie

Use Movie to insert video files (.AVI, .MOV, .MPEG, .QT) onto your slides to add interest to your presentation. Using a movie clip can catch the audience's attention and reinforce your point. As with all multimedia effects, however, inappropriate or irrelevant video files can distract your listeners from your message.

In the Movie Properties dialog box, you can choose display and playback options.

When you insert .MOV or .MPEG files, you need to have the drivers installed to play them correctly. The latest drivers are usually available for downloading on the manufacturers' websites.

While you can insert a movie file by clicking Insert [image] Object and specifying the file, using Movie lets you position the clip anywhere on the slide, and ensures that when it plays it remains in that location and at the same size, as well as giving you added appearance and playback controls.

Using Movie to embed an audio-visual file makes the file a part of your slide show. This means you do not have to send a copy of the original movie file along with the slide show if you want to edit or play it somewhere else.

To insert movie files

Related Concepts


About Combine

Use Combine to create a single image from two or more drawing objects. The fill colors and patterns of the bottom object are assigned to the combined object, and overlapping areas become transparent. For example, you could draw a small rectangle in the center of a large rectangle to create a picture frame.

You cannot combine bitmaps, text, or charts.

Combined vs. Grouped Objects

Grouped objects are treated as one object as you are editing, but the individual objects retain their original attributes. Combined objects are also treated as one object as you edit, but the new objects take on the attributes of the first object created.

To separate combined or grouped objects

To combine objects

Related Concepts


About Connectors

Use Connectors to select the angle, line color, line style, and line width of connecting lines between levels and positions in an organization chart.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To change connectors between organization chart levels


Basic Internet Facts and Requirements

Here is a basic introduction to what the Internet is and how you can access it.

The Internet and the World Wide Web

The Internet is a global network of computers. The World Wide Web is the most commonly used part of the Internet. Documents on the World Wide Web are viewed with a browser program such as Netscape Navigator, which is included with this suite.

All kinds of information is available on the World Wide Web. It is stored on personal, corporate, educational, and government file servers throughout the world. You can browse a library catalog, play sound or video clips, download software documentation, or view an engineering schematic or a slide show.

Browsers display web documents and follow hypertext links to jump from one document--or place in a document--to another. You can also download web documents to your computer or file server.

With the Publish to HTML feature in Corel Presentations, you can create a professional-looking slide show that describes your company's goods and services--or your personal interests--and put it on a web-enabled file server where anyone can view it on the World Wide Web. An Internet service provider can help you get your home page advertised or indexed at the most popular web sites.

World Wide Web Requirements

To browse (view) documents on the World Wide Web, you need:

A computer configured for a TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) network

An installed modem or other network connection

Installed browser software such as Netscape Navigator

An account with an Internet service provider through your TCP/IP network connection

To make a document available on the World Wide Web, you need access to a web server. See your network administrator or online service provider for assistance.

Local Web

A local web consists of documents connected by hypertext links on a local area network (LAN). A local web may be connected to the World Wide Web or restricted to the local network. Local web documents may be in Corel WordPerfect, Envoy, HTML, or other formats.

Uniform Resource Locator (URL)

A Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the Internet address of a document or document resource (such as an image, slide show,  sound clip, or hypertext link destination). In Netscape Navigator, URLs are displayed in the Location text field near the top of the window.

Most World Wide Web URLs begin with http://www. For example, the URL http://www.corel.com/ is the home page of Corel Corporation.

HTML Tags

HTML tags are generated automatically when you publish your slide show to HTML. To see the tags of an HTML document, launch Netscape, then click View [image] Source.

HTML tags are enclosed in angle brackets. For example, in <H3>Contents</H3>, "Contents" is a third level heading.

Related Topics

About Internet Publisher


About Contour Text

Use Contour Text to place text along the borders of drawn objects and along lines.

When you use Contour Text, the text wraps around the outline of the drawn object. If the text is too long to fit the object, separate the object and text, resize the object, then contour the text again.

To position the contoured text, select it and drag it to a new position on the page.

Contour Text does not work with bitmaps, charts, or figures. You can make it look as if text were contoured around them by using the Freehand or Curve tools to draw an outline around the object. Select the outline and the text you want to contour around it, click Tools [image] Contour Text, and be sure to select Display text only.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To shape objects and text (QuickWarp)

To make objects and text 3-D

To contour text around objects

To straighten contoured text


About QuickLinks in Internet Slide Shows

QuickLinks that play a sound clip, go to another slide, or go to an Internet address are fully supported when you publish your slide show to HTML. Readers simply click on the QuickLink to trigger the event.

There are two visible indicators that let your readers know that a QuickLink is present on a slide. The first indicator is a colored borderline surrounding the slide (the borderline color is the link color set in your reader's browser). Because a QuickLink can be defined as visible or not (depending on how you set it up), the colored borderline acts as a signal to your readers that a clickable region is present on the slide.

The second indicator is the QuickLink itself. When your reader moves the pointer over a QuickLink (visible or not), it changes to a hand icon, indicating a hot spot or clickable region.

When your reader clicks a QuickLink with a sound clip attached to it, the sound will play according to the configuration set in your reader's browser.

Related Topics

About QuickLinks


About Crosshair

Use Crosshair to display a pointer that appears as a cross with lines that extend to the edges of the window. The crosshair pointer can help you create, align, and size objects with precision, especially when used with the Ruler.

To use a crosshair pointer


About Customize Settings

Use Customize Settings to select, create, copy, rename, edit, and delete toolbars, keyboard layouts, or menus. You can also edit or reset Property Bars and tool palettes.  Several options are available that allow you to change the appearance and location of toolbars, Property Bars, and tool palettes.

To change the location and appearance of a bar or palette

To rename a toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar

To copy a toolbar, menu bar, or keyboard

To select a bar, palette, keyboard, or menu

To delete a toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar

To create a toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar

To edit a bar, palette, or keyboard


About Export Data

Use Export to save Datasheet data as a new file without creating a chart in the newly saved file. The Datasheet is saved in ASCII or ANSI format and is delimited by tabs, commas, or spaces.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To export data


To change the location and appearance of a bar or palette
To change the location and appearance of a bar or palette,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click [image].

2	Click the Toolbars tab, the Property Bars tab, or the Tool Palettes tab.

3	Click Options.

4	Click the location of the bar or palette in the application window.

5	Select an appearance option.

6	Specify the number of rows or columns you want the bar or palette to display.

Related Topics

About Customize Settings


To select a bar, palette, keyboard, or menu
To select a bar, palette, keyboard, or menu,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click [image].

2	Click the tab you want.

3	Select the bar, palette, keyboard, or menu you want to use, based on the tab you clicked.

4	Click OK.

Tips

You can also right-click the toolbar or menu, then click Customize from the QuickMenu.

About Customize Settings


About Date/Time Format

Use Date Format to change the appearance of date text inserted with the Date Text and Date Code options. Date Format applies to the current date only.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To format dates in charts

To create a custom date format

To date documents

Related Concepts


To create a toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar
To create a toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click [image].

2	Click the Toolbars tab, Keyboards tab, or Menus tab.

3	Click Create.

4	Specify a name for the new toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu, then click OK.

5	Make the changes you want in the Toolbar, Menu, or Keyboard Editor.

Tips

For more help using the Editors, click the Help button on the dialog boxes.

About Customize Settings


To create a pie chart with more than one pie
To create a pie chart with more than one pie,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar.

2	Click the drawing window to create a full-window chart or drag to define a chart area.

3	Select Pie as the chart type, click a chart style, then click OK.

4	Type a Legend entry for each slice in the Legend column. All the pies in the chart will use the same Legend entries.

5	Type the labels for each slice in the first pie in the Labels 1 column.

6	Type the data for each slice in the first pie in the Pie 1 column.

7	Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each pie in the chart.

Tips

When you have more than one pie in the same chart, you can link pie slices or display pies as stacked columns to add emphasis and increase clarity.

You can have up to nine pies in the same chart.

Related Topics

About Pie Chart


To edit a bar, palette, or keyboard
To edit a bar, palette, or keyboard,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click [image].

2	Click the Toolbars tab, Keyboards tab, or Menus tab.

3	Select the toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu you want, then click Edit.

4	Make the changes you want in the Toolbar, Menu, or Keyboard Editor.

Tips

For more help using the Editors, click the Help button on the dialog boxes.

You cannot customize the default menus, but you can make copies of them to edit.

Related Topics

About Customize Settings


About Delete Background

Use Delete Background to remove a background from a slide show master.

To delete backgrounds in a master

To delete layouts in a master

To create a master

Related Concepts


To copy a toolbar, menu bar, or keyboard
To copy a toolbar, menu bar, or keyboard,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click [image].

2	Click the Toolbars tab, Keyboards tab, or Menus tab.

3	Select the toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu you want to make a duplicate of, then click Copy.

4	Type a name for the new toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu, then click OK.

Tips

You cannot customize the default menus, but you can make copies of them to edit.

Related Topics

About Customize Settings


About Delete Layout

Use Delete Layout to remove a layout from a slide show master.

To delete backgrounds in a master

To delete layouts in a master

To create a master

Related Concepts


To rename a toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar
To rename a toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click [image].

2	Click the Toolbars tab, Keyboards tab, or Menus tab.

3	Select the toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar you want to assign a new name, then click Rename.

4	Type a new name.

Tips

You cannot rename the default toolbars, keyboard layouts, or menu bars.

Related Topics

About Customize Settings


About Delete

Use Delete to remove objects and text from the drawing window.

To delete objects and text


To delete a toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar
To delete a toolbar, keyboard, or menu bar,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click [image].

2	Click the Toolbars tab, Keyboards tab, or Menus tab.

3	Select the toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar you want to remove, then click Delete.

4	Click Yes.

Tips

You cannot delete the default toolbars, keyboard layouts, or menu bars.

Related Topics

About Customize Settings


About Appearance

Use Appearance to select a layout and background for a slide. The Layout Gallery lets you select from seven pre-designed layouts for each slide in your slide show. You can also choose backgrounds in this master or in any other master. When you have chosen a layout for the current slide, use the drop-down list in the dialog box to select a layout for the other slides in the slide show.

For information about the controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To select a layout for a slide

Related Concepts


About Toolbar, Property Bar, and Tool Palette Options

Use Options to select an appearance and location for a bar or palette.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To change the location and appearance of a bar or palette

Related Concepts


About Display Settings

Use Display to change the default settings for display options on the menus, specify the units of measure in Corel Presentations, or select the option to hide the pointer while you are drawing.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose display defaults

More Information about DirectDraw


server application

An application whose objects can be embedded or linked into other documents and applications.


About Page Setup

Use Page Setup to set the page size, margins, background color, fill style, amount of white space around graphics, printing orientation, and poster sizes for the current document.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose page size and orientation

To create posters

To choose pattern or gradient page backgrounds

To choose page margins

To choose picture or texture page backgrounds

To save objects with less white space


client application

An application that can link and embed text or graphics created in a server application. Also called a container application.


source application

The application you use to create an object for linking or embedding. For example, you can create a pie chart in Corel Presentations (the source application) and embed it in a document you create in Corel WordPerfect (the target application).


target application

The application in which you embed objects you created in other applications. For example, you can create a pie chart in Corel Presentations (the source application) and embed it in a document you create in Corel WordPerfect (the target application).


About QuickCorrect

Use QuickCorrect to automatically replace your common spelling errors and mistyped words with the correct spelling, or to expand abbreviations. You can create your own list of substitutions, as well as using the pre-defined list.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To create a list of errors for automatic correction

To automatically correct errors as you type


source file

The file containing the data for a linked object. When you change the  contents of the source file, these changes appear in every document you linked to it. For example, you can create a spreadsheet file in Corel Quattro* Pro and link it to a table in a Corel WordPerfect* document. The changes you make to the original spreadsheet file in Corel Quattro Pro appear in the Corel WordPerfect document the next time you open or update the Corel WordPerfect file.


About QuickCorrect Options

Use QuickCorrect Options to match open and close quotes (called SmartQuotes) and to automatically correct sentence problems, such as initial double uppercase letters and double spacing between words.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To automatically correct errors as you type


destination file

A file containing linked or embedded objects from other applications.


About Draft

Use Draft to speed up display while you create and edit your slide show. Only the outlines of objects display, without the fill colors, patterns, or other attributes. Draft view changes your view of drawn objects on your screen, but it does not change the actual objects when they are printed or used in a slide show.

You can also use Draft to view the location of an object that is situated behind another object, or to view the location of a transparent object on a slide (such as a transparent QuickLink) or drawing.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To display in Draft view


To display a table along with a data chart
To display a table along with a data chart,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/Type.

3	Click Table, select Display table to display a table under your chart, then click OK.

Tips

Displaying data in a table along with your chart can help your audience follow your data more easily.

You can adjust a column width in your table. In the Datasheet, move the pointer over the right edge of the Legend button (or any other button in the same row) until it changes to a double-sided arrow, then drag to size the column. Click [image] to update the table display. The table column width(s) will now reflect the change you made to the column width in the Datasheet.

To adjust all table columns the same width, click the button in the upper-left corner of the Datasheet to select all rows and columns, then repeat the tip instructions immediately above. Click [image] to update the table display.

Related Topics


About the Background Layer

Use the Background Layer to add, delete, modify, and name backgrounds in a slide show master. Any objects you add to the backgrounds will appear behind the objects in the slide's layout and the objects you add to the slide layer.

Layers in a Slide

Each slide in a slide show is made up of three layers: the background layer, the layout layer, and the slide layer.

The background layer gives your slide its color and page size. You can place Clipart, charts, bitmaps, text, and other objects on the background layer, where they will appear behind the objects on the layout and slide layers. If you put an object on the background layer, you cannot move or edit it on the slide.

The layout layer contains the pre-defined objects in the layouts: titles, subtitles, bulleted lists, data charts, and organization charts. Objects on the layout layer overlay any objects on the background layer. When you place an object on the layout layer, it appears as a placeholder on the slide layer. The information from bulleted lists, data charts, and organization charts do not appear on the slide layer, but their appearance applies to the information you add in the slide layer.

The slide layer is where you create your slide show by adding information and objects. Double-click the layout placeholders to insert text and charts, and add bitmaps, bulleted lists, Clipart, data charts, organization charts, and text that you want to appear on your slides.

To add backgrounds to a master

To assign backgrounds to layouts in the current slide show

To assign backgrounds to layouts in a master

To delete backgrounds in a master

To edit backgrounds in a master

To rename backgrounds in the current slide show

To rename backgrounds in a master

To edit backgrounds in the current slide show

To add backgrounds to the current slide show

To create a master

Related Concepts


About Publishing Documents to Envoy

Use Envoy to convert slide shows and drawings to Envoy format. Envoy is a document viewer included in this suite. After you publish a Corel Presentations drawing or slide show to Envoy, you can easily distribute it using Novell GroupWise or another e-mail system. Others can view your slide show or drawing in Envoy, even if they do not have Corel Presentations installed.

To publish documents to Envoy

Related Concepts


About the Layout Layer

Use the Layout Layer to add, delete, modify, and name layouts in a slide show master. You can also assign a background to a layout.

Layers in a Slide

Each slide in a slide show is made up of three layers: the background layer, the layout layer, and the slide layer.

The background layer gives your slide its color and page size. You can place Clipart, charts, bitmaps, text, and other objects on the background layer, where they will appear behind the objects on the layout and slide layers. If you put an object on the background layer, you cannot move or edit it on the slide.

The layout layer contains the pre-defined objects in the layouts: titles, subtitles, bulleted lists, data charts, and organization charts. Objects on the layout layer overlay any objects on the background layer. When you place an object on the layout layer, it appears as a placeholder on the slide layer. The information from bulleted lists, data charts, and organization charts do not appear on the slide layer, but their appearance applies to the information you add in the slide layer.

The slide layer is where you create your slide show by adding information and objects. Double-click the layout placeholders to insert text and charts, and add bitmaps, bulleted lists, Clipart, data charts, organization charts, and text that you want to appear on your slides.

To delete layouts in a master

To edit layouts in a master

To assign backgrounds to layouts in a master

To create a master

To add layouts to a master

To add layouts to the current slide show

To rename layouts in a master

To assign backgrounds to layouts in the current slide show

To edit layouts in the current slide show

To rename layouts in the current slide show

Related Concepts


List of Slide Service Bureaus

If you want to print your presentation as 35mm slides but do not have access to a film recorder, a slide service bureau can produce your slides for you.

To use a slide service, you need to save and send your files in a specified format.  Before you send your files, contact your slide service to determine the preferred file format, how quickly they can produce your slides, and shipping preferences.

Listed below are slide service bureaus you can contact to create slides with Corel Presentations.  This list is not all-inclusive; there may be slide service bureaus in your local area capable of creating slides from your files.

Arizona

Micrographics West

1860 W University Drive

STE 112

Tempe, AZ 85281

Phone: (602) 829-7206

Fax: (602) 829-7714

e-mail: mgx@primenet.com

URL: www.primenet.com/~mgx

California

Chroma Copy

201 S Figueroa Ste 100

Los Angeles, CA 90012

Phone: (213) 617-1000, (800) 443-4787

Fax: (213) 617-1200

Modem: (213) 617-7200

URL: www.chromacopy.com

Chartmasters, Inc.

201 Filbert St.

San Francisco, CA 94133

Phone: (415) 421-6591

Modem: (415) 421-7070

Fax: (415) 986-3315

Slide Master

1780 East McFadden Ave.

Suite 114

Santa Ana, CA 92705

Phone: (714) 541-5753

Fax: (714) 541-5534

BBS: (714) 541-0198 Call Ahead

E-mail: graphics@slidemaster.com

URL: www.slidemaster.com

Delaware

520 Productions Inc.

400 W Ninth St., Suite 301

Wilmington, DE 19801

Phone: (302) 654-4127

Modem: (302) 655-0539

Fax: (302) 654-6056

E-mail: Imtmedia@520-productions.com

Florida

Media Design Group, Inc.

1133 West Morse Blvd.

Winter Park, FL 32789

Phone: (407) 628-1755, (800) 683-7543

Fax: (407) 647-4071

BBS: (407) 628-8056

E-mail: mdgwpk@gate.net

Media Design Group

5512 Gray St., Suite 116

Tampa, FL 33609

Phone: (813) 289-8128

Fax: (813) 289-7854

BBS: (813) 282-1539

Georgia

Graphexec Visuals Inc.

1991 Highway 54 West

Fayetteville, GA 30214

Phone: (770) 487-2165

FAX: (770) 631-8620

URL: www.gvslide.com

Imagers

1575 Northside Drive, Suite 490

Atlanta, GA 30318

Phone: (800) 232-5411, (404) 351-5800

Fax: (404) 351-9020

BBS: (404) 351-7111

E-mail: Imagers@imagers.com

URL: www.imagers.com

FTP: ftp.imagers.com

Idaho

Digital Imaging Services

University of Idaho

UCC 215

Moscow, ID 83844

Phone: (208) 885-5955

FAX: (208) 885-0566

Illinois

Graphicsland

17730 South Oak Park Ave

Tinley Park, IL 60477

Phone: (708) 532-8244

FAX: (708) 614-1974

BBS: (708) 532-4060

E-mail: orders@graphicsland.com

URL: www.graphicsland.com

SOS Imaging

Sinkler Or Sinkler, Inc.

1214 North La Salle St.

Chicago, IL 60610-1913

Phone: (312) 649-9504

Fax: (312) 649-9381

BBS: (312) 266-7894

E-mail: imaging@soschicago.com

URL: soschicago.com

Massachusetts

Chroma Copy

45 Manning Rd.

Billerica, MA 01821

Phone: (508) 663-2766, (800) 548-8558

Fax: (508) 663-4473

BBS: (508) 663-4267

E-mail: xxx@autographix.com

URL: www.autographix.com

Michigan

ICOM, Inc.

27698 Franklin Rd.

Southfield, MI 48034

Phone: (810) 356-8500, (800) 274-2771

Fax: (810) 356-3928

BBS: (810) 356-8502, (800) 274-5530

E-mail: peter@icom-multimedia.com

URL: icom-multimedia.com

New York

Beekman Group Inc.

50 Pine St.

New York, NY 10005

Phone: (212) 509-1817

Fax: (212) 509-4427

E-mail: beekman@worldnet.att.net

Brilliant Image

Seven Penn Plaza

New York, NY 10001

Phone: (212) 736-9661

FAX: (212) 736-9879

Visual International, Inc.

71 Murray St 6th Floor

New York, NY 10007

Phone: (212) 571-0320

Fax: (212) 571-2670

Modem: (212) 571-0584

Ohio

EDCOM Productions, Inc.

26991 Tungsten Rd.

Cleveland, OH 44132

Phone: (216) 261-3222

Fax: (216) 261-2670

BBS: (216) 261-6370

E-mail: Lloyd@edcomproductions.com

URL: www.edcomproductions.com

Texas

Cypress Digital Imaging

13602 Jarvis Rd.

Cypress, TX 77429

Phone: (281) 373-1648, (800) 962-4875

FAX: (281) 373-9842

E-mail: cypress@interserv.com

Utah

Sunset Presentations

33 N. 700 E.

Springville, UT 84663

Phone: (801) 489-5768

FAX/BBS: (801) 489-1329

E-mail: sunsetwalt@aol.com

URL: www.ysite.com/sunset

Washington

Pacific Color, Inc.

7107 Woodlawn Ave. NE

Seattle, WA 98115

Phone: (206) 524-7200

Fax: (206) 524-7403

BBS: (206) 522-4681

E-mail: Pci@halcyon.com

Australia

Computer Slide Centre

Level 2, Suite 206

541 George St.

Sydney, N.S.W. 2000

Australia

Phone: (61) 02-261-4633

Canada

Computer Slide Express

85 Curlew Drive, Suite 111

Toronto, ON, M3A 2P8

Canada

Phone: (416) 449-6662

FAX: (416) 449-1938

BBS: (416) 443-9913

E-mail: tony@slide-express.ca

URL: www.slide-express.ca

Related Topics

About Corel Presentations


About Slide Editor

Use Slide Editor to view, create, and modify individual slides in your slide show. This is also the slide layer of your slide show.

Layers in a Slide

Each slide in a slide show is made up of three layers: the background layer, the layout layer, and the slide layer.

The background layer gives your slide its color and page size. You can place Clipart, charts, bitmaps, text, and other objects on the background layer, where they will appear behind the objects on the layout and slide layers. If you put an object on the background layer, you cannot move or edit it on the slide.

The layout layer contains the pre-defined objects in the layouts: titles, subtitles, bulleted lists, data charts, and organization charts. Objects on the layout layer overlay any objects on the background layer. When you place an object on the layout layer, it appears as a placeholder on the slide layer. The information from bulleted lists, data charts, and organization charts do not appear on the slide layer, but their appearance applies to the information you add in the slide layer.

The slide layer is where you create your slide show by adding information and objects. Double-click the layout placeholders to insert text and charts, and add bitmaps, bulleted lists, Clipart, data charts, organization charts, and text that you want to appear on your slides.

To edit slides

Related Concepts


Importable Graphics File Formats

These are the graphics file formats you can import into Corel Presentations:

.BMP - Bitmaps (uncompressed)

.CAL - CALS bitmap

.CDR - CorelDRAW!

.CDT - CorelDRAW! Template

.CGM - Computer Graphics Metafile

.CH3 - Harvard Graphics 3.0 for DOS

.CMX - Corel Presentations Exchange

.CPT - Corel Photo-PAINT bitmap

.DRW - Micrografx Designer

.DXF - AutoCAD

.EMF - Enhanced Windows Metafile

.EPS - Encapsulated Postscript

.GIF - Graphics Interchange Format bitmap

.HPG - Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language

.IMG - GEM Paint bitmap

.JPG - Joint Photographic Experts Group bitmap

.MAC - MacPaint bitmap

.PAT - Pattern

.PCD - Kodak Photo CD bitmap

.PCT - Macintosh PICT bitmap

.PCX - PC Paintbrush bitmap

.PIC - Lotus PIC

.PNG - Portable Network Graphics

.PP4 - Picture Publisher 4 bitmap

.PPT - PowerPoint for Windows v. 2, 3, 4, 7

.PRE - Freelance Graphics slide show 2.x

.PRS - Harvard Graphics for Windows v. 1, 2, 3

.PSD - Adobe Photoshop bitmap

.SCT - Scitex CT bitmap

.SH3 - Harvard Graphics 3.0 for DOS slide show

.SHW - Corel Presentations slide show

.SY3 - Harvard Graphics 3.0 for DOS symbol file

.TIF - Tagged Image File Format bitmap (4.2 or higher, uncompressed)

.TGA - Truevision Targa bitmap

.TP3 - Harvard Graphics 3.0 for DOS template file

.WMF - Windows Metafile

.WI - Wavelet bitmap

.WPG - WordPerfect Graphics

Related Topics

Export File Formats


Export File Formats

You can export a Corel Presentations file to a variety of vector and bitmap graphics formats, including WPG 1.0, WPG 2.0, WPG 7, BMP, CPT, EMF, GIF, JPEG, MAC, TIFF, and WMF formats.

If your file contains bitmap objects, the objects are preserved as bitmaps only when exporting to a bitmap format. For vector formats, you must first convert bitmap objects to vector objects.

To export files to different formats

Importable Graphics File Formats

To convert a vector object into a bitmap image

To convert a bitmap image into a vector object

To save documents as bitmaps


About Print

Use Print to select print options, and print slide shows (Full document), handouts, speaker notes, audience notes, and other documents from the screen or disk. You can also print individual slides as single-page drawings, or as posters.

To adjust documents for printing

To print audience notes, speaker notes, and handouts

To print a specified number of slides per page

To print a slide show

To print a slide as a drawing

Related Concepts


About Exit

Use Exit to quit Corel Presentations and save modified files.

To exit Corel Presentations


About Publishing to Corel Barista

Use Corel Barista to publish slide shows for display in a Java window on the World Wide Web. Publishing with Corel Barista means you can include the formatting capabilities of Corel Presentations in your Web documents. Anything you can publish from Corel Presentations can be viewed in any Java-enabled Web Browser. For example, you can view slide backgrounds and text contoured around an object.

Corel Barista supports Arial, Courier, and Times New Roman fonts. If you have used other fonts in your slide show, they will be translated into one of Corel Barista's fonts.

For more information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To publish a document in JAVA format using Corel Barista

Related Concepts


About Save

Use Save to save new or modified slide shows or drawings without closing the active drawing window or quitting Corel Presentations. Unless you save your slide shows and drawings as files, they will no longer exist when you exit Corel Presentations.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To save documents


To publish a document in JAVA format using Corel Barista
To publish a document in JAVA format using Corel Barista,

1	Create or open a slide show file you want to publish on the Internet.

2	Click File [image] Send to [image] Corel Barista.

3	Click the publishing option you want to use, then specify a path and filename for the slide show files.

4	Select Launch browser to instantly see your slide show as it will appear on the Internet.

5	Click Send.

Tips

If you used specialized fonts, they may not display correctly in the Corel Barista version of the slide show.

Related Topics

About Publishing to Corel Barista


About Save As

Use Save As to save your work as a new document without closing the active drawing window or quitting Corel Presentations. You can change the filename or path to which you save a document. You can also save slides, drawings, and objects in other formats.

You can export a Corel Presentations document to a variety of graphics formats, including WPG 1.0, WPG 2.0, WPG 7, MST 2.0, BMP, GIF, JPEG, and TIFF format.

If your document contains bitmap objects, the objects are preserved only when exporting to WPG, PCX, TIFF, and BMP format. For other formats, you must first convert bitmap objects to vector objects.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To convert a bitmap image into a vector object

To save documents as bitmaps

To save documents as new files


About Replace Manager

Use Replace Manager to move the contents of the selected subordinate box into the manager position directly above it. The content of the subordinate box replaces all previous information in the manager box.

To replace a manager with a subordinate

Related Concepts


About Find and Replace

Use Find and Replace to search for specific words or phrases in a text box or a text line, and replace them with other words or phrases. Find and Replace is case sensitive and finds the search text wherever it appears. Press the Spacebar before and after the word you are searching for to avoid finding the letters you have typed within other words (such as "the" appearing in "these," "therefore," and "other").

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To find and replace text


To replace a manager with a subordinate
To replace a manager with a subordinate,

1	Select or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the subordinate box you want to replace as direct manager.

3	Click Edit [image] Replace Manager.

Tips

The contents of the subordinate box replace all previous information in the manager box.

Related Topics

About Replace Manager


To print audience notes, speaker notes, and handouts
To print audience notes, speaker notes, and handouts,

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Select Handouts, Speaker notes, or Audience notes from the Print list.

3	Specify how many slides you want to print on a page in the Number of slides per page text box.

4	Specify the number of copies of the notes or handouts you want to print.

5	Click the Details tab, then select the print resolution you want to use (this will depend on your printer).

6	Click any other print options you want or do not want (such as Print Background or Print slide number), then click Print.

Related Topics

About Audience Notes


To insert movie files
To insert movie files,

1	Click Insert [image] Movie.

2	Select the movie file you want to insert.

3	Right-click the movie to specify the border and display options.

Tips

Right-click the movie, then click Play Movie to play the file, or double-click it.

When you insert .MOV or .MPEG files, you need to have the drivers installed to play them correctly. The latest drivers are usually available for downloading on the manufacturers' websites.

While you can insert a movie file by clicking Insert [image] Object and specifying the file, using Movie lets you position the clip anywhere on the slide, and ensures that when it plays it remains in that location and at the same size, as well as giving you added appearance and playback controls.

Related Topics

About Movie


About Get Attributes

Use Get Attributes to quickly copy the color, line style, and fill style settings in an object, text box, or text line so you can apply them to another object, text box, or text line.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To transfer attributes from one object to others

Related Concepts


To choose page margins
To choose page margins,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Margins tab, then specify new margin settings.

Tips

You can choose formatting options only for slide shows and drawings that do not use a predefined master.

You can also right-click the drawing window outside of any other objects, then click Page Setup.

If you previously saved your document with different margins, click a sizing option to fit the objects to the new margins.

Related Topics

About Page Setup


About QuickKeys

QuickKeys are keystrokes you assign to perform the following tasks in a slide show.

Advance items in a bulleted list one at a time

Advance charts, images, or other animated objects

Start and stop sound clips

Stop the slide show

Launch another application or a web browser

QuickKeys apply to all instances of the specified event in one or more slides.  To assign a keystroke to a unique instance, use a QuickLink instead of a QuickKey.

To assign a QuickKey

To display the next slide or object automatically

To edit a QuickKey

Related Concepts


To save a slide as a drawing
To save a slide as a drawing,

1	Create the slide you want to save as a drawing.

2	Click File [image] Save As.

3	Select a WordPerfect Graphic option from the File type drop-down list.

4	Type a path and filename for the drawing.

5	Choose OK to save the slide as a single-page drawing in the directory you specify.

Tips

A drawing is simply a slide saved as a .wpg file instead of as part of a slide show.

You can use .wpg files in other slide shows, documents, and applications.

Related Topics

About Save As


About Go To List

Use Go To List to open the slide drop-down list at the bottom-right side of the application window. You can use the list to quickly move to a specific slide in the current slide show.

To move to a slide


To print a slide show
To print a slide show,

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click Full document from the Print list.

3	Specify the number of copies of the slide show you want to print.

4	Click the Details tab, then select the print resolution you want to use. (This will depend on your printer.)

5	Click any other print options you want (such as Print slide number or Print slide title), then click Print.

Tips

If you are printing to a monochrome printer, select Adjust image to print black and white from the Details tab.

To save time and toner, deselect Print background.

Related Topics

About Print


About Grammatik

Use Grammatik to check your document for spelling, grammar, and punctuation errors, and style flaws.

To check grammar


To print a slide as a drawing
To print a slide as a drawing,

1	Create the slide you want to print as a single-page drawing or a poster.

2	Click View [image] Zoom [image] Full Page.

3	Click File [image] Print.

4	Click Current view in the Print list.

5	Specify the number of copies of the slide you want to print, then click Print.

Tips

If you are printing to a monochrome printer, click the Details tab, then select Adjust image to print black and white.

Related Topics

About Print


About Group

Use Group to allow two or more objects to retain their original arrangement and proportions to each other when you move, size, rotate, or stretch them. For example, by grouping all of the objects that make up a house--chimney, windows, roof, and so on--you can move the house as one object.

Combined vs. Grouped Objects

Grouped objects are treated as one object as you are editing, but the individual objects retain their original attributes. Combined objects are also treated as one object as you edit, but the new objects take on the attributes of the first object created.

To separate combined or grouped objects

To group objects

Related Concepts


To import a Corel WordPerfect outline as a bulleted list
To import a Corel WordPerfect outline as a bulleted list,

1	Click [image] from the Text Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

2	Click File [image] Insert.

3	Specify the file you want to import, then click Insert.

Tips

Once the text is imported, you can edit it just as you would any bulleted list.

Related Topics

About Bulleted Lists


About Sending Slide Shows to Corel WordPerfect

Use Send to Corel WordPerfect to send slides and speaker notes from Corel Presentations to Corel WordPerfect. You can then take advantage of Corel WordPerfect's superior text-handling capabilities to format information in your speaker notes, audience notes, and handouts as you would in any Corel WordPerfect document. You can position the slides above or beside the note text or blank lines.

To send a slide show to Corel WordPerfect


To send a slide show to Corel WordPerfect
To send a slide show to Corel WordPerfect,

1	Create or retrieve a slide show you want to send to Corel WordPerfect.

2	Click File [image] Send to [image] Corel WordPerfect.

3	Select the formatting and layout options you want to use.

4	Edit, format, and modify the document in Corel WordPerfect for handouts, speaker notes, or audience notes.

5	Click File [image] Save As in Corel WordPerfect to save the document as a new file.

Related Topics

About Sending Slide Shows to Corel WordPerfect


Upgrading

Upgrade can assist you in moving from Microsoft PowerPoint 95 to Corel Presentations 8. Just locate a PowerPoint feature, then click the Corel Presentations feature name to the right to learn more about it.

PowerPoint 95 Feature	Corel Presentations 8 Feature
Align	Align Objects
Alignment	Justification
Animation Settings	Object Animation
Answer Wizard	PerfectExpert
Apply Style	Apply Attributes
Arrange All	Tile
AutoCorrect	QuickCorrect
Black and White	Draft
Bring to Front	To Front
Bring Forward	Forward One
Build	Bullet Animation
Clip Art	Clipart
Colors and Lines	Object Properties
Custom Background	Background Gallery
Customize	Settings
Date	Date/Time
Design Template	Master Gallery
Find	Find and Replace
Find File	File
Guides	Display Guides
Hide Slide	Skip Slide
Microsoft Graph	Chart
New Slide	New Slide
Notes Page	Speaker Notes
Options	Settings
Pack and Go	Show on the Go
Pick Up Object Style	Get Attributes
Picture	Clipart
Properties	Properties
Replace	Find and Replace
Send	Mail Recipient
Send Backward	Back One
Send to Back	To Back
Shadow	Shadow
Slide Transition	Transition
Slide Setup	Page Setup
Slide Master	Layout
Slide Show	Play Slide Show
Slide (view)	Slide Editor
Slides from File	Insert File
Slides from Outline	Insert File
Sound	Sound
Toolbar	Toolbars
Ungroup	Separate Objects
Zoom	Zoom
Related Concepts


About Custom Audiences

Use Custom Audiences when you need to create an alternative version of a slide show without having to re-create it or save a copy under a different filename.

Different audiences need different information. As you create a presentation, you may have several different audiences in mind, and you can tailor a single presentation to each audience. Custom Audiences helps you create different versions of a slide show by allowing you to specify which slides you want to skip over while presenting.

For example, you may need to include a slide listing a product's technical specifications for a client company's information systems manager, but you know that the business manager cares more about its primary features. With Custom Audiences, you can create an IS version with the technical specs slide, and another Business version that skips over that slide.

To create alternative versions of a slide show


About Insert File

Use Insert File to insert files (charts, bitmaps, text, and figures) into the current slide show. Text files are retrieved into a text box.

You can import a graphic that has been saved in another program into the current slide or drawing window. After importing a file, you can edit it in the drawing window.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To insert files


To create alternative versions of a slide show
To create alternative versions of a slide show,

1	Create or retrieve a slide show you will be presenting to different audiences.

2	Click Custom Audiences from the drop-down list on the Property Bar.

3	Click New to define a new alternative show for a specific audience.

4	Select the new name and click Rename.

5	Give the alternative show a descriptive name, then click OK.

6	Click the Slide Sorter tab, then select the slide you want to skip in this version of the slide show.

7	Click [image] to mark this slide as skipped in this version of the presentation.

Tips

Custom Audiences lets you mark slides you want to skip in each version of the presentation. If you add, delete, or edit slides, your changes will appear in all the versions.

About Custom Audiences


About Invert

Use Invert to change the colors of bitmaps, drawing objects, Clipart, and text to their complements. For example, red becomes green and blue becomes yellow. If an object has a texture or picture fill, the option is unavailable.

To invert colors


To remove a layout from a slide
To remove a layout from a slide,

1	Right-click the slide, then click Appearance.

2	Click the blank layout icon.

3	Click the background you want to use.

Tips

Removing the layout does not remove the title, subtitle, and text from the Outliner, or the data you entered for data and organization charts, but they no longer appear on the slide in the Slide Editor.

Related Topics


About the Justification Menu

Use the options on the Justification submenu to position your text paragraphs left, right, or center in relation to the sides of a text box. Justification settings affect all text in the current text box until you change them.

Use Auto justification to create bulleted lists with correct outline spacing.

To justify text


About QuickPlay

Use QuickPlay to check the appearance, transition, sound, and so on of your slides without having to play the entire slide show. QuickPlay lets you see how the current slide will appear in the slide show, with its sound, animations, transitions, and so on. You can play the current slide only, or play the rest of the slides to the end of the show. When QuickPlay reaches the end of the show, or when you press Esc, it returns to your slide show document.

To play a slide show

To check the current slide

Related Concepts


About Manual Kerning

Use Manual Kerning to adjust the horizontal position of text from the insertion point and to adjust the spacing of letters within a text box or text line. If you do not specify a unit of measure, the default unit of measure is used.

Specify how much you want to expand the spaces between letters by entering positive numbers, or contract the spaces between letters by entering negative numbers.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To adjust text kerning


To check the current slide
To check the current slide,

1	Click the QuickPlay tab.

2	Check the appearance, transition, sound, animation, and so on for this slide.

Tips

QuickPlay plays the current slide, then plays through the slide show to the end. You can press Esc to stop the slide show.

Related Topics

About QuickPlay


About Line Spacing

Use Line Spacing to set the amount of white space between lines of text.

Specify the number of blank lines you want to insert after each hard or soft return.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose line spacing


Troubleshooting Tips for Emergency Recovery

Power failures and other uncontrollable malfunctions sometimes occur when you are using your computer. Corel Presentations is designed so that you lose little, if any, of your work when a mishap occurs. Corel Presentations provides two features designed to protect you from accidentally losing your work: Original Document Backup and Timed Document Backup.

Backup is not a substitute for saving files. You should regularly save your work by clicking File [image] Save or Save As. Also, because hard disks occasionally become damaged, you may want to save copies of important slide shows or drawings to a floppy disk, tape drive, or a read/write CD-ROM.

Invalid Page Fault and Illegal Operations

When working in any Windows application, you may get a "Invalid Page Fault" (IPF) message or a message that says an application has "performed an illegal operation." If this occurs, shut down and restart Windows 95 even if it appears the application has fully recovered.

Corel Presentations Close/Ignore

In some cases you may see a Corel Presentations message with Close and Ignore buttons. You can sometimes click Ignore to return to the Corel Presentations window. Save your drawing or slide show, exit Corel Presentations, then shut down and restart Windows 95 and Corel Presentations. If Corel Presentations does not respond when you click Ignore, click Close, then shut down and restart Windows 95 before restarting Corel Presentations.

Emergency Recovery

To recover your data after a power failure or other mishap,

1	Restart your computer and restart Windows 95.

2	Start Corel Presentations.

3	If Corel Presentations encounters any backup files, a dialog box prompts you to rename those files, open them into a window, or delete them. Click Rename, Open, or Delete. If you click Delete, you cannot use Corel Presentations to recover the erased file.

Tips

If damage occurs to the disk on which a file is stored, Corel Presentations may not be able to retrieve your file. You may be able to recover data from a damaged disk using data recovery software.

To save a new slide show

To set backup defaults

Related Concepts


To play a macro
To play a macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

2	Specify the path and filename of the macro you want to play.

3	Click Play.

Related Topics

Macros Included with Corel Presentations


Tips for Running Corel Presentations

When running, Corel Presentations needs memory to store information and run program files. Windows 95 manages the memory that Corel Presentations uses. There are several things you can do to make Corel Presentations run faster on your system. See your Windows documentation for specific information about running Windows.

The following system suggestions can help Corel Presentations run faster on your machine.

Use a 486 or a Pentium computer with at least 8MB of random-access memory (RAM) or more, configured as extended memory.

If you are using a machine with 12MB of RAM or less, remove or reduce any RAM drives you have installed.

The following Windows, Video, and Corel Presentations suggestions can help Corel Presentations run faster on your machine and free up memory.

Windows

The amount of free disk space on your hard drive can affect system performance. Windows and Windows applications use disk space to store temporary files while operating. You should have at least 4MB of free disk space. To determine the amount of free disk space, use the DriveSpace utility in Windows 95. Refer to your Windows 95 documentation.

Make sure the information on your disk is not fragmented. (A highly fragmented disk slows down system performance.) To increase disk performance, use the Disk Defragmenter utility in Windows 95.

Check for lost clusters. Lost clusters take up disk space on a hard drive and may cause Windows or Corel Presentations to operate inconsistently. Use the Disk Defragmenter utility in Windows 95.

The WIN.INI file is found in the Windows 95 folder. Any programs listed on the load= or run= lines are launched automatically when you start Windows. To increase available memory, remove unnecessary programs from these lines. You should also check the Startup folder on the Startup menu. Click Start  Programs  Startup to see what additional applications are launched with Windows 95.

Run non-Windows applications in a full-screen display rather than in a window.

Limit the number of document windows open at one time in Corel Presentations.

Video

Check your video mode. Consider buying a Windows graphics accelerator card if you want to use a resolution greater than 800x600 or 256-color modes.

Overflow Files

Any part of a drawing or slide show that does not fit into memory is placed in “overflow” files on disk until all available disk space is used. This means that you can increase potential editing space by increasing memory or disk space.

The overflow filenames begin with Wp or Shw and end with .TMP. They are stored in your TEMP folder (enter set at a DOS prompt if you need to find out the name and location of this folder). If you have not specified a TEMP folder using the TEMP variable, the overflow files will be stored in a Windows folder. See your DOS or Windows manual if you need information about the TEMP variable.

Related Concepts


To pause a macro
To pause a macro,

1	While a macro is running, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Pause.

2	Click Pause again to let the macro continue.

Related Topics

About the Macro Menu


Troubleshooting Tips for Running Corel Presentations

If you are experiencing a problem with a feature and you do not know the exact cause, you may want to try the following:

Use the Find and Index tabs to look up information on the feature, or read about the feature in the User's Guide.

If you have previously used the feature without having a problem, try using it that same way, or use it in a different place in the drawing or slide show.

Use the feature in an empty document window.

Exit and restart Corel Presentations, then try to use the feature again.

If a "Invalid Page Fault" or "Illegal Operation" message appears, exit and restart Windows.

If you are running another application along with Corel Presentations, try running Corel Presentations by itself.

Check Reveal Codes to see if there are any duplicate codes or improperly placed codes.

Related Concepts


To record a macro
To record a macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

2	Type a filename for the macro, then click Record.

3	Use the keyboard and mouse to enter the commands you want recorded.

4	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Stop to end recording.

Tips

Corel Presentations automatically assigns your macro a .WCM extension.

Related Topics

About the Macro Menu


Troubleshooting Tips for Printing Procedures

If you are having trouble printing from Corel Presentations, here are three basic procedures:

Cancel Print Job

To cancel a print job in Corel Presentations,

1	Click File [image] Print [image] Status.

2	Make sure that the document currently printing is the one you want to cancel.

3	Click the document you want to quit printing.

4	Click Document [image] Cancel Printing.

Tips

You can also cancel the job in the Windows print queue, in your network print queue, or at your printer. See the respective product documentation for more information.

Printer Setup

Make sure you have installed and set up your printer. Corel Presentations uses the Windows system printer drivers.

1	At the Windows desktop, click Start [image] Settings [image] Printer.

2	Double-click Add Printer, then follow the steps Windows provides.

3	If you have more than one printer driver installed, click the Printer tab in the Corel Presentations Print dialog box to select which printer to use.

Printer Test

If you cannot print from Corel Presentations, you can run a printer test. Because Corel Presentations uses the same printers and drivers you set up in Windows 95, you might want to confirm whether you can successfully print in another Windows 95 application.

1	Click Start [image] Help at the Windows 95 desktop.

2	Click the Contents tab, then double-click Troubleshooting.

3	Double-click If you have trouble printing, then click My document did not print at all.

4	Click the arrow icon to send a test page to your printer.

5	If a test page does not print, continue through the Windows 95 Print Troubleshooting system.

To print a specified number of slides per page

To print a slide as a drawing

To print audience notes, speaker notes, and handouts

To print a slide show

Related Concepts


To stop a macro
To stop a macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macros [image] Stop.

2	Click Stop.

Tips

If you are running more than one macro, you can select the macro you want to stop.

Related Topics

About the Macro Menu


Troubleshooting Tips for DDE and OLE Linking

If you are having trouble with DDE and OLE linking, try these suggestions:

Problem: I cannot set up a DDE link. I selected the information in the other application, but Paste Link is dimmed in the Corel Presentations Edit menu.

Cause 1: The source file has not been named.

Solution: Save the file in the source application. See the documentation for the application to which you are linking for more information about DDE and other possible causes.

Cause 2: The application to which you are linking is not compatible with DDE linking.

Solution: If you are trying to link to a spreadsheet application, you may want to use a spreadsheet link. Or, use the Windows Object Packager utility to create an OLE package. See your Windows 95 manual for more information about OLE, DDE, and Paste Link.

Problem: I cannot set up a DDE link. When I used Paste Link, an OLE object was inserted instead.

Cause: The type of link you create depends on which format you select in the Paste Special dialog box.

Solution: See the entries under Related Topics for information about using OLE links in your document.

Problem: I cannot set up an OLE link. I selected the information in the other application, but Paste Link is dimmed in the Corel Presentations Edit menu.

Cause: The source application is not an OLE server.

Solution: Use the Windows Object Packager utility to create an OLE package to embed in your drawing or slide. See the topics in Related Topics and your Windows documentation for information on creating and embedding an OLE package.

To edit linked objects

To embed objects in other applications

To edit embedded objects

To embed file objects

About Linked and Embedded Objects

To embed new objects

Related Concepts


About Mail

Use Send To to e-mail your current document or selected objects from your current document while inside Corel Presentations.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To mail documents from Corel Presentations


Troubleshooting Tips for File Compatibility

If you are having trouble with converting files from earlier versions of Corel Presentations or other applications, try these suggestions:

Problem: How do I convert Corel Presentations files that were not created in Corel Presentations for Windows?

Solution: Files saved in Corel Presentations 2.0 (DOS or Windows) or Corel Presentations 3.0 for Windows are automatically compatible with Corel Presentations versions 2.0 through 8 on either platform.

You can convert files created in earlier versions of Corel Presentations when you open them in Corel Presentations. You can then save the document in Corel Presentations format or in the document's original format.

Problem: How do I convert drawings or slide shows that were created with applications other than Corel Presentations?

Solution: Open the document and Corel Presentations will detect the file format, even if it is not Corel Presentations format.

Problem: Can I use the same Spell Check files that I used in Corel Presentations 3.0?

Solution: You cannot use the Corel Presentations 3.0 main dictionary (.LEX file) in this version of Corel Presentations.

Problem: Can I use the same language modules that I used with earlier versions of Corel Presentations?

Solution: If you purchased language modules for earlier versions of Corel Presentations, you should update them for Corel Presentations. For information on updating your language modules, please call Corel.

To import text data

To import graphics files as images

To save a new slide show

To import an organization chart outline

To import slide show masters

To import a Corel WordPerfect outline as a bulleted list

To import spreadsheet data

Related Concepts


About Show on the Go

Use Show on the Go to create a self-executing version of the current slide show that you can play on another computer, even if it does not have Corel Presentations installed.

You can play portable (also called "runtime") slide shows on any computer with Windows 95, Windows NT, or Windows 3.x. Under Windows 3.x, all transitions are Immediate, and QuickLinks, OLE objects, and animation are not supported. Cascading bullets are supported.

When you create a portable slide show, you can specify:

Name of the self-executing slide show (usually the same as the filename)

Destination drive and folder (or e-mail attachment)

System to use when playing the portable slide show

Window size and resolution to use when playing the portable slide show

To play a portable slide show

To create a portable slide show


Troubleshooting Tips for Inserting Graphics

If you are having trouble inserting graphics, try these suggestions:

Problem: I cannot insert a graphics file created in another program.

Cause: You are trying to insert a graphics file into Corel Presentations that cannot be converted directly into .WPG (WordPerfect Graphic) format.

Solution 1: Many files can be converted directly when you use the Insert File feature to retrieve them into Corel Presentations. If the file does not convert when you attempt to retrieve it, convert the graphic to a format that is listed using the Corel Presentations Open dialog box, or convert the graphic in your source application to a format Corel Presentations recognizes.

Solution 2: Copy the image to the Clipboard from the application it was created in, then in Corel Presentations click Edit [image] Paste or Paste Special to insert the image as an OLE object.

Importable Graphics File Formats

To import graphics files as images

To insert a Clipart image from the CD-ROM

Related Concepts


Troubleshooting Tips for Keyboard Use

If you are having trouble using the keyboard, try these suggestions:

Problem: I am accustomed to the keystrokes that I used in Corel Presentations for DOS, and I do not want to learn the new Windows keystrokes.

Cause: To remain consistent with other Windows applications, Corel Presentations uses a Corel Presentations for Windows keyboard as the default keyboard (the keyboard uses F1 for Help and Esc for Cancel, for example).

Solution: We suggest you become familiar with the Windows-compatible keyboard, especially if you are using other Windows applications. However, you can use the Keyboard Editor to create or edit a keyboard layout by assigning features to keys on your keyboard. For more information, click Help [image] Help Topics, type keyboard: editor, then click Display.

Problem: I pressed the keystrokes that were listed in the steps of a task, but they did not work.

Cause: The keystrokes listed in the steps are for the Windows keyboard. You may have another custom keyboard selected.

Solution: Press Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Backspace to restore the default keyboard.

To draw objects using the keyboard

To display shortcut keys on menus

Keystrokes to Use While Playing Slide Shows

To access menus using the keyboard

To choose options on a dialog box using the keyboard


Troubleshooting Tips for Locating Files

If you are having trouble locating files, try these suggestions:

Problem: I created some macros and graphics, but I do not know where the files are located.

Cause: The setup program creates folders for file types such as Pictures, Slide show masters, and Macros.

Solution: Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click Files to see where your various file types are located or to specify a new folder.

Problem: I get an error message when I try to use Spell Check, Thesaurus, or Grammatik.

Cause: The writing tool files must be located in the Program folder. You may not have installed these files, or you may have moved the files to a different folder.

Solution: Start the Corel Presentations setup program to install the writing tool files you need.

To insert a Clipart image from the CD-ROM

To import graphics files as images

To choose default directories


About Master Gallery

Use Master Gallery to display or retrieve a pre-designed slide show master for your slide show. The master files (.MST) include sets of page colors, chart styles, and page arrangements called "layouts." The set of layouts that make up a master are available on the layout drop-down list [image] on the Property Bar.

Because some masters are best used in certain presentation formats, they have been grouped into several categories: 35mm, Business, Color, Design, Nature, Theme, and Printout. Each type of master is most appropriate for a particular type of presentation. For example, the masters in the 35mm category are suitable if you intend to convert your slide show to 35mm color slides or to color transparencies. The masters in the Business, Color, Design, Nature, or Theme category are best suited for slide show presentations on a color monitor. The masters in the Printout category are best if you intend to print handouts of your slides for your audience or if you present your slide show using black and white transparencies. You can, of course, use any master you want for your slide show. The categories simply help you select the most appropriate master for your presentation format.

You can place any number of masters inside a category, and you can create any number of categories in the Master Gallery.

You can create your own slide show master by designing a group of backgrounds and layouts. Create the backgrounds first, then create layouts, such as text and data charts, and link them to a background for a consistent look. When you are finished, save the new master in a Masters category folder (such as 35mm, Color, Printout, or a new category folder you have added). The next time you create a new slide show, your master will appear in the Master Gallery under the appropriate category.

To create a master

To add a new master gallery category

To use the master gallery

Related Concepts


Troubleshooting Tips for Using Menus

If you are having trouble using the pull-down menus, try this suggestion:

Problem: I looked for the pull-down menu item listed in the steps of a task, but I could not find it.

Cause: The pull-down menu item listed in the steps are for the default pull-down menu that shipped with Corel Presentations. You may have a custom pull-down menu selected.

Solution 1: Check which pull-down menu you are using. Place the mouse pointer on the menu, then right-click to see which menu is selected. To restore the default menu, click Tools [image] Settings, double-click the Customize icon, then click the Menus tab. Select <Slide Show>, then click OK [image] Close.

Related Concepts


Troubleshooting Tips for Opening and Inserting Files

If you are having trouble opening and inserting files, try these suggestions:

Problem: I cannot open a file created in Corel Presentations for DOS.

Cause 1: Corel Presentations for Windows cannot retrieve a file in which the filename contains IBM extended characters that are not part of the Windows ANSI character set.

Solution: Rename the file in Corel Presentations for DOS without using IBM extended characters.

Cause 2: If you cannot retrieve the file in either Corel Presentations for DOS or Corel Presentations for Windows, the file may have become damaged.

Solution: Use data recovery software to repair the damaged file.

Problem: I created a file and saved it in Corel Presentations 3.0 format, but my colleague cannot find the filename I used.

Cause: Corel Presentations allows you to use long filenames. This means instead of being limited to the standard DOS 8.3 format, you can use filenames that are more descriptive. But, if you need to share files with others who are using an earlier version of Corel Presentations, that means the filename will look different to them. For example, the filename My New File will look like mynewf~1.wpd to someone using Corel Presentations 3.0.

To insert files

To open documents

Related Concepts


Troubleshooting Tips for Printing Problems

If you are having trouble with printing, try these suggestions:

Problem: Can I use the same printer drivers in Corel Presentations that I used in earlier versions?

Solution: Corel Presentations does not use .PRS files. You must use the Windows 95 printer drivers.

Problem: My document does not print, and no error message appears.

Cause 1: The printer is not set up properly.

Solution: Make sure the printer is turned on and the "Online" or "Ready" light is lit. Make sure the cable is connected tightly to the printer and computer. Make sure the paper is properly inserted. Click File [image] Print [image] Properties check your printer's setup.

Cause 2: Your printer may be malfunctioning.

Solution: Turn your printer off for at least 15 seconds, then turn it on again. If your printer still does not work, run the printer test recommended by the manufacturer of your printer.

Cause 3: Your hard disk is full, or the available space is low. Corel Presentations needs to create some temporary files to print a document.

Solution: Check the amount of available disk space using the Windows DriveSpace utility. If disk space is limited, remove some files from your hard disk to make more space available for temporary print files.

Cause 4: The print job is being stopped in the Windows print queue.

Solution: At the Windows 95 desktop, click Start [image] Settings  [image] Printers, then double-click the printer you are using. Click Document [image] Resume if the printer is paused. See your Windows 95 documentation for more information.

Problem: I can print small graphics, but I cannot print full-page graphics.

Cause: If you are using a laser printer to print large graphics or several graphics on a single page, your laser printer might not have enough memory for that print job.

Solution: You can reduce the print quality of the text or graphics, add more memory to your printer, or print the graphics one at a time.

Problem: My document did not print on the page size I selected.

Cause: You have not selected the proper sheet feeder.

Solution: If your printer has more than one paper source, select the proper sheet feeder.

Problem: I cannot print my color graphics in color.

Cause: You do not have a color printer driver installed, or you have deselected Print in color and/or selected Adjust image to print black and white on the Details tab of the Print dialog box.

Solution: Make sure you are using the printer driver created specifically for your color printer. Also, make sure Print in color is selected on the Details tab of the Print dialog box.

Problem: My documents are printing with a poor quality.

Cause 1: The print quality of a document is determined by the resolution level you selected on the Details tab in the Print dialog box. The resolutions available will vary according to the printer selected.

Solution: Change the print resolution to a higher setting.

Cause 2: The ribbon or cartridge is running out of ink.

Solution: Replace the ribbon or cartridge with a new one.

Problem: The text of my printer command printed.

Cause: If the text of a printer command prints, your printer does not recognize it as a printer command.

Solution: Check your printer documentation and make sure you have typed the command correctly. Also, make sure angle brackets are inserted where necessary.

To print a slide show

Related Concepts


Troubleshooting Tips for Saving Files

If you are having trouble saving files, try these suggestions:

Problem: When I click File [image] Save, I am not asked whether I want to save with a different name.

Cause: If you have already saved the document, the Save feature saves the document with the same filename.

Solution: Click File [image] Save As to save the document with a different name.

Problem: Why was my file not saved with the name I specified?

Cause: The drive or folder you are saving to does not support long filenames.

Solution: Save to a different folder or save the file with a standard filename using up to eight characters and a three-letter file extension. You can save a longer description of the file using the Properties feature available from the File menu.

To save a new slide show

To save documents as bitmaps

To save a slide as a drawing

To save documents

Related Concepts


Troubleshooting Tips for Starting Corel Presentations

If you are having trouble starting Corel Presentations, try these suggestions:

Problem: I cannot start Corel Presentations.

Cause 1: You do not have enough memory available.

Solution: Close any opened Windows applications, then restart Corel Presentations.

Cause 2: You do not have enough hard disk space.

Solution: Corel Presentations creates several temporary files when it loads. If you do not have much hard disk space available (less than 4MB), Corel Presentations might not be able to load. Remove some files and try restarting Corel Presentations.

You must empty the Windows Recycle Bin to free the disk space used by deleted files.

Cause 3: Corel Presentations is not properly installed, or necessary files were deleted.

Solution: Reinstall Corel Presentations components.

Cause 4: You are using a Corel Presentations startup option incorrectly.

Solution: If you are using any Corel Presentations startup options, make sure you are using them correctly. For more information on using startup options, look up startup options from the Find or Index tab. You can also find information about startup options and how to use them in the Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 Release Notes (formerly called the README file). To access the Release Notes, click the Start menu in Windows 95, then click Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 [image] Setup & Notes [image] Release Notes.

Problem: I installed Corel Presentations, but I cannot find my Corel Presentations group.

Cause: The Corel Presentations folder was deleted from the Windows 95 Start menu.

Solution: Use the Network option in the Corel Presentations setup program to recreate the Corel Presentations folder. You can use this option to create a group whether you are running on a network or stand-alone.

Related Concepts


About the Chart Menu

Use the options on the Chart menu to select chart layouts and types, and to set options for your current chart. The options on the Chart menu are different for data charts and organization charts.

To create and edit chart titles

To label data charts

To choose frame options

To choose a branch structure for organization charts

To choose series options

To choose y-axis options

To design organization charts

To label pie charts

To choose grid options for charts

To retrieve chart styles

To choose legend options

To use the chart gallery

To choose perspective options

To save chart styles

To create and edit chart subtitles

To design data charts

To orient organization charts

To choose x-axis options

Related Concepts


About Graphicsland

Use Graphicsland to create color slides from your slide show file. You can send your file via modem to Graphicsland, and they will create 35mm slides. Graphicsland is a business, and this is a for-pay service, not free. See the Help information in the Graphicsland dialog box for pricing, service, special offers, phone numbers, and other information.

To send a slide show to Graphicsland

List of Slide Service Bureaus

Related Concepts


About the Data Menu

Use the options on the Data menu to format data and the Datasheet, use formulas, display statistics about chart data, sort and enter data, and import or export data.

To format numeric data

To include data in charts

To use formulas in the Datasheet

To format dates in charts

To export data

To edit charts

To choose column widths in the Datasheet

To create data charts

To recalculate formulas

To automatically fill in chart series

To exclude data in charts

To sort chart data

To import spreadsheet data

To display statistics about chart data

To format chart data


To send a slide show to Graphicsland
To send a slide show to Graphicsland,

1	Click File [image] Send To [image] Graphicsland.

2	Follow the directions given, clicking Next to continue.

Tips

Graphicsland is a slide service bureau that can create high-quality color slides from your slide show file. This is not a free service. For more information and help, see the Help menu in the Graphicsland dialog box.

Related Topics

About Graphicsland


About the Shape Menu

Use the options on the Drawing Tools submenu and the toolbar to create lines, curves, filled objects, arrows, rectangles, circles, and other shapes in the drawing window. Most Drawing Tools options appear on the toolbar.

The Drawing Tools submenu changes to the Paint Tools submenu when you are creating or editing bitmaps.

To draw elliptical arcs

To draw regular polygons

To draw zig-zag lines

To create cusps

To draw rounded rectangles

To draw curves

To draw circular arcs

To draw closed curves

To draw polygons

To draw freehand

To draw rectangles

To draw Bezier curves

To draw ellipses

To draw arrows

To draw circles

To draw curved arrows

To draw straight lines

To draw double-curved arrows


To skip a slide while playing a slide show
To skip a slide while playing a slide show,

1	Click the Slide Sorter tab, then select the slide you want to skip.

2	Click [image] on the Property Bar.

3	To display the slide during the slide show, select the slide, then click [image] again.

Tips

The slide remains in the slide show. You can still edit a skipped slide, move it a different position, and choose slide properties for it. However, when you play the slide show, this slide does not display.

Skipped slides appear dimmed in the Slide Sorter.

Related Topics

About Slide Properties


About the Edit Menu

Use the options on the Edit menu to modify text or graphics. The options on the Edit menu change, depending on the type of object you are editing.

To redo changes

To clear the drawing window

To edit linked objects

To select areas in bitmaps

To clear the Datasheet

To edit drawn objects

To copy and paste objects, positions, and text

To clear the bitmap editor

To rotate objects

To undelete text

To find and replace text

To copy and paste data

To undo changes

To transpose data

To delete objects and text

To insert rows and columns

To list the OLE links in the current drawing or slide

To delete rows and columns

To edit embedded objects

To clear Datasheet cells

To move to a slide

To select all Datasheet cells

To set default settings

To move to a cell

To erase areas in bitmaps

To edit cells

Related Concepts


About the File Menu

Use the options on the File menu to manage and print documents, open and close documents, mail documents, and maintain document summary information.

To save documents

To create new documents

To save documents as new files

To publish documents to Envoy

To close documents

To publish documents to HTML

To open documents

To exit Corel Presentations

To add or edit document summary information

To mail documents from Corel Presentations

Related Concepts


About the Format Menu

Use the options on the Format menu to choose text and page formatting options, and to choose attributes for objects. The options on the Format menu change depending on the object you are creating or editing.

To choose line joints and line caps

To choose pattern or gradient page backgrounds

To design bulleted lists

To choose picture or texture page backgrounds

To adjust text kerning

To choose brush attributes

To transfer attributes from one object to others

To choose fill and line colors

To choose page size and orientation

To choose line spacing

To create posters

To choose line color, style, and width

To choose fonts

To choose shadow attributes

To choose text colors and outlines

Related Concepts


About the Line Menu

Use the options on the Line submenu to format lines of text.

When you use templates with text elements in them (titles, subtitles, bulleted lists, and so on), you must change line options in the layout layer instead of the slide layer.

To choose line spacing

To right-justify a line of text

To center a text line


About Range Highlighter

The Range Highlighter feature is a great tool for helping you easily distinguish between your data and the Legend and Labels area in the Datasheet. Each area is highlighted with the color you select.

To highlight ranges in the Datasheet

Related Concepts


About the Image Settings Menu

Use the options on the Image Settings submenu to change selected objects to silhouette, black and white, gray scale, invert, or outline.

To invert colors

To change objects to black and white

To change objects to outlines

To change objects to silhouettes


To highlight ranges in the Datasheet
To highlight ranges in the Datasheet,

1	If your Datasheet is not displayed, click [image] on the toolbar to turn it on.

2	Click [image] on the Property Bar.

3	Make sure View highlighted ranges is selected.

4	Select a color for each range type you want to highlight in the Datasheet.

5	Click [image] to close the dialog box.

About Range Highlighter


About the Insert Graphics Menu

Use the options on the Graphics submenu to insert Clipart images (.WPG), images that are in different graphics file formats, TextArt, and scanned pictures into the drawing window.

To insert TextArt

To set up a scanner

To insert a Clipart image from the Scrapbook

To scan images into the drawing window

Related Concepts


About Slide Title Properties

Use Title Properties to select font, bullet, box, and spacing options for slide titles. Usually, slide titles do not have bullets, and are larger and in a bolder color than the rest of the text on the slide.

To edit the title text, double-click the title or edit it in the Slide Outliner view.

For more information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To outline a slide show

To use a Title slide

To change the appearance of a slide title

To change the appearance of a slide subtitle

Related Concepts


About the Paragraph Menu

Use the options on the Paragraph submenu to indent text.

When you use templates with text elements in them (titles, subtitles, bulleted lists, and so on), you must change indention options in the layout layer instead of in the slide layer.

To use text boxes and text lines

To release margins

To indent text


To change the appearance of a slide title
To change the appearance of a slide title,

1	Right-click the title, then click Title Properties.

2	Select the font face,style, and size you want to use for the title.

3	Select the appearance options you want to use.

4	Select a color for the title text.

5	Click the Box tab to choose box position, shape, color, and frames if you want to display a box around the title.

Tips

Titles are usually larger and in a bolder color than the rest of the text on the slide.

To edit the title text, double-click the title, or switch to the Slide Outliner view to edit the text there.

Related Topics

About Title Properties


About Slide Subtitle Properties

Use Subtitle Properties to select font, bullet, box, and spacing options for slide titles. Usually, slide subtitles do not have bullets. They are also smaller and in a less bold color than the title, but larger and more noticeable than the rest of the text on the slide.

To edit the subtitle text, double-click the subtitle or edit it in the Slide Outliner view.

For more information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To outline a slide show

To use a Title slide

To change the appearance of a slide title

To change the appearance of a slide subtitle

Related Concepts


About the Flip Menu

Use the options on the Flip submenu to mirror objects left to right or top to bottom.

Objects are flipped from the center point and mirrored from left to right or top to bottom. Choose the same Flip option again to restore the objects to their original positions.

Pressing Ctrl while choosing Flip creates a duplicate of the objects and flips them, leaving the originals unchanged. Select the objects to position them after flipping.

To flip objects


To change the appearance of a slide subtitle
To change the appearance of a slide subtitle,

1	Right-click a subtitle, then click Subtitle Properties.

2	Select the font face,style, and size you want to use for the subtitle.

3	Select the appearance options you want to use.

4	Select a color for the subtitle text.

5	Click the Box tab to choose box position, shape, color, and frames if you want to display a box around the subtitle.

Tips

Subtitles are usually larger and in a different color than the rest of the text on the slide, but smaller and less bold than the title.

To edit the subtitle text, double-click the subtitle, or switch to the Slide Outliner view to edit the text there.

Related Topics

About Slide Title Properties


About Order Options

Use the order options (To Front, To Back, Forward One, Back One) from the Graphics pull-down menu on the Property Bar to change the order of objects in the drawing window. Every object is like one sheet in a stack of transparencies, stacked in the order you created them with the most recent on top. The order options move objects in the stack, changing their position in relation to other objects. When you move a range of objects, they retain their order in relation to each other.

To change the order of objects


About the Help Menu

Use the options on the Help menu to access online Help documentation, the Corel Web Site, Ask the PerfectExpert, PerfectExpert, and your software serial number and PIN.

To work with the PerfectExpert

Related Concepts


About the Insert Menu

Use the options on the Insert menu to include symbols, date and time, Clipart, scanned images, drawing objects, charts, bitmaps, text, comments, equations, spreadsheets, movies, files, and OLE links in your drawings or slide shows. The options on the Insert menu change, depending on the object you are creating or editing.

To insert a Clipart image from the Scrapbook

To use text boxes and text lines

To set up a scanner

To embed file objects

To insert symbols into text

To embed new objects

To scan images into the drawing window

To create data charts

To insert files

To create bulleted lists

To date documents

To create organization charts

To create bitmaps

Related Concepts


Tool palette tools list

Use the tools on the tool palette to quickly and easily access drawing, color, and selection options. Click the icons below (except TextArt Tool and Spreadsheet Tool) for information about each tool.

Selection Tools

 Select Tool

 Select Area Tool

Chart and Graphics Tools

 Clipart Tool

 Bitmap Tool

 Data Chart Tool

 Organization Chart Tool

Eraser Tools

 Eraser Tool

 Selective Replace Tool

Paint Tools

 Paint Brush Tool

 Flood Fill Tool

 Air Brush Tool

 Pickup Color Tool

Text Tools

 Text Area Tool

 Text Line Tool

 Bulleted List Tool

TextArt and Spreadsheet Tools

 TextArt Tool

 Spreadsheet Tool

Closed Object Tools

 Rectangle Tool

 Rounded Rectangle Tool

 Circle Tool

 Ellipse Tool

 Polygon Tool

 Closed Curve Tool

 Arrow Tool

 Regular Polygon Tool

Line Object Tools

 Polyline Tool

 Line Tool

 Curve Tool

 Freehand Tool

 Bezier Tool

 Elliptical Arc Tool

 Circular Arc Tool


About the Paint Tools Menu

Use the Paint Tools submenu to add drawn objects to bitmap images. Most Paint Tool menu options appear on the Bitmap toolbar.

To draw circular arcs

To draw rounded rectangles

To draw regular polygons

To draw curves

To draw elliptical arcs

To draw closed curves

To draw polygons

To draw freehand

To draw rectangles

To draw Bezier curves

To draw ellipses

To draw arrows

To draw circles

To draw curved arrows

To draw straight lines

To draw zig-zag lines


About the Grid/Guides/Snap Menu

Use the options on the Grid/Guides/Snap submenu to make objects snap to the grid/guide and to set grid/guide options.

To align objects with the grid

To use alignment guides

To display or hide the grid/guides

To choose grid, guide, and snap options

Related Concepts


About the Date/Time Menu

Use the options on the Date/Time menu to place the current date and/or time as static text or as a code in a text line or text box. The date and time are placed according to the current date and time information stored in your computer.

To date documents

Related Concepts


About the Tools Menu

Use the options on the Tools menu to select writing, macro, and bitmap special effects tools. The options on the Tools menu change, depending on the object you are creating or editing.

To find synonyms and antonyms

To spell-check text

To check grammar

To use special effects in bitmaps

To automatically correct errors as you type

To create a list of errors for automatic correction

Related Concepts


About the Macro Menu

Use the options on the Macro submenu to record, play, stop, or pause a macro. You can edit macros by retrieving macro files into text areas.  You can also edit them in Corel WordPerfect for Windows 95.

To stop a macro

To record a macro

To play a macro

To pause a macro

Related Concepts


About the View Menu

Use the options on the View menu to change what you see in the drawing window. The options on the View menu change, depending on the object you are creating or editing.

To reveal codes in the current line of text

To automatically select objects as you finish drawing them

To display or hide the grid/guides

To display the position of the pointer in the Application Bar

To display in Draft view

To redraw charts automatically

To display or hide the Ruler

To display or hide the Datasheet

To change your view of the document

To display or hide a bar or palette

To use a crosshair pointer

Related Concepts


About the Window Menu

Use the options on the Window menu to manage and switch between open windows.

To switch between open documents


About Zoom

Use the options in the Zoom dialog box to magnify or reduce your view of the document. Zoom does not change the actual size of the text or graphics.

To change your view of the document

Related Concepts


About Back One

Use Back One to move the selected object backwards one layer in the drawing window.

To change the order of objects


About Forward One

Use Forward One to move the selected object forward one layer in the drawing window.

To change the order of objects


About Back

Use To Back to move the selected object to the very back layer in the drawing window.

To change the order of objects


About Front

Use To Front to move the selected object to the very front layer in the drawing window.

To change the order of objects


About Rename Layout

Use Rename Layout to assign a new name to an existing layout in a slide show master. Use the arrow buttons in the dialog box to select the layout you want to rename.

To create a master

To rename layouts in a master

To rename layouts in the current slide show

Related Concepts


About New

Use New to select a new project to work on. You can begin with an empty slide show or drawing, or choose to customize a predesigned project with the help of the PerfectExpert.

Clicking New does not close a slide show or drawing you are already working on; it opens the new project in a new window.

To start a new slide show

To create new documents


To delete a .WPG file from the Scrapbook
To delete a .WPG file from the Scrapbook,

1	In a file management dialog box, go to the Corel WordPerfect Suite Clipart folder (if you chose a standard installation, the path to the Clipart folder will be \\Corel\Suite8\Graphics\Clipart).

2	If necessary, double-click a category folder containing the image you want to delete.

3	Right-click the .WPG image file, then click Delete. Note that you can delete only loose .WPG images that you have manually added to the Clipart folder. You cannot delete individual .WPG images from the Applications CD or .WPG images that were installed.

Related Topics

About Clipart


About Size

Use Size to make a selected object larger or smaller, keeping its original proportions.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To size objects


About Object

Use Object to embed text, chart data, or graphics created in another application or file in the current document. When you embed an object, you place a copy of the object in your document without a link to the original so that you can edit the copy without altering the original. When you double-click an embedded object, the application in which it was created (the source application) launches, and you can then edit the object. If you have not installed the source application, you cannot edit the object. The data for an embedded object is stored in the current (destination) file.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To embed new objects

About Linked and Embedded Objects

To insert linked objects

To insert movie files

To embed file objects


About Links

Use Links to display and edit the list of OLE links embedded in your slide show or drawing. When you edit a linked object in its source file, a corresponding change is made to the destination file. When you break a link to an object, the destination file and object are not deleted, but the files are no longer connected. Changes to the source file will not affect the destination file.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To list the OLE links in the current drawing or slide

About Linked and Embedded Objects

Related Concepts


About OLE Play Settings

Use OLE Play Settings to select actions for sound clips (such as Play), or to specify how and when a clip should play in a slide show. You can also open the application where you created the object, edit the object, and much more.

By default, when you play a slide show containing an audiovisual object (a clip with motion or sound such as a video clip or a sound clip), the object will not begin playing until you click it. For example, suppose you embed a video clip in slide number three of your slide show. During playback, after the slide transition between slide two and three is complete, you can play the video clip by clicking it. When the video clip finishes playing, the slide show resumes play.

The OLE Play Settings feature also lets you specify the method used to activate an object. If you select When Transition Ends, you can specify the exact time the object should begin performing after the transition is complete. You can also make the object invisible when it is not playing.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To play OLE objects during a slide show


About Outline

Use Outline to change the fill color of one or more objects to the page color, leaving an outline. If an object has no border or outline, it will be invisible after using Outline. However, the parts of the invisible object that overlap other objects will be visible against them.

To change objects to outlines


About Reveal Codes

Use Reveal Codes to display text formatting codes in the line of text where the insertion point is located. The codes appear in the far-right area of the Application Bar located at the bottom of the drawing window.

To reveal codes in the current line of text


About Paste Special

Use Paste Special to link graphics, text, spreadsheets, and sound clips in the drawing window to another application, and to select what format they will be in. You can also place a copy of the object in your document with a link to the original. Linking is dynamic, meaning that whenever the original is changed, the copy is automatically updated, while the data for a linked object remains in its source file.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To edit linked objects

About Linked and Embedded Objects

To edit embedded objects

To embed file objects

To embed new objects

Related Concepts


About Play Slide Show

Use Play Slide Show to view your slide shows. You can select the slide you want your show to start with and specify to have the slide show play continuously. You can also specify the color and width of the Highlighter.

To speed up slide show display, you can create and use a QuickShow. Create QuickShow saves the entire slide show as bitmaps for quicker display. Slides from a QuickShow file appear on the screen with no delay time, but quick files use far more memory than regular slide show files. If you change any part of the slide show, you will have to re-create the QuickShow file.

When you play your slide show, you can advance your slides manually, or you can set a timed delay before you play the slide show to advance slides automatically.

For more information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

Keystrokes to Use While Playing Slide Shows

To highlight during slide shows

To display the next slide or object automatically

To play a slide show

Related Concepts


To make a poster from a slide
To make a poster from a slide,

1	Create or retrieve the slide you want to print as a poster.

2	Click File [image] Save As, then specify a path and filename for your poster.

3	Select a WPG format from the File type drop-down list, then click OK.

4	Click File [image] Open, select the name of your poster, then click OK.

5	Right-click the drawing window, then click Page Setup.

6	Click the Posters tab, specify how many pages you want the poster to print on, then click OK.

7	Select position and size/stretch options to fit your slide on the poster.

Related Topics


About Select Area

Use Select Area in the Bitmap Editor to define the area of a bitmap you want to cut, copy, erase, move, duplicate, paste, or apply special effects to. When you select an area of a bitmap, all pixels inside that area are selected. A selected bitmap area is surrounded by a dashed rectangle.

Click [image] on the toolbar to select bitmap areas.

To select areas in bitmaps


About Slide Outliner

Use the Slide Outliner to create your slide show as an outline. When you use layouts, you can type the text for slide titles and sub-titles, text slides, bulleted list slides, and combination slides directly in the Outliner. All the text you type appears in the title, subtitle, bulleted list, and text placeholder areas on the slides. You can also apply layouts and speaker notes to slides in this view.

Once you have created your slide show in Outliner, you can return to the Slide Editor to add Clipart, data charts, organization charts, and other objects to the slides in your show.

Click the Slide Outliner tab to create and view a slide show in outline form.

To outline a slide show

To create slide titles


About Slide Sorter

Use the Slide Sorter to display a thumbnail sketch of each slide in your slide show. Double-click a slide to edit it in the Slide Editor. Select and drag slides to change the slide order. Corel Presentations will automatically renumber each slide as you rearrange the show.

The Slide Sorter also displays icons that give you information about each slide. You can see at a glance which layout, transition, and advance option the slide is using; whether or not it has speaker notes or sound clips attached; and if you have defined any QuickKeys.

Slides that appear dimmed or faded are skipped and will not be displayed when you play the slide show. Click [image] to mark a slide as skipped.

Click the Slide Sorter tab to display the Slide Sorter so you can display information about each slide and easily change the order of your slides.

To sort slides

To display detailed information about each slide

Related Concepts


About File Backup Settings

Use Backup to save your files automatically and prevent loss in the event of power outages or machine failures. Backup options affect documents in the drawing window, but do not work for active charts or bitmaps. Timed Document Backup continues working while you switch to other applications, so the application you are using may slow down during the backup interval.

If there are any existing backup files when you open Corel Presentations, a dialog box appears asking if you want to rename, delete, or open existing backup files. Click any of these options to continue. If you choose Delete, there is no way to recover the deleted file (short of using a disk utility application).

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To set backup defaults

Related Concepts


About Environment Settings

Use Environment to set the default language, startup document options, beep options, default format for saving your work, and text selection method.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose environment defaults


About Settings

Use Settings to change your default settings in Corel Presentations.

 Display: Click to control how screen elements appear and function.

 Environment: Click to specify the default language, startup document, beep options, the default drawing format, and text selection method.

 Files: Click to specify where Corel Presentations will store your work and access specific types of files (Clipart, and sound clips), or to specify the default master for a new slide show. You can also specify how, when, and where Corel Presentations makes a backup copy of the current slide show or drawing file, and whether it saves the original or a temporary copy of each document.

 Customize: Click to select or customize a toolbar, Property Bar, tool palette, keyboard layout, or menu bar. You can also specify the font attributes, appearance, and location of a toolbar, Property Bar, or tool palette.

To set default settings


About Files Settings

Use Files to tell Corel Presentations where to store and access your files and to specify the default master for a new slide show.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose default directories


About Apply Attributes

Use Apply Attributes to assign the color, line style, and fill style settings you copied from another object, text box, or text line to the currently selected object, text box, or text line.

To transfer attributes from one object to others

Related Concepts


About Quick3-D

Use Quick3-D to add depth to an object and to rotate a Quick3-D object around the X, Y, and Z axes. Rotating an object on the X axis spins the object on a horizontal center line. Rotating an object on the Y axis spins the object on a vertical center line. Rotating an object on the Z axis spins the object counter-clockwise.

You cannot edit text after you have used Quick3-D on it, and Quick3-D does not apply to bulleted lists, data charts, organization charts, or bitmaps.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To make objects and text 3-D


About QuickWarp

Use QuickWarp to mold objects and text into pre-defined shapes such as waves, pennants, crescents, and bows. You can still edit text after you QuickWarp it by double-clicking and editing it as you would any text box or text line. When you click outside the text, it returns to its QuickWarped shape.

You cannot use QuickWarp with bulleted lists, data charts, organization charts, or bitmaps.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To shape objects and text (QuickWarp)


About Redo

Use Redo to reinstate a change after you use Undo. Redo reverses the action of Undo. Redo remembers the same 10 actions as Undo but moves forward through the order instead of backward.

To redo changes

Related Concepts


About Object Fit

Use Object Fit to specify how you want the objects in your current drawing or slide to change after you save the document with different page size, orientation, or margins. For instance, you can size the objects to fit the new margins, or leave them the same size they were.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose page size and orientation


About Redraw

Use Redraw to update your chart to reflect the current Datasheet column widths (applies to Tables only) and data or text modifications in the chart, to recalculate formulas, and to correct distorted graphics.

You can also press Ctrl+F3 to correct display problems in both the Chart Editor and drawing window.

To redraw charts automatically


About Retrieve Style

Use Retrieve Style to retrieve a chart style you have previously saved so you can use the same box labels and properties, axis options, series colors, bullets, and other chart characteristics.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To retrieve chart styles


About Rotate

Use Rotate to turn a selected object in any direction.

You can change the way an object rotates by dragging the round rotation image in the center of your object where you want in the drawing window.

Press Shift while you rotate an object to constrain the rotation angle to 45 degrees.

Press Ctrl while you rotate an object to make a copy of it. The selected object stays in its original position, and the copy is rotated to the degree you specify.

To rotate objects


About Grid/Guide/Snap Options

Use Grid/Guides/Snap Options to change the structure and display of the grid. You can also define the snap zone for aligning objects you create with alignment guides. Snap zone values define how far objects can be from the alignment guides before they automatically snap to the guides.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose grid, guide, and snap options

Related Concepts


About PerfectExpert

Use PerfectExpert to quickly and easily create a new slide show or drawing from a pre-designed project template. PerfectExpert gives you advice and guidelines for creating several kinds of presentations for many business and personal purposes. You can also add your own original slide shows to the project list so you can use them as templates later.

For detailed information about the PerfectExpert, see About the PerfectExpert.

To work with the PerfectExpert

To outline a slide show

To create a slide show


About Separate

Use Separate to return a combined or grouped object to the original objects and to restore their original colors and patterns. You can also use Separate to straighten contoured text, to edit parts of figures, and to convert a chart into a series of geometric shapes (exploding).

The exploded charts and figures reappear as a series of shapes with editing points around each one. When you explode a chart, it becomes an image and you can no longer edit the data. Therefore, you may want to save the original chart before you explode it.

To move, copy, size, or rotate the parts of the former whole as a single object, click Group from the Graphics drop-down list on the Property Bar. To deselect the objects, click anywhere outside the objects in the drawing window.

To change charts into objects

To separate combined or grouped objects

To straighten contoured text


About Rename Background

Use Rename Background to assign a new name to an existing background in a slide show master. Use the arrow buttons in the dialog box to select the background you want to rename.

For more information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To rename backgrounds in the current slide show

To rename backgrounds in a master

To create a master

Related Concepts


About Speaker Notes

Use Speaker Notes to prepare notes to use as you make your presentation. When you print Speaker Notes, you can specify the number of thumbnail slides (along with their corresponding notes) you want to print on each page.

You may find it helpful to include reminders of QuickKeys and QuickLinks in the speaker notes for each slide.

To print a specified number of slides per page

To create speaker notes

To send a slide show to Corel WordPerfect

To adjust documents for printing

Related Concepts


About Sound

Use Sound to specify sound clips to play during your slide show. Several MIDI (Musical Instrumental Digital Interface) and Wave files are available in the Sounds folder on your hard drive. You can also play a sound clip from a CD track during the slide show.

MIDI and Wave sound clips start at the beginning of the sound file and continue to the end or until you stop the sound manually. You can specify the starting and stopping points of a CD track and save it as part of the slide show.

Depending on the capability of your sound board, you can play different sound clips simultaneously. For example, you can play a MIDI file in the background music while a recorded narration (Wave) plays in the foreground.

You can specify the volume of each sound clip and adjust it as you play the slide show. The volume of the sound clip depends on both the loudness setting you choose in the dialog box and on your sound card. If the clip is not playing at the right volume, try using the Windows 95 Volume Control dialog box to adjust the volume.

If you want to play CD tracks during a slide show, you must have a CD player. To play any sounds, you need the right hardware (a sound card, and so on). Your hardware must be compatible with Windows 95 MPC standards. See your computer manual for more information.

If the clips you have chosen do not sound like they are playing correctly, you may need to make sure your sound card is set up properly. To ensure that the correct channel mappings for your sound card are selected, go to Multimedia in the Windows 95 Control Panel.

For information about the controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To add a sound clip from a CD track

To add a Wave or MIDI sound clip


About Table Properties

Use Table Properties to choose display settings for tables.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To design data charts

To display a table along with a data chart


About Grid/Guides

Use Grid to display a set of dotted lines (similar to those found on graph paper) on the screen to help you measure and align objects. Use Guides to display a horizontal and vertical line on the screen to help you easily align objects. You can drag Guide lines to position them exactly where you want. Grid lines and Guide lines do not appear on the printed page.

To display or hide the grid/guides


About Ruler

Use the Ruler to display a graphic representation of a ruler that appears on the drawing window. The Ruler can help you create and align objects with precision. It displays units of measure according to the default set in Display Settings. You can drag Guide lines from anywhere on the Ruler into the drawing window. Use Guide lines to help you align objects. The Ruler and Guide lines does not appear on the printed page.

To display or hide the Ruler


About Toolbars

Use Toolbars to display and hide the toolbar, tool palette, or Property Bar. These bars and palette provide quick and easy access to commands you use often. Clicking a check box toggles the display on and off.

To display or hide a bar or palette


About Silhouette

Use Silhouette to change the color of figures, drawing objects, and text to black.

To change objects to silhouettes


About Skew

Use Skew to slant a selected object horizontally or vertically.

Press Ctrl while skewing to make a skewed copy of the object, leaving the original unchanged.

Press Alt while skewing to anchor the object in its center rather than on its side.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To skew objects

To shape objects and text (QuickWarp)


About Re-Apply Layout

Use Re-Apply Layout to recall the original layout elements and appearance to a slide. For example, if you deleted the Subtitle placeholder, then realized you wanted a subtitle after all, you could recover the Subtitle placeholder by clicking Re-Apply Layout. Re-applying the layout also resets the position and size of the titles, subtitles, text, and chart areas in a slide. Re-applying the layout allows you to keep any text, data, and information you added to the slide while returning it to its original appearance.

To select a layout for a slide

About Selecting Layouts


About Slide Transitions

Transitions control how slides, animated images, and bulleted lists are introduced. You can also specify sound clips to play when a slide is introduced or when you click a QuickLink.

The Normal (default) transition advances slides and their objects instantly at the same time. You can change the transition to a variety of special effects, such as Beam In, Dissolve, Explode, and Spiral. You can specify transition speed, and usually the direction of movement. You can select different transitions for each slide, or apply the same transition to any or all other slides in the show.

To animate an image

To display the next object or slide manually

To display the next slide or object automatically

To add a transition to a range of consecutive slides

Related Concepts


About Snap to Grid

Use Snap to Grid/Guides to align objects precisely. It forces objects to align with ("snap to") the nearest grid lines and/or guide lines. Snap to Grid affects objects as you create, move, and size them. Snap to Grid works even when the grid is not displayed.

To align objects with the grid


About the Space Evenly Menu

Use the options on the Space Evenly submenu to proportionally space three or more selected objects in relation to each other.

Click once outside the objects to deselect them.

To space objects evenly


About Spell Checker

Use Spell Checker to check for misspelled words and to search for double words and irregular capitalization.

If the Spell Checker finds a problem with your document, you can choose from several options. For detailed help on the available Spell Checker options, use Spell Checker's Help while spell-checking.

You can edit your document without closing the Spell Checker. To do this, click anywhere in the drawing window. You can then return to the Spell Checker by clicking in the Spell Checker application window.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To spell-check text


About Stretch

Use Stretch to extend a selected object horizontally or vertically. Right-click the top or bottom selection handle to stretch the object up or down. Right-click the left or right selection handle to stretch the object right or left.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To shape objects and text (QuickWarp)

To size text boxes

To stretch objects


About Back Tab

Use Back Tab to move text one tab stop to the left of the margin.

To release margins


About Center

Use Center to center one line of text between the left and right edges of a text box or text line. You can center all or part of a line, but the centering applies only to the current line. To center more than one line, use Center Justification.

To center a text line

Related Concepts


About Double Indent

Use Double Indent to move text in one tab stop from both the left and right margins of the text box.

To indent text


About Flush Right

Use Flush Right to align text at the right edge of a text box or text line. You can apply flush right to all or part of a line, but it applies only to the current line. To right justify more than one line, use Right Justification.

To right-justify a line of text

Related Concepts


About Hanging Indent

Use Hanging Indent to create a bibliography entry indent. The first line starts at the margin, while subsequent lines wrap to the indention point (1/2 inch from the left margin of the text box).

To indent text


About Indent

Use Indent to move the current paragraph in one tab stop from the left margin of the text box.

To indent text


About Text Line

Use Text Line to create or edit one line of text. You can type or insert only one line of text when using a text line; text will not wrap to another line. Pressing Enter in a text line will close the text editor.

Click [image] on the toolbar to create a single text line. To create more than one line of text, click [image].

While the text line is open, you can choose text menu options to control the appearance, content, and layout of the text. Text created in a bitmap can be edited only as painted letters, not as text.

To use text boxes and text lines

To choose text colors and outlines

To choose fonts

To shape objects and text (QuickWarp)

To size text boxes

Related Concepts


About Trace Text

Use Trace Text to change text into a series of independent objects that you can size, move, and edit separately. When you trace text, it becomes a series of objects and cannot be edited as text.

To change text into objects


About Thesaurus

Use Thesaurus to replace a word with a synonym (a word with the same meaning) or an antonym (a word with an opposite meaning).

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To find synonyms and antonyms


About Undelete

Use Undelete to restore deleted text at the insertion point. Undelete does not work with objects, which you can restore using Undo.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To undelete text

Related Concepts


About Previous Zoom

Use Previous View to display the drawing as it appeared before you last used Zoom.

To change your view of the document


About Zoom Area

Use Zoom Area to magnify your view of a selected area in your drawing. Zoom Area changes your vantage point in your drawing, but it does not size objects.

The pointer appears as a magnifying glass: .  Move the cross symbol in the magnifying glass pointer to the starting point of the area you want to enlarge, then drag to define the area.

If you have a Microsoft Intellimouse you can rotate the Intellimouse wheel to scroll vertically through your zoomed document.

To change your view of the document


About Margin Size

Use Margin Size to display the entire drawing area (from margin to margin) in the drawing window. This is the default view.

To change your view of the document


About Selected Objects

Use Selected Objects to magnify your view of the currently selected objects. This changes your vantage point in your drawing, but it does not change the objects' size.

To change your view of the document


About Full Page

Use Full Page to display an entire page view of the current slide show or drawing.

To change your view of the document


About Screen Size

Use Screen Size to display the objects in the slide as the size they will be when you play the slide show.

To change your view of the document


About Change Icon

Use Change Icon to select the graphic that will represent an OLE object in the drawing window.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To display OLE objects as icons


About Clear Bitmap

Use Clear to remove a bitmap image from the bitmap editor.

To close the bitmap editor without saving changes, use Cancel (File [image] Cancel Bitmap).

To clear the bitmap editor

To close the bitmap editor without saving changes

Related Concepts


About Curve Fit Info

Use Curve Fit Info to forecast trend lines, curves, and regression types, and to determine which fit type is best for your data. From trends, you can predict future values such as population growth, sales potential, and future costs. Use the Formulas dialog box from the Data menu to apply the fit formulas to your data.

These are the fit formulas available for charts:

fit exponential

fit linear

fit log

fit polynomial

fit power

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To choose a fit for chart data


About Select Color

Use Select Color to customize the colors for your drawings or slide shows or to select the RGB (Red, Green, Blue), HLS (Hue, Luminosity, Saturation), or CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) color models.

If you use a color that may be difficult to duplicate later, record the numbers from the Color value text boxes for future reference.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To use color models


About Insert

Use Insert while editing a chart to add rows or columns to the Datasheet. The new rows or columns begin at the currently selected cell. Columns are inserted to the left of the selected cell, and rows are inserted above.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To insert rows and columns


About Save Selected Objects

Use Save to save selected objects separately from the drawing or slide show they appear in. Unless you select a different format, they are saved as .wpg files.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To save selected objects


To embed file objects
To embed file objects,

1	Click Insert [image] Object.

2	Click Create from File.

3	Specify the file containing the object you want to insert.

4	Click Link to automatically update the object whenever the source file changes.

Tips

Click Display As Icon to display the object as an icon. This is especially useful when you are embedding sound or multimedia files.

You can also drag a file icon from the desktop and drop it into your drawing or slide show to insert a file.

Related Topics


To embed new objects
To embed new objects,

1	Click Insert [image] Object.

2	Click Create New to create a new object.

3	Click the type of object you want to create in the list, then click OK.

4	Create the object in the appropriate application, then click File [image] Exit & Return or simply click outside the object.

Tips

Click Display As Icon to display the object as an icon. This is especially useful when you are embedding sound or multimedia files.

Related Topics

About Paste Special


To retrieve chart styles
To retrieve chart styles,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Retrieve Style.

3	Specify the path and filename of the style you want to re-use.

Related Topics

About Retrieve Style


To edit elements of a slide's layout
To edit elements of a slide's layout,

1	Right-click the slide, click Appearance, then click the layout you want to use for the current slide.

2	Double-click layout placeholders to fill in your own text and chart information.

3	Select each part of the layout to move, size, and position it on the slide.

Tips

Your changes apply only to the current slide, not to all slides using this layout.

To reset the layout to its original colors, placement, and appearance, click Format [image] Re-Apply Layout. Any text or information you added will remain on the slide.

Related Topics


About Update

Use Update when using Corel Presentations as a server application to incorporate the most recent changes to your drawing or chart into the client application. If you do not use Update, your changes will not appear in the client application.

To update linked and embedded objects


About the Tool Palette

Use the toolbar in Corel Presentations to select bitmap and drawing tools, and to change screen views.

The drawing tools are divided into categories: graphics and charts, text, erasers, paint tools, closed objects, and lines. Click the tools in the toolbar's pop-outs to select them. The currently selected tool appears on a bar.

Click here to display the tools available on each bar: Tools

Related Concepts


To choose a fit for chart data
To choose a fit for chart data,

1	Create or double-click a data chart.

2	Select a cell in the row or column in the Datasheet to which you want to apply a formula.

3	Click Data [image] Formulas.

4	Select one of the fit formulas from the Function list.

5	Click Fit Info to display information about how well each of the formulas best fits your data, and select another formula if necessary.

6	Specify an Order of curve fit and a Number to forecast if you are using the fit polynomial formula.

Related Topics

About Curve Fit Info


To select objects
To select objects,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar.

2	Click the object you want to activate, edit, or move.

Tips

Hold down Ctrl while clicking to select and deselect multiple objects.

Drag an area to select all objects within that area, or right-click a blank area of the drawing or slide, then click Select All from the QuickMenu.

Related Topics

About the Select Menu


To move objects
To move objects,

1	Select the object you want to move.

2	Place the pointer inside the object, then drag the object to a new location.

Tips

To position objects more precisely, place the pointer inside an object, hold down the Spacebar, then press an arrow key to move the object in the direction of the arrow.

Related Topics


To create drawn objects
To create drawn objects,

1	Click [image] and [image] on the Property Bar to select fill colors and patterns.

2	Click the drawing shape you want to use from the toolbar.

3	Click and drag to create the object.

Tips

Press Esc while drawing to cancel the object.

Press Backspace to remove the most recent anchor point.

Related Topics

About the Tool Palette


To use special effects in bitmaps
To use special effects in bitmaps,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Tools [image] Special Effects.

3	Select an effect from the Effects list box.

4	Click an option or specify a setting in the Options area to adjust the effect.

5	Click a setting in the Apply effect to area to isolate which part of the bitmap image the effect will change.

6	Click Apply to preview the effect before applying it to the bitmap image.

Tips

You can also select an area of the bitmap image, then click Tools [image] Special Effects.

If you are applying a special effect to a selected area of the bitmap, you can specify whether to have the effect display inside or outside the area. Just click Inside Area or Outside Area, then drag the floating box in the large display window over a section of the bitmap you want to include or exclude in the preview box. If you clicked Full Image, you do not need to drag the floating rectangle.

Options settings do not apply to the Emboss, Equalize, and Stereogram effects.

You can apply several effects to a bitmap, one at a time. To apply additional effects to a bitmap image, repeat steps 2 through 6.

Related Topics

About Special Effects


Tips for Creating Organization Charts

Before you begin to create your organization chart, read these suggestions for presenting your information effectively.

Avoid showing too much information on one chart; break a complex chart up into separate charts showing the details of a department.

Use a top-to-bottom orientation for easy reading.

Start each box the same way, with either a position title or a person's name.

Use the same font throughout the chart.

To display a tall organization chart (one with few boxes and many levels):

Change the font type.

Change the chart orientation.

Use various level arrangements in the second, middle, and last levels of your chart.

Use only one line of text in each box.

Break up a chart into separate charts for each department.

Change the number of levels you want to display or print in an organization chart.

Use Poster to print a tall organization chart on several pages.

Decrease top and bottom margins to increase the amount of space on the page for your chart.

Decrease the parent-to-child spacing to minimize space between levels.

Use a portrait paper size.

To display a wide organization chart (one with many boxes and few levels):

Use the first initial of a name and the full last name.

Abbreviate position titles and department names.

Use two or more short text lines if you are adding information to a box.

Vary level arrangements in the second, middle, and last levels of your chart.

Break up a chart into separate charts for each department.

Use Poster to print a wide organization chart on several pages.

Change the chart orientation.

Decrease left and right margins to increase the amount of space on the page for your chart.

Decrease the sibling-to-sibling spacing to minimize space between positions on the same level.

Related Topics

About Organization Chart


Tips for Estimating Unknown Data Values

Use the Fit formulas from the Formulas dialog box (click Data [image] Formulas) to project future data values.

These formulas connect your data with a line or curve:  fit exponential, fit linear, fit log, fit polynomial, and fit power. Using them, you can estimate other data points along the line or curve. The closer the line or curve fits your data, the more accurate your estimations will be.

Before estimating these values, find the best fit for your data. If your data is inconsistent, try a fit polynomial formula.

In order to forecast unknown values for the data in a row or column, specify that row or column in the "Fit Polynomial of" box. The formula forecasts the values for the data points in that row using the values you specified for Order of Curve Fit and Number to Forecast. If you specify more than one row or column, you cannot forecast values.

Estimating unknown values is useful for applications involving time. For example, you may have charted values reached at specific times but not at every time interval. From the fit line or curve you have charted, however, you can estimate values at each time interval.

Related Topics


To change the order of objects
To change the order of objects,

1	Select the objects you want to move forward or backward.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click To Front, To Back, Forward One, or Back One.

Related Topics

About Order Options


To align objects in the drawing window
To align objects in the drawing window,

1	Select the object(s) you want to align.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Align Objects.

3	Click an alignment option to move the objects to the border of the drawing window or selection area.

Tips

If you select multiple objects, they align inside the selection area. The selection area is a rectangle with the top-left object at one corner and the bottom-right object at the opposite corner.

Hold down the Ctrl key while clicking to select multiple objects.

Related Topics

About the Align Objects Menu


To create a list of errors for automatic correction
To create a list of errors for automatic correction,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Type the incorrect spelling of a word you commonly misspell or mistype, or type an abbreviation that you want expanded in your document in the Replace text box.

3	Type the correct spelling of the misspelled or mistyped word, or type the expanded word(s) of the abbreviation in the With text box.

4	Click Add Entry.

5	Continue adding words to the Replace and With fields.

6	Select an entry and click Delete Entry to remove a replacement from the list.

7	Select the Replace words as you type check box to let QuickCorrect replace misspelled or mistyped words as you enter text.

Tips

You can also add words to the QuickCorrect replacement list while you spell-check text. Simply click QuickCorrect in the Spell Checker when it stops to let you make a correction.

Related Topics

About QuickCorrect


More Help with the STANDARD.PRT File

All the information about your customized keyboards, menu bars, and toolbars is stored in a file called STANDARD.PRT. When you receive errors in which Corel Presentations tells you that it could not load or rename your keyboards or toolbars, the problem usually comes from the corruption or misplacement of this file.

If you do receive these errors, check to make sure that the STANDARD.PRT file is in the \corel\suite8\programs\working folder. (This is the default folder set up when you install the suite.)

If the STANDARD.PRT file is in that folder, it probably has become corrupted. In this case, you will have to delete it. Unfortunately, deleting the STANDARD.PRT file means you will lose all your customized keyboards and toolbars. You will need to re-create them.

After you delete the old STANDARD.PRT file, Corel Presentations creates a new, uncorrupted version of the STANDARD.PRT file when you create new keyboards, menu bars, or toolbars. You may want to keep a backup copy of the STANDARD.PRT file in a different folder if you extensively customize your interface.

If deleting your STANDARD.PRT file still does not solve the problem, some necessary Corel Presentations files may have been corrupted. In that case, please re-install Corel Presentations to get a new version of the affected .DLLs.

To choose default directories


To work with the PerfectExpert
To work with the PerfectExpert,

1	Click File [image] New, then click the Create New tab.

2	Select Corel Presentations 8 from the category drop-down list.

3	Select the project you want to work on.

4	Click the Slide Outliner tab and replace the sample text and information in the outline with your own.

5	Click the Slide Editor tab.

6	Double-click the placeholders to fill in data and organization charts.

7	Add figures, bitmaps, and other elements to each slide.

8	Click File [image] Save As, then type a path and filename for the slide show in the File name text box.

Tips

PerfectExpert helps you create many different kinds of slide shows and other projects quickly and easily. Follow the tips and suggestions on each slide as you replace the placeholder text with your own.

Related Topics

About PerfectExpert


About DDE Execute

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) is a communication method supported by Windows 95 that allows applications to trade information. The applications communicate by establishing a DDE conversation and posting or sending messages to each other. Corel Presentations facilitates the use of DDE through its macro language by accepting the programming commands DDEInitiate(), DDEExecute(), and DDETerminate(). A list of these commands and their descriptions is available in the Corel Presentations online macros manual.

Corel Presentations as a DDE Server

Using DDE you can create macros in Corel Presentations that send commands to control other Windows 95 applications. For example, you can create a macro that starts a Windows spreadsheet application, loads a file, and copies a range of cells to a Corel Presentations datasheet. The application receiving the commands (the client application) must support DDE. See that application's documentation for the service (application) name, topic name, and list of acceptable DDE commands.

Corel Presentations as a DDE Client

Windows 95 applications that support DDE can use it to control Corel Presentations. The application must first initiate a DDE conversation with Corel Presentations using the service (application) name of "Presentations" or "PRWin" and topic name of "Command". Before terminating the conversation, the application can send DDE Execute strings made up of one or more Corel Presentations macro commands. Note that Corel Presentations will accept only product commands, not programming commands. These product commands may not contain variables or expressions. A complete list of product commmands and descriptions are available in the Corel Presentations online macros manual.

Windows applications can also send commands to Corel Presentations as a DDE Request item in order to receive a string representing the command's return value. The application must  send the DDE Execute string or DDE Request item in ANSI text format. Corel Presentations will return the DDE Request result as an ANSI text string. If either a DDE Execute string or a DDE Request item returns an error, the application can send a DDE Request on the item "LastCmdError" to find out what error occurred. This item will return an ANSI text string containing a three-digit error code and a description of the error.

Using DDE with Other Suite Applications

For information regarding the use of DDE with other suite applications, see the documentation included with the software developer kit for the suite, which is available on CD-ROM.

Related Concepts


To center objects
To center objects,

1	Select the object(s) you want to center.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Align Objects.

3	Click a centering option.

Related Topics

About the Align Objects Menu


To choose brush attributes
To choose brush attributes,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Right-click the bitmap, then click Brush.

3	Choose a brush shape and width.

4	Specify the air brush density.

Related Topics

About Brush Attributes


To display OLE objects as icons
To display OLE objects as icons,

1	As you insert an OLE object, select the type of object you want to insert.

2	Select Display As Icon, then click Change Icon.

3	Specify the icon file and icon you want to use.

4	Type a label for the icon.

Related Topics

About Change Icon


To choose fill and line colors
To choose fill and line colors,

1	Click [image] on the Property Bar, then select a foreground color.

2	Click [image] on the Property Bar, then select a background color.

3	Click [image] on the Property Bar, then select a line color for objects.

Tips

If you do not have an object selected before step 1, the line and fill colors you select will apply to all new objects.

Related Topics

About Object Properties


To use color models
To use color models,

1	From any color palette (for example, click [image] or [image] on the Property Bar) in Corel Presentations, click More.

2	Select the color you want to change.

3	Select the color model you want to use from the Color model drop-down list.

4	Specify the new color values for each component color.

About Select Color


About Change Source

Use Change Source to use a different file as the source for a linked or embedded object.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To edit OLE links


About Insert File Browse

Use Browse to specify the drive, folder, and filename of the file you want to insert into your drawing or slide show.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To insert linked objects

To embed file objects


To play OLE objects during a slide show
To play OLE objects during a slide show,

1	Right-click an OLE object, then click OLE Play Settings.

2	Select the action the object takes during a slide show from the Action list.

3	To hide the object until it is time to play it, select Hide OLE object while it's not playing.

4	To delay the object from playing until you click on it, select Click on OLE object to begin action.

5	To trigger the object's action automatically after a slide transition, select Begin the action when the transition ends.

Tips

If you do not want the object to act immediately after the transition, specify the number of seconds it should wait after the transition ends.

Related Topics

About OLE Play Settings


To choose line spacing
To choose line spacing,

1	Create or double-click a text box or text line.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Spacing.

3	Specify the line spacing.

Related Topics

About Line Spacing


To blend objects
To blend objects,

1	Draw and select the two objects you want to blend.

2	Click Tools [image] Blend.

3	Specify the number of intermediate shapes you want to appear between the objects.

Tips

The intermediate steps are all separate objects that you can edit or delete.

Related Topics

About Blend


To convert a bitmap image into a vector object
To convert a bitmap image into a vector object,

1	Retrieve an existing bitmap image into the drawing window, or create a new bitmap and return it to the drawing window.

2	Select the bitmap image.

3	Click Tools [image] Trace Bitmap.

Tips

You can also right-click a bitmap then click Trace Bitmap.

Click Edit [image] Undo to return the image to a bitmap format.

Related Topics

About Trace Bitmap


About Constraining Objects While Drawing

As you draw, define areas, and position objects, you can use the Ctrl and Shift keys to control the size, shape, and angle of the objects you create. These tables and lists contain information about different techniques. Look for extra hints in the Tips sections of Help topics as well.

Using the Shift Key

You can constrain objects by pressing the Shift key to maintain control over mouse movement as you create objects and areas. Constraining limits the size, angle, or shape of an object or area. For example, you can constrain a bitmap area to a square. Constraining restricts how objects are drawn, as shown in the following table:

Object	Result
Bezier	Places points at horizontal, vertical, and 45-degree angles
Curve	Places points at horizontal, vertical, and 45-degree angles
Closed Curve	Places points at horizontal, vertical, and 45-degree angles
Ellipse	Creates a circle
Elliptical Arc	Creates a circular arc
Line	Places points at horizontal, vertical, and 45-degree angles
Polygon	Places points at horizontal, vertical, and 45-degree angles
Rectangle	Creates a square
Rounded Rectangle	Creates a rounded square
Using Other Keys and Constraints

You can use a variety of keys and methods to help you work more efficiently.

Defining Areas for Data Charts, Bulleted Lists, Organization Charts, Clipart, Bitmaps, and Text Boxes

Click once in the drawing window for a full page object, or drag to define a specific area.

As you drag, you can press Shift to constrain the area to a square, or press Alt to drag the area from the center.

Release the mouse button when you have defined the area.

Drawing Shapes

Press Alt while drawing to expand the shape from its center.

For curves, zig-zag lines, closed curves, and polygons, click to add points, then double-click to finish.

For straight lines, circles, rectangles, rounded rectangles, ellipses, and regular polygons, release the mouse button to finish drawing.

For Bezier curves, click to start, then drag to smooth the curve. Click to add points, then drag the handles to shape the curve. Release the mouse button to rubberband. Double-click to finish the curve. You can also press Alt while dragging to make a cusp.

For arrows, click to start a straight arrow or drag to start a curved one. Drag to rubberband the arrow. Click to finish a straight arrow, or release to finish a curved one. You can also press Alt to lock the shape of the arrowhead.

For arcs, press Alt while drawing to invert the arc.

Organization Charts

Double-click on text in boxes to edit it.

Press Tab to move to next text field, or press Backspace to move to previous text field.

Click on the boxes to select them.

Drag boxes to move them. Press Ctrl while dragging boxes to copy them.

About the Shape Menu


About Change Icon Browse

Use Browse to locate the icon file you want to use when you display an OLE object as an icon.

For information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To display OLE objects as icons

To insert linked objects

To insert files


To change charts into objects
To change charts into objects,

1	Import or create the chart you want to convert into separate objects, then select it in the drawing window.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Separate Objects.

Related Topics

About Separate


To create cusps
To create cusps,

1	Click [image] from the Line Object Tools popout on the toolbar.

2	Place the pointer where you want the curve to begin, then drag to size the direction line.

3	Release the mouse button, then move the pointer to size and curve the segment.

4	Press and hold down the Alt key at the point where you want to change direction, then drag in the direction you want the next curve to go.

5	Release the mouse button and the Alt key at the same time, then move the pointer to size and curve the next segment.

6	Click to end the segment and continue to the next segment.

7	Double-click to end the Bezier curve.

Related Topics

About Bezier


To contour text around objects
To contour text around objects,

1	Select a drawn object and a text box or a text line.

2	Click Tools [image] Contour Text.

3	Select a position for the contoured text in relation to the drawn object.

4	Deselect Display text only to keep the drawn object on screen.

Tips

Press Ctrl while clicking to select both the text and drawn object at the same time.

When you use Contour Text, the text wraps around the outline of the drawn object. If the text is too long to fit the object, separate the object and text, resize the object, then contour the text again.

To position the contoured text, select it and drag it to a new position on the page.

Contour Text does not work with bitmaps, charts, or figures. You can make it look as if text were contoured around them by using the Freehand or Curve tools to draw an outline around the object. Select the outline and the text you want to contour around it, click Tools [image] Contour Text, and be sure to select Display text only.

Related Topics

About Contour Text


To straighten contoured text
To straighten contoured text,

1	Select the contoured text you want to straighten.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Separate Objects.

Related Topics

About Separate


To choose fills for objects
To choose fills for objects,

1	Click Format [image] Object Properties [image] Fill.

2	Click [image], [image], [image], [image], then select the pattern, gradient, texture, or picture options.

3	Depending on the fill style you selected, choose the pattern, gradient, texture, or picture options you want.

Tips

You can also right-click an object, then click Object Properties to apply new attributes to that object.

If you do not select an object before step 1, the attributes you choose will apply to all new objects.

Depending on the fill style you selected, you can also click Pattern Settings, Gradient Settings, Texture Settings, or Picture Settings for additional custom fill options.

Related Topics


To make objects and text 3-D
To make objects and text 3-D,

1	Select the object you want to appear three-dimensional.

2	Click Tools [image] Quick3-D.

3	Click the Rotation tab, then click an option from the palette, or specify the amount of rotation you want around each axis.

4	Click the Perspective tab, then click a perspective option and specify the depth.

5	Adjust the color setting if you want to lighten or darken the three-dimensional portion of the object.

Related Topics

About Quick3-D


To edit Bezier curves
To edit Bezier curves,

1	Double-click the Bezier curve you want to edit.

2	Drag the control handles to adjust the curve.

3	Click outside the curve to deselect it.

Related Topics

About Bezier


To choose line color, style, and width
To choose line color, style, and width,

1	Click Format [image] Object Properties [image] Line.

2	Select a line color from the Color palette.

3	Click a line style from the Style palette.

4	Click a line width from the Width palette, or specify a line width in inches in the Value text box.

Tips

Select "X" from the Style palette if you do not want to display drawn lines or lines around objects.

You can also right-click a line or curve and click Object Properties to apply new attributes to that line.

If you do not select an object, the attributes you choose will apply to all new objects.

Related Topics

About Object Properties


To save selected objects
To save selected objects,

1	Select the object(s) you want to save.

2	Click File [image] Save As.

3	Click Selected items, then click OK.

4	Specify a path and filename, select a format for the selected object(s) from the File type drop-down list, then click OK.

Related Topics

About Save Selected Objects


To group objects
To group objects,

1	Select each object that will be in the group.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Group.

Tips

You can also right-click the selected objects, then click Group.

Hold down the Ctrl key while clicking to select more than one object.

Related Topics

About Group


To combine objects
To combine objects,

1	Select the objects you want to combine.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Combine.

Tips

Hold down the Ctrl key while clicking to select more than one object.

Related Topics

About Combine


To separate combined or grouped objects
To separate combined or grouped objects,

1	Select the combined or grouped object you want to separate into individual objects.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Separate Objects.

Tips

You can also right-click a combined or grouped object and click Separate.

Related Topics

About Separate


To flip objects
To flip objects,

1	Select the object(s) you want to flip.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Flip.

3	Select Left/Right or Top/Bottom.

Tips

Choose the same Flip option again to restore the objects to their original positions.

Pressing Ctrl while choosing Flip creates a duplicate of the objects and flips them, leaving the originals unchanged. Select the objects to position them after flipping.

Related Topics

About the Flip Menu


In-place Editing vs. Open Editing

There are two methods for editing OLE objects:

In-place Editing:  Allows you to edit an object without switching to a different window. The client application adopts the functions of the server application. Buttons and pull-down menus temporarily change to work specifically with that object. Using the substitute menu items, you can modify the embedded object just as if you were in the server application. When you finish editing the object, you simply click outside the object to restore the client application's original menus.

The advantage of in-place editing is the ability it gives you to interact with an object right where it is, without switching to a different application or window.

To edit an object in place, double click it. Some applications do not support in-place editing, and will use open editing instead.

Open Editing:  Lets you launch the object's server application in another window where you can edit the object as desired. When you exit the server application, the object returns to your document with any changes you made to it.

One advantage of open editing is the amount of workspace the new window provides you. This is particularly useful when you are working with small or complex objects. It also allows you to save your drawing as a file directly from the server application.

To edit an object in open mode, right-click the object, then click Object [image] Open from the QuickMenu.

To update linked and embedded objects

To edit embedded objects

To edit linked objects

To embed file objects

About Linked and Embedded Objects

To embed new objects


To choose shadow attributes
To choose shadow attributes,

1	Click Format [image] Object Properties [image] Shadow.

2	Select or deselect Use transparent shadow to change the shadow's density.

3	Select a shadow color from the Shadow color palette.

4	Click the scroll arrows to change the position of the shadow, or type an amount in the Side-to-side offset and Up-and-down offset text boxes.

Tips

If you do not select an object before step 1, the shadow attributes you choose will apply to all new objects.

Related Topics

About Object Properties


To space objects evenly
To space objects evenly,

1	Select the objects that you want to space.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Space Evenly.

3	Click Left/Right for horizontal spacing or Top/Bottom for vertical spacing.

Tips

Hold down the Ctrl key while clicking to select more than one object.

Related Topics

About the Space Evenly Menu


To choose text colors and outlines
To choose text colors and outlines,

1	Click Format [image] Font.

2	Click the Fill Attributes tab, then click [image] or [image] as the fill style.

3	Select the pattern or gradient options you want.

4	Click the Outline tab, then select an outline color, style, and width.

Tips

You can also right-click a text box and click Font to apply new attributes to selected text.

Related Topics


To add backgrounds to the current slide show
To add backgrounds to the current slide show,

1	Click Edit [image] Background Layer.

2	Click Insert [image] New Background.

3	Type a new background name, then click OK.

4	To specify a background color, right-click the drawing window, then click Page Setup.

5	Click the Page Color tab, select the page color options you want to use, then click OK.

6	Add any text, images, or other objects that you want to display as part of the background on the slides.

7	Click Edit [image] Layout Layer.

8	Click Format [image] Assign Background.

9	Select the layout you want to use with the new background, select the background out of the Available backgrounds list, then click OK.

10	Click Edit [image] Slide Layer to return to your slide show.

Tips

The background name can be up to 15 characters long and can include spaces and numerals.

To use the new background after you return to the slide layer, select the layout that uses it from the layout drop-down list on the Property Bar.

The new background appears in this slide show only, not in other slide shows using this master.

Related Topics

About the Background Layer


To change objects to outlines
To change objects to outlines,

1	Select the object(s) you want to convert to an outline.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Image Settings [image] Outline.

Related Topics

About Outline


To change angles to curves
To change angles to curves,

1	Double-click the line you want to edit.

2	Move the pointer over an angle until it becomes a cross, click to select it, then right-click to display the QuickMenu.

3	Click To Curve to create a Bezier curve.

4	Drag the control handles to adjust the direction and depth of the curve.

5	Click outside the line to deselect it.

Related Topics

About Bezier


To change objects to silhouettes
To change objects to silhouettes,

1	Select the object(s) you want to convert to silhouettes.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Image Settings [image] Silhouette.

Related Topics

About Silhouette


To change objects to black and white
To change objects to black and white,

1	Select the object(s) you want to change to black and white.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Image Settings [image] Black and White.

Related Topics

About Black and White


To invert colors
To invert colors,

1	Select the objects whose colors you want to invert.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Image Settings [image] Invert.

Tips

Invert changes the colors to their complements. For example, red becomes green and blue becomes yellow.

Related Topics

About Invert


To transfer attributes from one object to others
To transfer attributes from one object to others,

1	Select the object, text box, or text line  with the color, line style, and fill style you want to transfer.

2	Click Format [image] Get Attributes.

3	Click the transfer option you want to use, then click OK.

4	Select the object, text box, or text line that will receive the color, line style, and fill style.

5	Click Format [image] Apply Attributes.

Related Topics

About Apply Attributes


To erase areas in bitmaps
To erase areas in bitmaps,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click [image] on the toolbar.

3	Drag to select the bitmap area you want to erase.

4	Click Edit [image] Erase Selection.

Tips

When you erase, the colored pixel is replaced with the transparent color you are using.

Related Topics

About Eraser


To select areas in bitmaps
To select areas in bitmaps,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click [image] on the toolbar.

3	Drag the pointer to select an area of the bitmap or click once on the bitmap to select the entire image.

4	Drag the selected area to a new location in the bitmap image or click Edit [image] Erase Selection, Cut, or Copy.

Tips

You can right-click inside the selected bitmap area, then select editing options from the QuickMenu.

Related Topics

About Select Area


To edit bitmap pixels
To edit bitmap pixels,

1	Double-click the bitmap you want to edit.

2	Click [image] on the toolbar.

3	Drag the rectangle in the Full Bitmap or Actual Size areas to focus in on the area you want to edit.

4	Click the paint tool you want to use.

5	Click [image] and select a color from the color palette.

6	Click, or drag across the pixels to change them to the color you selected.

7	When you finish editing the bitmap, click [image] to close the Bitmap Editor.

Tips

Text created in a bitmap can be edited only as painted letters, not as text.

Related Topics


To edit charts
To edit charts,

1	Double-click the chart you want to edit.

2	Double-click parts of the chart to edit them or change the data.

3	When you finish editing the chart, click outside it.

Related Topics


To edit layouts in the current slide show
To edit layouts in the current slide show,

1	Click Edit [image] Layout Layer.

2	Select the layouts you want to edit from the list of layouts in the lower-right slide of the application window.

3	Edit the layouts by adding, deleting, or rearranging text, drawn objects, bitmaps, charts, and so forth.

4	Click Format [image] Assign Background to choose which background appears behind each layout.

5	When you have finished editing the layouts, click Edit [image] Slide Layer to return to your slide show.

Tips

To use the edited layouts after you return to the slide layer, select them from the layout drop-down list on the Property Bar.

The edited layouts appear in this slide show only, not in other slide shows using this master.

Related Topics

About the Layout Layer


To edit Clipart and figures
To edit Clipart and figures,

1	Double-click the image you want to edit.

2	Select and modify any part of the image using the drawing toolbar and menu options.

3	When you finish editing the image, click outside it.

Tips

If you have images with multiple sets of groups in them, you can also double-click each group to edit the items in that group.

Related Topics

About Clipart


To edit text
To edit text,

1	Double-click the text you want to edit.

2	Position the insertion point in the text by clicking the mouse, or using the movement and editing keys.

3	When you finish editing the text, click outside the text box or text line.

Tips

See About Text Box for a list of the movement and editing keys you can use in text boxes and text lines.

Related Topics

About Text Box


To edit drawn objects
To edit drawn objects,

1	Double-click the object you want to edit.

2	Move the pointer over one of the handles until it changes to a cross, then drag the handle to a new position to change the object's shape.

3	Right-click an editing handle, then click the editing options you want to use.

4	Click outside the object to deselect it.

Tips

The options on the QuickMenu vary, depending on the object you are editing.

You can click [image], [image], [image], and [image] on the Property Bar to change the object's fill style, color, and outline.

Related Topics

About Edit


To close the bitmap editor without saving changes
To close the bitmap editor without saving changes,

1	Click File [image] Cancel Bitmap.

2	Click Close.

Related Topics

About Cancel Bitmap


To fill arcs
To fill arcs,

1	Double-click the arc you want to turn into a wedge.

2	Drag one of the points in a circular motion, keeping the pointer inside the arc.

3	Click [image] and [image] to select a fill color and fill pattern respectively.

4	Click outside the wedge to deselect it.

Related Topics


To close active objects
To close active objects,

1	Click outside the active object.

Tips

Click File [image] Close Bitmap Editor after creating or editing a bitmap.

Related Topics

About Close


To clear the bitmap editor
To clear the bitmap editor,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Edit [image] Clear.

3	Click Yes.

Related Topics

About Clear Bitmap


To shape objects and text (QuickWarp)
To shape objects and text (QuickWarp),

1	Select the object or text you want to shape.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickWarp.

3	Select the shape you want from the palette.

Tips

You cannot edit text as text after you use QuickWarp on it.

Related Topics

About QuickWarp


To magnify bitmaps
To magnify bitmaps,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click View [image] Zoom.

3	Drag the rectangle in the Full Bitmap or Actual Size areas to define the area you want to magnify.

4	Click View [image]  Zoom again to return to the full size bitmap view in the Bitmap Editor.

Related Topics

About Zoom Bitmap


To delete backgrounds in a master
To delete backgrounds in a master,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Go to the Masters category folder (such as 35mm or Printout) containing the master file (*.MST) you want to edit.

3	Select the master file (*.MST), then click OK.

4	Click Edit [image] Background Layer.

5	Select the background you want to delete from the list of backgrounds in the lower-right corner of the application window.

6	Click Edit [image] Delete Background [image] Yes.

7	Click File [image] Save As.

8	Go to the Masters category folder you selected in step 2 to save the edited master file without the deleted background.

9	Type a new filename for the master in the Name text box to prevent writing over the original master file.

Tips

You can also replace the master with the edited version. If you do that, you will need to re-install the masters to restore the original version.

Related Topics

About the Background Layer


To create data charts
To create data charts,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar.

2	Click the drawing window to create a full-window chart, or drag to define a chart area.

3	Select a chart type.

4	Deselect Use sample data to begin with a blank Datasheet.

5	Select 3-D for a chart with a three-dimensional appearance.

6	Click the pre-defined chart style you want to use, then click OK.

7	Type your data in the Datasheet.

8	Double-click parts of the chart and Datasheet to edit them.

9	Click outside the chart to close it.

Related Topics

About Data Chart Gallery


To use the chart gallery
To use the chart gallery,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Gallery.

3	Select a type of chart.

4	Click a pre-defined style.

5	Select 3-D to give the chart a three-dimensional appearance.

Related Topics

About Data Chart Gallery


Troubleshooting Tips for MIDI Sound

To get the best results from the MIDI sound files that ship with Corel Presentations, make sure that your system is set up correctly for your sound card. This includes making sure all 16 MIDI channels are not active at the same time. You only need to use MIDI Configuration to activate channels 1-10 or 13-16.

1	Install MIDI sound drivers and hardware compatible with Windows 95 MPC standards. Consult your sound system documentation for installation information.

2	Click Start [image] Settings [image] Control Panel from Windows 95.

3	Double-click Multimedia, then click the MIDI tab.

4	Click Custom Configuration, then select the MIDI scheme you want from the drop-down list.

5	Click Configure to view or change the current scheme.

You will probably choose either Extended (channels 1-10) or Base (channels 13-16), depending on your sound system. Activating all 16 channels results in inaccurate sound play when you use the .MID files that ship with Corel Presentations. These .MID files include two versions of each piece (one for Extended, and one for Base), so using all the channels causes the sound to overlap.

6	Select a channel to use, then click Change to select your sound system from the drop-down list. This activates the channel. If channels 1-10 or 13-16 are already activated, you do not have to alter the setup.

Each of the active channels should display the name of your sound system. For further information about channel, port, and patch mapping, click [image].

To add a Wave or MIDI sound clip

Related Concepts


To create bulleted lists
To create bulleted lists,

1	Click [image] from the Text Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

2	Click the drawing window to create a full-window chart, or drag to define a chart area.

3	Type the text for your bullets: press Enter to insert a new line, press Tab to move text down one level, or press Shift+Tab to move text up one level.

4	Click Format [image] Bulleted List Properties to choose font, bullet, box, spacing, and object animation (if you are creating a slide show) options.

5	Click outside the bulleted list when you have finished.

Tips

You can also right-click the bulleted list, then click Bulleted List Properties.

Related Topics

About Bulleted Lists


To create organization charts
To create organization charts,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar.

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window, or drag to define a chart area.

3	Click a pre-defined chart style, then click OK.

4	Double-click each placeholder label in the boxes, then type your own information.

5	Use the Subordinates, Coworkers, Staff, and Manager options on the Insert menu to complete your organization chart.

6	Click outside the chart to close it.

Tips

As you fill in the organization chart, you can right-click it to use editing options from the QuickMenu.

Hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple boxes.

Right-click a clear area in the chart, then click Select All to select all positions at once, or simply press Ctrl+A.

To move contents from one box to another, drag a single box using the right mouse button (or the left mouse button if your mouse if set up for left-handed use). Drop the box outline onto another box, then select Move Contents or Copy Contents from the QuickMenu.

To exchange contents between two boxes, select either box, then click Edit [image] Copy. Using the right mouse button (or the left mouse button if your mouse if set up for left-handed use), drag and drop the second box onto the box you just copied, then select Move Contents from the QuickMenu. Finally, select the empty box whose contents you just moved, and click Edit [image] Paste.

You can use the Application Bar, located at the bottom of the drawing window, to quickly and easily copy information from one organization chart to another. Just select and drag the positions you want to share to the name of an open document on the Application Bar. The document window is maximized, allowing you to drop the information where you want it.

You can save time by pressing the Tab or Down arrow keys to move from one field to another and from box to box while you are editing information inside a box.

If you are creating an organization chart to use in an earlier version of Corel Presentations, be sure to save the chart style and information separately. When you insert the organization chart into a previous version of Corel Presentations, it will become a graphic that you cannot edit as a chart.

Related Topics

About Organization Chart


To use the Datasheet
To use the Datasheet,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar.

2	Click the drawing window to create a full-window chart, or drag to define a chart area.

3	Select the chart type and pre-defined style you want to use, then click OK.

4	Click a Datasheet cell to move directly to that cell.

5	Import the data you want to use, or type data in each cell.

6	Double-click parts of the chart and Datasheet to edit them.

7	Click outside the chart when you finish entering and editing data in the Datasheet.

Related Topics

About the Datasheet


To enter data in the Datasheet
To enter data in the Datasheet,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select a cell in the Datasheet by clicking it or using the arrow keys.

3	Type the new data, replacing any previous data in the cell.

4	Click a different place in the Datasheet, or press Enter to finish updating the cell.

Tips

When you enter two-digit years (dd/mm/yy) in the Datasheet, 00 to 50 corresponds to the years 2000 to 2050, and 51 to 99 corresponds to the years 1951 to 1999. For example, if you entered the two-digit year 26 in the Datasheet, it would correspond to the year 2026.  If you entered the two-digit year 61 in the Datasheet, it would correspond to the year 1961.

Related Topics

About the Datasheet


About the Datasheet

The Datasheet appears as a floating palette in the drawing window when you create a data chart. Use it as a spreadsheet to enter, edit, or import the data the chart displays.

A cell must contain numeric data in order to be plotted in a chart (unless the cell is a Label or a Legend cell). Numeric data is right justified in the cell. Text or date entries are left justified. If you press the Spacebar to delete cell data instead of using Delete, the cell appears empty but it still contains a space.

To learn more about the Datasheet, click any part of the sample Datasheet below for help with that part:

To highlight ranges in the Datasheet

To enter data in the Datasheet

To use the Datasheet


Inactive cell

Any data entered in this cell cannot be displayed in the chart.


Data entry cell (Row 1, Column A)

The current value in this cell is 90.


Data entry cell (Row 1, Column B)

The current value in this cell is 50.


Data entry cell (Row 1, Column C)

The current value in this cell is 65.


Data entry cell (Row 2, Column A)

The current value in this cell is 50.


Data entry cell (Row 2, Column B)

The current value in this cell is 40.


Data entry cell (Row 2, Column C)

There is no current value in this cell.


Legend

Clicking this cell selects all Legend names (in the Legend column) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Labels

Clicking this cell selects all Label names (in the Labels row) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Select all

Clicking this cell selects the entire Datasheet for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Row 1

Clicking this cell selects the Row 1 Legend and all Row 1 data entry cells (90, 50, and 65 in this sample chart) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on. A row of data is called a series.


Row 2

Clicking this cell selects the Row 2 Legend and all Row 2 data entry cells (50, 40, and empty in this sample chart) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on. A row of data is called a series.


Column A

Clicking this cell selects the Column A Label and all Column A data entry cells (90 and 50) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Column B

Clicking this cell selects the Column B Label and all Column B data entry cells (50 and 40) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Column C

Clicking this cell selects the Column C Label and all Column C data entry cells (65 and empty) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Legend cell (Row 1)

This cell contains the Legend name for Row 1. The Legend appears on the graph only when you choose to display the Legend.


Legend cell (Row 2)

This cell contains the Legend name for Row 2. The Legend appears on the graph only when you choose to display the Legend.


Label cell (Column A)

This cell contains the Label name for Column A. This label appears as the first object on the X axis of the chart.


Label cell (Column B)

This cell contains the Label name for Column B. This label appears as the second object on the X axis of the chart.


Label cell (Column C)

This cell contains the Label name for Column C. This label appears as the third object on the X axis of the chart.


To automatically fill in chart series
To automatically fill in chart series,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select two or more Datasheet cells.

3	Click Data [image] Fill.

4	Select Rows to insert the data series from left to right, or Columns to insert the data series from top to bottom.

5	Select a fill type.

6	Select a date/time interval for a date series.

7	Specify the starting value (number or date) for the series, then specify a number to indicate the rate of increase for the series.

Tips

When you enter two-digit years (dd/mm/yy) in the Datasheet, 00 to 50 corresponds to the years 2000 to 2050, and 51 to 99 corresponds to the years 1951 to 1999. For example, if you entered the two-digit year 26 in the Datasheet, it would correspond to the year 2026.  If you entered the two-digit year 61, it would correspond to the year 1961.

Dates entered into the Datasheet are stored as numbers. For example, if you typed 1/1/1900, it would be represented by a 1 in the Datasheet.

Related Topics

About Data Fill


To sort chart data
To sort chart data,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select the Datasheet rows or columns you want to sort.

3	Click Data [image] Sort.

4	Click the sort direction and order you want.

5	Specify the Key Row or Key Column to use as a basis for sorting while keeping all the values in that row or column together.

Tips

To alphabetically sort the legends by row, specify the Legend column (0) as the sort column; or to sort labels by column, specify the Labels row (A) as the sort row.

Related Topics

About Sort Data


To display statistics about chart data
To display statistics about chart data,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select a Datasheet row, column, or range of cells for which you want to see statistical information.

3	Click Data [image] Statistics.

Tips

You can also select a cell, then click Row or Column in the Statistics dialog box to see the data statistics for the row or column the cell is in.

Related Topics

About Data Statistics


To format chart data
To format chart data,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select the Datasheet cells you want to format.

3	Click Data [image] Format.

4	Select a format type.

5	Select data format options for that type.

Tips

You can also right-click the Datasheet, then click Format.

Related Topics

About Format


To choose column widths in the Datasheet
To choose column widths in the Datasheet,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Data [image] Column Width.

3	Specify a column width (from 1 to 30).

Tips

You can also move the pointer over the right edge of the Legend button until it turns into a double-sided arrow, then drag to size the columns. All the columns adjust to be the same width.

Related Topics

About Column Width


To use formulas in the Datasheet
To use formulas in the Datasheet,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select a Datasheet cell in the row or column in which you want to place the results.

3	Click Data [image] Formulas.

4	Select Row calculation or Column calculation.

5	Select the formula you want to use from the Function list.

6	Specify the rows or columns you want to apply the formula to in the Row(s) or Column(s) text boxes.

7	Specify a row or column as the results row or column in the Place results in text box.

Tips

Use 0 as the results row to indicate the variable row for a scatter chart.

Related Topics

About Formulas


absolute value

Takes the value of the number in each cell in a single row or column without regard to its sign. If your data is 3, -4, -2, the absolute values are 3, 4, 2.


average

Adds all data values in a row or column and divides that number by the number of data cells. For example, 1,2,3 adds the values in rows 1 through 3 and divides them by the number of cells containing data in those rows, while A:C or A..C averages values in columns A through C.


cosine

Takes the cosine of each value in one row or column. The cosine is the ratio between the adjacent side and the hypotenuse of a right triangle expressed as an angle in radians.


cumulative total

Adds the values in a row or column, then adds that total to the next row or column, thus taking a running total of one or more rows or columns. For example, 1,2,3 totals row 1, then adds that total to the totals for rows 2 and 3, while A:C or A..C totals columns A through C.


difference

Subtracts one row from another or one column from another. The difference for the first cell will always be 0 because there is no previous cell.


maximum

Compares cell values in a row or column with corresponding cell values in the next row(s) or column(s) to find the largest value. For example, 1,2,3 displays the largest value in rows 1 through 3, while A:C or A..C displays the largest value in columns A through C.


minimum

Compares cell values in a row or column with corresponding cell values in the next row(s) or column(s) to find the smallest value. For example, 1,2,3 displays the smallest value in rows 1 through 3, while A:C or A..C displays the smallest value in columns A through C.


moving average

Adds the value of each cell with the values of the cells surrounding it, then divides by the number of cells included. You specify how many cells before and after each cell to include in the moving average. You can smooth the curve of your data by charting a moving average.

For example, if you type 2, the moving average for each cell will be the average of the current cell and the two cells on each side (a total of five cells). If you type 1,2, the formula will include one cell before and two cells after the current one in the formula.


To undelete text
To undelete text,

1	Click Ctrl+Shift+Z.

2	Use Next and Previous to display deleted text.

3	Click Restore to put deleted text back.

Related Topics

About Undelete


percent of total

Figures the cell value as a percentage of all cells in a row or column. The resulting percentages are expressed as decimal numbers.


sine

Finds the sine of each value in a row or column. A sine is the ratio between the opposite side and the hypotenuse of a right triangle built on the angle expressed as an angle in radians.


sum

Adds all the values in two or more rows or columns. For example, 1,2,3 adds all the values in rows 1 through 3, while A:C or A..C adds the values in columns A through C.


To recalculate formulas
To recalculate formulas,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Change one or more Datasheet cell values in the row(s) or column(s) affected by a formula.

3	Click Data [image] Recalculate.

Tips

Clicking View [image] Redraw will also recalculate the formulas in your chart.

Related Topics

About Recalculate


To include data in charts
To include data in charts,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select an excluded row or column.

3	Click Data [image] Include Row/Col.

Tips

You must have excluded data to include it.

Related Topics

About Include Row/Col


To exclude data in charts
To exclude data in charts,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select a cell in the row or column you want to exclude.

3	Click Data [image] Exclude Row/Col.

4	Click Row(s) or Column(s).

Tips

You can redisplay excluded data by clicking Data [image] Include Row/Col.

Related Topics

About Exclude Row/Col


To copy and paste data
To copy and paste data,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select the Datasheet cell(s) or the text you want to copy.

3	Click Edit [image] Copy.

4	Click a cell in the row or column where you want the data to appear. This cell is the top-left corner of the pasted block.

5	Click Edit [image] Paste to bring the information from the Clipboard.

Tips

Pasted data overwrites any data currently in the Datasheet cells in the area.

You can also right-click the Datasheet or Outliner and click Copy and Paste.

Related Topics

About Copy


To transpose data
To transpose data,

1	Select the cells you want to transpose.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut.

3	Select the cell where you want transposed data to begin.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste Transposed.

Related Topics

About Paste Transposed


To insert rows and columns
To insert rows and columns,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click in the Datasheet where you want to insert another row or column.

3	Click Edit [image] Insert.

4	Select Row(s) or Column(s), then specify the number of rows or columns you want to insert.

Tips

New rows appear above the row the selected cell is in, and new columns appear to the left of the column the selected cell is in.

You can also right-click the Datasheet and click Insert.

Related Topics

About Insert


To delete rows and columns
To delete rows and columns,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select the row(s), column(s), or block of cells you want to remove from the Datasheet.

3	Click Edit [image] Delete [image] OK.

Tips

You can also right-click selected rows and columns, then click Delete.

Related Topics

About Delete Row/Column


To clear Datasheet cells
To clear Datasheet cells,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select the Datasheet cell(s) whose data or format you want to erase.

3	Click Edit [image] Clear.

4	Select Data, Format, or Both.

Tips

You can also right-click the selected cells and choose Clear.

Related Topics

About Clear Data


To select all Datasheet cells
To select all Datasheet cells,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Edit [image] Select All.

Tips

You can also right-click the Datasheet and click Select All.

To select all cells, including the empty ones, simply click the blank button in the top-left corner of the Datasheet. Any formatting changes will apply only to cells with data in them.

Related Topics

About Select All Data


To move to a cell
To move to a cell,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Edit [image] Go To Cell.

3	Specify the letter (column) and number (row) of the cell to move to.

Tips

You can also right-click the Datasheet and click Go To Cell.

Related Topics

About Go to Cell


To edit cells
To edit cells,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Double-click the Datasheet cell you want to modify.

3	Type the new data or text.

Related Topics

About Edit Current Cell


To select text
To select text,

1	Double-click the text object you want to edit.

2	Drag the cursor over the words you want to select.

Tips

Press Alt while dragging to block parts of words.

Place the cursor inside a word to apply bold, italic, and underline changes to that word only.

Related Topics

About Text Box


To export data
To export data,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Data [image] Export.

3	Specify a path and filename.

4	Select a file format and delimiter type for the exported data from the File type drop-down list.

Related Topics

About Export Data


To import spreadsheet data
To import spreadsheet data,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Data [image] Import.

3	Select Spreadsheet as the data type you want to import.

4	Specify the path and filename of the file containing the data to import.

5	Specify the range of data or range name to import.

6	Select the data import options you want.

Related Topics

About Import Data


To clear the Datasheet
To clear the Datasheet,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Edit [image] Clear All.

3	Click Yes.

Related Topics

About Clear All Data


To save chart styles
To save chart styles,

1	Create or double-click a chart with styles you want to save for use in other charts.

2	Click Chart [image] Save Style.

3	Specify a path and filename for the chart style.

Related Topics

About Save Style


To design data charts
To design data charts,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/Type.

3	Select a chart type.

4	Select the style and design options you want.

5	Click Preview to view your changes before applying them to the chart, then click OK.

6	Click Chart [image] Save Style, specify a path and filename for the chart style, then click OK.

Related Topics

About Data Chart Gallery


To choose x-axis options
To choose x-axis options,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis [image] X.

3	Click the Labels tab, select Display labels, then select the label options you want.

4	To select a Font face, size, style, and appearance for the axis labels, click the Label Font tab.

5	To display a title for the x axis, click the Title Font tab, select Display title, type the title, then specify a Font face, size, style, and appearance.

6	To position the title, click the Title Orientation tab, then click a title position.

7	To select display options for the ticks, click the Tick Options tab.

Tips

You can also double-click the X axis to select x-axis options.

Related Topics

About the Axis Menu


To choose frame options
To choose frame options,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Frame.

3	Click the Display Options tab, then select the sides of the chart where the frame appears.

4	Specify the base height.

5	Select a color and width for the frame.

6	Click the Fill tab, then select the fill style and options you want to use.

Tips

You can also double-click the frame, then select the frame options you want.

Related Topics

About Frame Properties


To choose grid options for charts
To choose grid options for charts,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Grids.

3	Click the Line Attributes tab, then select major grid and minor grid styles and colors.

4	Click the Line Ratio tab, then select the number of major and minor grid lines that display.

Tips

You can also double-click the grids in the chart, then select grid options.

Related Topics

About Grid Properties for Data Charts


To label data charts
To label data charts,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Data Labels.

3	To select where you want the labels to display in relation to the data, click the Position tab.

4	To select the font face, style, size, appearance and text color of the label text, click the Font tab.

5	To select a style, border, and color for the label boxes, click the Box Type tab.

6	To select the fill style and options for the label boxes, click the Box Fill tab.

Tips

You can also double-click a label, then select the label options you want.

Related Topics

About Data Labels


To choose legend options
To choose legend options,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend.

3	Select Display legend.

4	Click the Type/Position tab, then click a type and position for the legend.

5	Click the Text Font tab to select a Font face, style, size, appearance, and text color for the legend text.

6	Click the Title Font tab to select a Font face, style, size, appearance, and text color for the Legend title.

7	Click the Box Type tab to select a style, border, and color for the legend box.

8	Click the Box Fill tab to select a fill style and fill options for the legend box.

Tips

You can also right-click the space beside the chart and click Display Legend to toggle the legend display on and off.

Related Topics

About Legend


To choose series options
To choose series options,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Series.

3	Click the arrow buttons at the top of the dialog box to select the series you want to change.

4	Click the series type you want.

5	Click Primary (Y1) or Secondary (Y2) to attach the current series to an axis.

6	Click the Fill tab, then select a fill style and options for the series.

7	Click the Line tab, then select a line width, style, and color.

Tips

You can also double-click the series you want to change, then select series options.

Related Topics

About Series Properties


To choose perspective options
To choose perspective options,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Perspective.

3	Select Right-angle axes to have the axes appear perpendicular to each other.

4	Specify the horizontal and vertical values to tilt your chart.

5	Select Wire frame view to display the chart in the view box as a series of frames with no colors or patterns.

Tips

Click Reset to restore default perspective options.

Related Topics

About Perspective


To create and edit chart titles
To create and edit chart titles,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Title.

3	Select Display chart title, then type the title.

4	To select text options for the title, click the Title Font, Text Fill, and Text Outline tabs.

5	To select fill and border outlines for the box around the title, click the Box Type and Box Fill tabs.

6	To position your title, click the Position tab.

Tips

You can also double-click the title, then select title options.

You can drag a title or subtitle where you want in the chart. Hold down Shift while you drag a title or subtitle to "snap" it either left, center, or right-justified. To restore a title or subtitle to its original position on the chart, right-click the text, then select Reset Text.

Related Topics

About Title Properties


To create and edit chart subtitles
To create and edit chart subtitles,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Subtitle.

3	Select Display chart subtitle, then type the subtitle.

4	To select text options for the subtitle, click the Subtitle Font, Text Fill, and Text Outline tabs.

5	To select fill and border outlines for the box around the subtitle, click the Box Type and Box Fill tabs.

6	To position your subtitle, click the Position tab.

Tips

You can also double-click the subtitle, then select subtitle options.

Related Topics

About Subtitle Properties


To rename backgrounds in the current slide show
To rename backgrounds in the current slide show,

1	Click Edit [image] Background Layer.

2	Click Edit [image] Rename Background.

3	Select the background you want to rename using the arrow buttons in the dialog box.

4	Type a new name for the background, then click OK.

5	Click Edit [image] Slide Layer to return to your slide show.

Tips

The new background name appears in this slide show only, not in other slide shows using this master.

The background name can use up to 15 letters, characters, and spaces.

Related Topics

About the Background Layer


To separate pie slices from a pie chart
To separate pie slices from a pie chart,

1	Create or double-click a pie chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/Type.

3	Specify the pie chart number in the Current pie text box.

4	Click Explode slice.

5	Select the slice you want to move away from the rest of the pie.

6	Specify the percent of distance (1 to 200) you want to move the pie slice from the center of the pie chart. If you choose a distance of 200, the slice is moved away 200% from the center of the pie, or two times the radius of the pie.

Tips

You can also right-click the chart and click Layout/Type Properties.

You can also select and drag a slice away from the pie.

Related Topics

About Explode Slice


To choose fonts for bulleted lists
To choose fonts for bulleted lists,

1	Create or double-click a bulleted list.

2	Right-click the bulleted list, click Bulleted List Properties, then click the Fonts tab.

3	Select a level, then select a font face, size, style, and appearance.

4	Click Font Properties, select foreground and background colors, then click OK.

5	Repeat steps 3-4 for each level of the bulleted list.

6	Click Apply to use the current font settings in the selected bulleted list, or Apply to all to use the current font settings in all slides using the Bulleted List template.

Tips

To change the font face, size, and appearance for all bulleted list text at once, simply select the chart, right-click, click Font, then select the font options you want. The font size applies to the first level, and all other levels are scaled proportionately.

You can make changes to several levels at a time within the dialog box. Drag to select adjacent levels, or hold down the Ctrl key and select the levels you want to change.

Related Topics

About Bulleted List Properties


To design bulleted lists
To design bulleted lists,

1	Create or double-click a bulleted list.

2	Right-click the bulleted list, then click Bulleted List Properties.

3	Select the bullet, font, and box options you want for your bulleted list.

4	Click Save Style, type a name for the style in the File name text box, then click OK to save the bulleted list style for future use.

Tips

Click Apply to All to incorporate your changes in all the slides in the current slide show that use the bulleted list layout. It modifies the Bulleted List layout in the master you are using.

Related Topics

About Bulleted List Properties


To choose box properties for organization charts
To choose box properties for organization charts,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the boxes you want to choose properties for.

3	Right-click a box, then click Box Properties.

4	Click the Box Type tab, then click a box style.

5	Click the Fill tab, then select fill options.

6	Click the Box Size tab, then specify how much of the available vertical and horizontal space the boxes should fill.

Tips

For more information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

Select No border on the Box Type tab to create boxes with fill and shadows but without outlines.

Select No box on the Box Type tab to display only text without boxes.

Related Topics

About Box Properties


To choose box options for bulleted lists
To choose box options for bulleted lists,

1	Create or double-click a bulleted list.

2	Right-click the bulleted list, click Bulleted List Properties, then click the Box tab.

3	Click a position option to place the box in relation to the text.

4	Click a box shape.

5	Select a frame type and color.

6	Click Properties, select the fill style and fill option you want, then click OK.

7	Click Apply to all to use the current box and frame settings in all slides using the Bulleted List layout.

Related Topics

About Bulleted Lists


To define bullets
To define bullets,

1	Create or double-click a bulleted list.

2	Right-click the bulleted list, click Bulleted List Properties, then click the Bullets tab.

3	Select a bullet set from the drop-down list if you want to use a pre-defined bullet style.

4	Select the level you want to choose a bullet, justification, and relative size for.

5	Select a justification for the selected level.

6	Specify a relative size (from 50-150%) for the bullet in comparison to the text.

7	Click Foreground, then select the bullet color you want to use from the palette.

8	Repeat steps 4-7 for each bullet level.

Tips

If you want to choose a different bullet character, click the Bullet Shape drop-down list, then select a different bullet from the list instead of the predefined bullet, or click Other to insert a bullet from the Character sets.

You can make changes to several levels at a time. Drag to select adjacent levels, or hold down the Ctrl key and select the levels you want to change.

Related Topics

About Bulleted List Properties


To design organization charts
To design organization charts,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the portion of the organization chart you want to change.

3	Click Format [image] Orientation, then click a branch orientation.

4	Click the Structure tab, click a branch structure, then click Close.

5	Click Format [image] Box Spacing, then specify the amount of space between boxes.

6	Click Format [image] Font, then select a font face, size, style, appearance, and color.

7	Click Format [image] Box Fields, then add, delete, move, and rename the assigned fields for each position.

8	Click Format [image] Box Properties, then select the border, style, fill, and size for the position boxes.

9	Click Format [image] Connectors, then select connector and line styles.

10	Click Chart [image] Save Style, specify a path and filename for the style, then click OK to save the chart style for future use.

Tips

You can also right-click the chart and click Orientation, Branch Structure, Box Fields, Box Properties, and Font Properties.

Related Topics

About Organization Chart


To change connectors between organization chart levels
To change connectors between organization chart levels,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the portion of the organization chart you want to change.

3	Click Format [image] Connectors.

4	Click Direct or Right angles for the Connector type.

5	Select Show staff connectors, then select a line color, style, and width for the lines connecting managers to staff.

6	Select Show subordinate connectors, then select a line color, style, and width for the lines connecting managers to subordinates.

Tips

In steps 5 and 6 you can select "X" in the line style palette if you do not want a line to connect positions.

Related Topics

About Connectors


To set the top position in an organization chart
To set the top position in an organization chart,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the position that will display at the top of the organization chart.

3	Click View [image] Zoom to Branch.

Tips

The rest of your data is still there, but it does not appear in your organization chart or print out until you click View [image] Zoom to Chart to return to a full view of your organization chart.

Related Topics

About Zoom to Branch


To make objects transparent
To make objects transparent,

1	Create two overlapping, filled objects of different colors.

2	Select the top object.

3	Click Format [image] Object Properties [image] Fill.

4	Click [image], then click a pattern from the palette

5	Click a color from the Foreground and/or the Background color palette.

6	Click Pattern Settings, then click Foreground color or Background color.

Tips

For best results, choose a pattern color that is not displayed in the overlapping objects or in the page color.

Related Topics


To redraw charts automatically
To redraw charts automatically,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click View [image] Auto Redraw.

Tips

Click View [image] Redraw to manually correct distortions or show changes.

You can also press Ctrl+F3 to correct display problems in both the Chart Editor and the drawing window.

Related Topics

About Auto Redraw


To display or hide the Datasheet
To display or hide the Datasheet,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click View [image] Datasheet.

Tips

To move the Datasheet, place the pointer inside the title bar, then drag the Datasheet to a new location.

To size the Datasheet, place the pointer on any side or corner of the Datasheet so that the pointer becomes a double-arrow, then drag to size the Datasheet.

Related Topics

About View Datasheet


To create bitmaps
To create bitmaps,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar.

2	Drag to create an area large enough for the bitmap or click the drawing window to create a full-page bitmap.

3	Use the tools on the bitmap toolbar to create a bitmap image.

Related Topics

About the Bitmap Editor


To insert a Clipart image from the Scrapbook
To insert a Clipart image from the Scrapbook,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar to open the Scrapbook.

2	Browse through the category folders until you find the Clipart image you want to insert.

3	Drag the image from the Scrapbook into your document.

4	Size and move the image as you would any other drawing object.

Tips

Thousands of Clipart images are provided with the Corel WordPerfect Suite, only some of which are copied to your hard drive. The remaining Clipart images and photos are located on the Corel WordPerfect Suite Applications CD (or on your network). If you want to insert one of the images on CD, place the Applications CD in your CD drive, then click the CD Clipart tab in the Scrapbook.

All the Clipart images in the Scrapbook are in Corel WordPerfect graphics format (.WPG). If you want to insert images in other graphics formats such as .JPG, .GIF, or .PCX, click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File. Select the graphics format you want from the File type drop-down list, then locate and select the image you want to insert.

Related Topics

About Clipart


To insert a Clipart image from the CD-ROM
To insert a Clipart image from the CD-ROM,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar to open the Scrapbook.

2	Insert the Corel WordPerfect Suite Application CD into your CD-ROM drive.

3	Click the CD Clipart tab in Scrapbook.

4	Browse through the Clipart folder categories until you find the image you want to insert.

5	Drag the image from the Scrapbook into your document.

6	Size and move the image as you would any other drawing object.

Tips

You can also click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File, then specify the name of the graphic you want to insert.

Related Topics

About Clipart


To spray paint a bitmap area
To spray paint a bitmap area,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click [image], then select a fill pattern or gradient.

3	Click [image] on toolbar.

4	Drag the Air Brush to create a continuous stream or click to paint spots of color.

Related Topics

About the Air Brush


To erase in bitmaps
To erase in bitmaps,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click [image] on the toolbar.

3	Drag the eraser over the pixels you want to erase.

Tips

When you erase, the colored pixel is replaced with the transparent color you are using.

Related Topics

About Eraser


To fill bitmap areas with the same color
To fill bitmap areas with the same color,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click [image] on the toolbar.

3	Click the area of the bitmap that you want to flood fill with the current color.

Tips

You can click Edit [image]  Undo immediately after filling an area to reverse the action.

Flood Fill replaces only colored regions of the image. A color region is a group of connecting pixels that share the same color.

You can use the Zoom feature along with Flood Fill to replace a color region composed of a small cluster of pixels.

Related Topics

About Flood Fill


To use the paint brush
To use the paint brush,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click [image] on the toolbar.

3	Drag the paint brush to paint with the currently selected pattern or gradient color.

Tips

You can also hold down Ctrl to paint with the currently selected background color.

Related Topics

About Paint Brush


To pick up colors in bitmaps
To pick up colors in bitmaps,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click [image] on the toolbar.

3	Click the desired color or shade in the bitmap image.

4	Click a painting tool on the toolbar to use the picked-up color.

Tips

You can also hold down Ctrl while clicking to pick up the currently selected background color.

Related Topics

About Pickup Color


To selectively replace colors in bitmaps
To selectively replace colors in bitmaps,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click [image] on the toolbar.

3	Click [image], then click the color you want to replace from the Foreground color palette.

4	Click [image], then click the color you want to replace it with from the Background color palette.

5	Drag the eraser over the area you want to replace.

Related Topics

About Selective Replace


To use QuickMenus
To use QuickMenus,

1	Place the pointer on the object or area you want to use a QuickMenu for.

2	Press the right mouse button (right-click) to see the QuickMenu.

3	Click the option you want on the QuickMenu.

Related Topics

About the Edit Menu


To draw curves
To draw curves,

1	Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

2	Click to begin the curved line.

3	Click at each place where the curve should change directions.

4	Double-click to finish the curve.

Tips

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the curve.

Related Topics

About Curve


To draw closed curves
To draw closed curves,

1	Click [image] and [image] on the Property Bar to select a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

3	Click once to begin the curved shape.

4	Click at each place where the curve should change directions.

5	Double-click to finish the closed curve.

Tips

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the closed curve.

Related Topics

About Closed Curve


To draw freehand
To draw freehand,

1	Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

2	Drag to create the line, using the mouse as you would a pen or pencil.

3	Release the mouse button to complete the line.

Tips

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the line.

Related Topics

About Freehand


To draw Bezier curves
To draw Bezier curves,

1	Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

2	Click where you want to start the curved line. This is the first anchor point.

3	Click where you want the line to curve in another direction. This is the second anchor point.

4	Hold down the mouse button and drag the pointer to display two control handles.

5	Move a control handle to change the shape of the curve between the current point and the previous point.

6	Release the mouse button to complete the section of the curve.

7	Repeat steps 3 through 6 to create the next section of the curve.

8	Double-click to finish the curve.

Tips

Hold down both mouse buttons to reposition the curve in the drawing window without altering it or adding to it.

Related Topics

About Bezier


To draw arrows
To draw arrows,

1	Click [image] and [image] on the Property Bar to select a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

3	Click once to place the point and start the arrow.

4	Move the pointer to where the arrow tail should end.

5	Click to complete the arrow.

Tips

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the arrow.

Related Topics

About Arrow


To draw curved arrows
To draw curved arrows,

1	Click [image] and [image] on the toolbar to select a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

3	Click and hold to place the point and start the arrow.

4	Drag to specify the angle of the curve, then release the mouse button.

5	Move the pointer to create the curve for the arrow.

6	Click to complete the curved arrow.

Tips

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the arrow.

Related Topics

About Arrow


To draw double-curved arrows
To draw double-curved arrows,

1	Click [image] and [image] to select a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

3	Click and hold to place the point and start the arrow.

4	Drag to specify the angle of the curve, then release the mouse button.

5	Move the pointer to create the first curve for the arrow.

6	Click and drag to create the second curve.

7	Release the mouse button to complete the double-curved arrow.

Tips

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the arrow.

Related Topics

About Arrow


To draw zig-zag lines
To draw zig-zag lines,

1	Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

2	Click to start the line.

3	Click at each point where the line should change directions.

4	Double-click to complete the line.

Tips

This tool creates a zig-zag line. If you want to create a single, straight line, click [image] on the toolbar.

Press Backspace to remove the most recent anchor point.

Related Topics

About Polyline


To draw polygons
To draw polygons,

1	Click [image] and [image] on the Property Bar to select a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] from the Closed Objects Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

3	Click to begin the shape.

4	Move the pointer to the end of one side of the polygon, then click.

5	Repeat step 4 until the shape you want is outlined.

6	Double-click to complete the shape.

Tips

Press Shift while drawing to draw exact horizontal, vertical, or 45-degree angle lines.

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the polygon.

Related Topics

About Polygon


To draw regular polygons
To draw regular polygons,

1	Click [image] and [image] on the Property Bar to select a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

3	Specify the number of sides for the shape in the Regular Polygon dialog box, which appears in the top-right corner of the application window.

4	Click and drag to expand the shape from the starting point.

5	Release the mouse button to complete the shape.

Tips

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the regular polygon.

Related Topics

About Regular Polygon


To draw rectangles
To draw rectangles,

1	Click [image] and [image] on the Property Bar to select a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

3	Click and drag to expand the rectangle.

4	Release the mouse button to complete the rectangle.

Tips

Press Shift while dragging to constrain the rectangle to a square.

Press Alt while dragging to expand the rectangle from a center point.

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the rectangle.

Related Topics

About Rectangle


To draw rounded rectangles
To draw rounded rectangles,

1	Click [image] and [image] on the Property Bar to select a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

3	Click and drag to expand the rectangle.

4	Release the mouse button to complete the rectangle.

Tips

Press Shift while drawing to constrain the rounded rectangle to a rounded square.

Press Alt while drawing to draw the rounded rectangle from a center point.

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the rounded rectangle.

Related Topics

About Rounded Rectangle


To draw ellipses
To draw ellipses,

1	Click [image] and [image] on the Property Bar to select a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

3	Click and drag to expand the ellipse.

4	Release the mouse button to complete the ellipse.

Tips

Press Shift while drawing to constrain the ellipse to a circle.

Press Alt to expand the ellipse from a center point.

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the ellipse.

Related Topics

About Ellipse


To draw elliptical arcs
To draw elliptical arcs,

1	Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

2	Drag to begin the arc.

3	Release the mouse button to complete the arc.

Tips

Press Shift while drawing to constrain the elliptical arc to a circular arc.

Press Alt while drawing to invert the elliptical arc.

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the elliptical arc.

Related Topics

About Elliptical Arc


To draw circles
To draw circles,

1	Click [image] and [image] on the Property Bar to select a fill color and pattern.

2	Click [image] from the Closed Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

3	Click and drag to expand the circle.

4	Release the mouse button to complete the circle.

Tips

Press Alt while drawing to expand the circle from the beginning anchor point.

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the circle.

Related Topics

About Circle


To draw circular arcs
To draw circular arcs,

1	Click [image] from the Line Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

2	Click where the arc should begin.

3	Drag to where the arc should end.

4	Move the pointer to create the arc between the two points.

5	Click to complete the arc.

Tips

Hold down both mouse buttons while drawing to reposition the arc.

Related Topics

About Circular Arc


Tips for Creating Bulleted Lists

Bulleted lists effectively summarize and reinforce ideas and thoughts. Keep the following points in mind when you create any type of bulleted list:

The title should focus on one main topic and capture the interest of your audience.

Use no more than eight words per line.

Use the same style of bullet throughout a group of charts.

Express a single idea on each line.

Avoid using more than six bulleted lines of text.

Use nouns and action verbs to start your sentences.

Related Topics


To edit backgrounds in the current slide show
To edit backgrounds in the current slide show,

1	Click Edit [image] Background Layer.

2	Select the background you want to edit from the list of backgrounds in the lower right of the application window.

3	Edit the background by adding or deleting page colors, objects, text, and any other elements.

4	Click Edit [image] Layout Layer.

5	Click Format [image] Assign Background.

6	Select the layouts you want to use the edited background, then click OK.

7	Click Edit [image] Slide Layer to return to your slide show.

Tips

The edited background appears in this slide show only, not in other slide shows using this master.

Related Topics

About the Background Layer


To save objects with less white space
To save objects with less white space,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Save Options tab.

3	Select Size view to fit graphic.

4	Specify the percentage of white space you want to surround the drawing object(s) when you insert them into another application (such as Corel WordPerfect).

Tips

You can also right-click the drawing window and click Page Setup.

Related Topics

About Page Setup


To exit Corel Presentations
To exit Corel Presentations,

1	Click File [image] Exit.

2	Click Yes to save changes, then specify a path and filename for the document if necessary.

Related Topics

About Exit


To add .WPG files to the Scrapbook
To add .WPG files to the Scrapbook,

1	If necessary, create the image you want to add to the Scrapbook, and save it as a .WPG file.

2	In a file management dialog box, go to the folder in which you saved the image or group of images.

3	Right-click the image, then click Copy.

4	Go to the Corel WordPerfect Suite Clipart folder (if you chose a standard installation, the path to the Clipart folder will be \\Corel\Suite8\Graphics\Clipart).

5	Right-click outside all the image files, then click Paste from the QuickMenu.

Tips

To copy multiple image files, press the Ctrl key and click each file you want. To copy a range of image files, click the first file at the start of the range, then press Shift and click the last file at the end of the range.

You can copy a folder of image files into the Clipart folder for access through the Scrapbook.

Related Topics

About Clipart


To add new folders to the Scrapbook
To add new folders to the Scrapbook,

1	In a file management dialog box, go to the Corel WordPerfect Suite Clipart folder (if you chose a standard installation, the path to the Clipart folder will be \\Corel\Suite8\Graphics\Clipart).

2	Right-click outside all the current folders, then click New Folder.

3	Select the folder, then click the title to change it from "New Folder" to the name of your category.

4	Copy and paste .WPG image files from other categories or folders outside (or inside) the Scrapbook into your new category folder.

Tips

To copy multiple image files, press the Ctrl key and click each file you want. To copy a range of image files, click the first file at the start of the range, then press Shift and click the last file at the end of the range.

You can copy a folder of image files into the Clipart folder for access through the Scrapbook.

Related Topics

About Clipart


To switch between open documents
To switch between open documents,

1	Click Window [image] Title of the document you want to switch to, or click the name of the open document in the Application Bar at the bottom of the window.

Tips

For more information about the Application Bar and what you can do with it, just right-click the Application Bar, then click What's This?

Related Topics


To mail documents from Corel Presentations
To mail documents from Corel Presentations,

1	Click File [image] Send To [image] Mail.

2	Set mail options according to your mail system.

3	Send the mail and return to Corel Presentations.

Related Topics

About Mail


To update linked and embedded objects
To update linked and embedded objects,

1	Activate a Corel Presentations object in another application.

2	Make the changes you want to your drawing or chart.

3	Click File [image] Update.

Related Topics

About Update


To find synonyms and antonyms
To find synonyms and antonyms,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Place the insertion point in the word for which you want a synonym or antonym.

3	Click Tools [image] Thesaurus.

4	Select a synonym or antonym.

5	Click Replace to replace the word.

Tips

If you want more information about using the Thesaurus, click the Help button on the Writing Tools dialog box.

Related Topics

About Thesaurus


Bitmaps vs. Vector Objects

A bitmap image is composed of tiny screen dots called pixels. You can create and edit bitmaps in the Bitmap Editor by zooming in and altering each pixel in the image individually.

A vector object is a whole object and is treated as such. Objects created in the drawing window, such as charts, text lines, and drawings, are vector objects.

Bitmap images are formulated pixel by pixel. Because of this, a bitmap image may look jagged when printed or enlarged. Vector objects, on the other hand, are formulated through mathematic calculations and maintain a high resolution when printed or enlarged.

Related Topics


To undo changes
To undo changes,

1	Click Edit [image] Undo.

Tips

In the Bitmap Editor, you can also right-click the bitmap and click Undo.

Undo remembers the last 10 actions of the current session and moves backward through the order.

Related Topics

About Undo


To redo changes
To redo changes,

1	Click Edit [image] Redo.

Tips

Redo reverses the action of Undo. Redo remembers the same 10 actions as Undo but moves forward through the order instead of backward.

Related Topics

About Redo


To delete objects and text
To delete objects and text,

1	Select the object(s) or text you want to delete.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete.

Tips

You can also press Esc to delete an object while drawing it.

Related Topics

About Delete


To copy and paste objects, positions, and text
To copy and paste objects, positions, and text,

1	Select the object(s) or text you want to copy. In an organization chart, select the branch you want to copy.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Click Edit [image] Paste to transfer the objects from the Clipboard to the drawing window. In an organization chart, select the position you want the copied branch pasted to, then click Edit [image] Paste Branch.

Tips

Pasted text appears at the insertion point. Pasted objects appear in the same place as the original. Drag to move them to a different place.

In the Bitmap Editor, click [image] on the toolbar, then drag the pointer to select the area you want to copy.

You can also right-click the drawing window and click Copy and Paste.

Related Topics

About Copy


To list the OLE links in the current drawing or slide
To list the OLE links in the current drawing or slide,

1	Click Edit [image] Links.

2	Select the link you want to edit and make any necessary changes.

Related Topics

About Links


To edit linked objects
To edit linked objects,

1	Double-click the object to open it in the application where you created it.

2	Edit the object.

3	Click File [image] Exit and Return.

Related Topics

In-place Editing vs. Open Editing


To edit embedded objects
To edit embedded objects,

1	Double-click the object to open the application in which you created it.

2	Edit the object.

3	Click outside the object to close it.

Related Topics

In-place Editing vs. Open Editing


To overlay text on Clipart
To overlay text on Clipart,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar.

2	Double-click a category folder.

3	Click an image to select it, then click Insert.

4	Click [image] from the Text Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar, then drag to define a text box over the image.

5	Click Format [image] Font, select a font, size, style, appearance, then click OK.

6	Type the text, then click outside the text box to close it.

7	Size or move the text to make it fit in the available space.

Tips

You can also right-click the text box and click Font.

Related Topics

About Clipart


To duplicate objects and areas
To duplicate objects and areas,

1	Select the object(s) or bitmap area you want to duplicate.

2	Press Ctrl while dragging to the location where you want to place the copy.

Tips

To constrain the duplicate to a position precisely horizontal or vertical from the original object(s), press and hold Shift+Ctrl, then drag the object(s) horizontally or vertically from the original.

Related Topics


To rotate objects
To rotate objects,

1	Select the object you want to rotate.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Rotate.

3	Drag a corner handle to rotate the object.

Tips

You can also right-click the selected object, then click Rotate.

After step 2, you can right-click a corner handle, then specify the number of degrees you want the object rotated. You can also select Rotate a copy of the object(s) to make a rotated copy of the object and leave the original unaltered.

Drag the round rotation point in the center of the object to change the center of rotation.

Press Shift while you drag a corner rotation handle to rotate the object in 45 degree increments.

While you drag a corner handle to rotate the object, hold down the right mouse button (or the left mouse button if your mouse is set up for left-handed use) at the same time and drag the object to a new location.

Related Topics

About Rotate


To skew objects
To skew objects,

1	Select the object you want to skew.

2	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Rotate.

3	Drag a top, bottom, or side handle to skew the object.

Tips

After step 2, you can right-click a top, bottom, or side handle, then specify the percent you want to skew the object. Now select Around center to skew the object around its center point, or select Skew a copy of the object(s) to make a skewed copy of the object and leave the original unskewed.

After step 1, you can right-click the object and click Rotate.

Press Alt while you drag a top, bottom, or side handle to skew both sides of the object at once.

While you drag a handle to skew the object, hold down the right mouse button (or the left mouse button if your mouse is set up for left-handed use) at the same time and drag the object to a new location.

Related Topics

About Skew


To stretch objects
To stretch objects,

1	Select the object you want to stretch.

2	Drag a middle top, middle bottom, or side handle to stretch the object.

Tips

After step 1, you can right-click a middle top, middle bottom, or side handle, then specify how many times wider, taller, shorter, or narrower you want the object stretched. You can also select Around center to stretch the object from its center point, or select Stretch a copy of the object(s) to make a stretched copy of the object and leave the original unaltered.

Press Alt while you drag a middle top, middle bottom, or side handle to stretch the object from its center.

Press Shift while you drag a corner handle to stretch the object both vertically and horizontally.

While you drag a handle to stretch the object, hold down the right mouse button (or the left mouse button if your mouse is set up for left-handed use) at the same time and drag the object to a new location.

Related Topics

About Stretch


To size objects
To size objects,

1	Select the object you want to size.

2	Drag a corner handle to size the object larger or smaller.

Tips

After step 1, you can right-click a corner handle, then specify how many times larger or smaller you want the object to be. You can also select Around center to size the object from its center point, or select Size a copy of the object(s) to make a sized copy of the object and leave the original unaltered.

Press Alt while you drag a corner to size the object from its center.

Press Shift while you drag a corner handle to size the object both vertically and horizontally.

While you drag a handle to size the object, hold down the right mouse button (or the left mouse button if your mouse is set up for left-handed use) at the same time and drag the object to a new location.

Related Topics

About Size


To overlay images on images
To overlay images on images,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar to open the Scrapbook.

2	Browse through the category folders until you find the Clipart image you want to insert.

3	Drag the image from the Scrapbook into your document.

4	Repeat steps 1-4 to insert other Clipart images.

5	Select the images to size and position them on top of each other.

Tips

Use the options on the Order menu to position the graphics in front of and behind each other.

Related Topics

About Clipart


To move to a slide
To move to a slide,

1	Select the slide you want to go to from the drop-down list at the bottom right of the application window.

Tips

You can also click the tab for a slide.

Related Topics

About Go To List


To choose environment defaults
To choose environment defaults,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click [image].

2	Click the Startup tab, then click Display Document Select dialog box, or select Create new slide show or Create new drawing when you open Corel Presentations or begin a new document.

3	Click the Options tab, then select Error and/or Search failure if you want the computer to beep when an error message comes up or a search fails.

4	Select Automatically select whole words when dragging to select text if you want to expand your selection to include entire words in a text box or a text line.

5	Select the default graphics format that you want your drawing saved in.

6	Click the Language tab, then select a language for interface elements and a language module for content items such as the Spell Checker, Thesaurus, and so forth.

Tips

You must purchase additional language modules to use other interface or content languages.

Related Topics

About Environment Settings


To add Clipart to charts
To add Clipart to charts,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar, then click the drawing window to create a full-page chart.

2	Select a chart type, then click OK.

3	Add your own data to the Datasheet to create the chart.

4	Click a blank area outside the chart frame to close the Chart Editor.

5	Click [image] on the toolbar to open the Scrapbook.

6	Browse through the category folders until you find the Clipart image you want to insert.

7	Drag the image from the Scrapbook into your document.

8	Repeat steps 5-7 to place other Clipart images on the chart.

9	Select each image, then size and position it on the chart.

Related Topics

About Clipart


To create Clipart bullets
To create Clipart bullets,

1	Click [image] from the Text Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar, then click in the drawing window to define a full-page bulleted list.

2	Type your text for each bulleted item.

3	Click Format [image] Bulleted List Properties.

4	Click the Bullets tab, then click a bullet level.

5	Select None from the Bullet shape drop-down list, then click OK.

6	Click [image] on the toolbar to open the Scrapbook.

7	Browse through the category folders until you find the Clipart image you want to insert.

8	Drag the image from the Scrapbook into your document.

9	Size and position the image in front of the first item on the bulleted list.

10	Press Ctrl while dragging the image in front of the remaining bulleted items to copy it. If you want, use a guideline to align the bullets vertically. Just click View [image] Grid/Guides/Snap [image] Display Guides, then drag the vertical guideline where you want it.

11	Select all the image bullets, and align them with the text and each other.

12	Click Graphics on the Property Bar, then click Space Evenly [image] Top/Bottom to evenly space the images to match your text lines.

13	Select all the bullet images and the bulleted list.

14	Right-click on any image bullet, then click Group to keep the bulleted list and images together for moving, rotating, and so on.

Tips

You can also right-click the bulleted list, then click Bulleted List Properties.

Clipart bullets do not work with Object Animations; they will remain in place as the text moves.

Related Topics


To choose language modules
To choose language modules,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click Environment.

2	Click the Language tab, then specify a language.

Related Topics

About Language


To create pictographs
To create pictographs,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar, then click the drawing window to create a full-page chart.

2	Select Bar as the chart type, click the style of chart you want to use, deselect the 3-D check box, then click OK.

3	Click [image] on the toolbar to open the Scrapbook.

4	Browse through the category folders until you find the Clipart image you want to insert.

5	Drag the image from the Scrapbook into your document.

6	Size and move the Clipart image to fit the bar.

7	Repeat steps 3-6 to insert the other Clipart images you want to use to replace the bars of the chart.

8	Select the chart, click Separate Objects from the Graphics drop-down list on the Property Bar.

9	Select each part of the original bars, then click Edit [image] Delete.

10	Right-click the drawing area, then click Select All.

11	Click Group from the Graphics drop-down list on the Property Bar.

Tips

A pictograph is a bar chart that uses Clipart images instead of the usual bars. For example, you could use trees of different heights to represent annual forest growth.

You can also double-click a series while editing the chart, click the Fill tab, click [image], then select a bitmap to use inside the series. This method is faster, though you do not have as many graphics to choose from.

You cannot edit the data in your chart after you convert it into a pictograph.

Before you use the Separate Objects feature on the chart, you can also double-click a series, click the Fill tab, and select apicture fill style if you want to use a stack of predefined bitmap images.

Related Topics


To create new documents
To create new documents,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar.

Related Topics

About New


To clear the drawing window
To clear the drawing window,

1	Click Edit [image] Clear [image] Yes.

Tips

When you use Clear, it will also empty any actions temporarily stored in Undo and Redo, up to that point, in your session.

Related Topics

About Clear


To close documents
To close documents,

1	Click File [image] Close.

Tips

If you have changed the file since you last saved it, click Yes, specify a path and filename for the file if necessary, then click OK.

Related Topics

About Close


To save documents
To save documents,

1	Click File [image] Save.

2	Specify a path and filename if necessary.

Tips

Clicking Save replaces the original document with the document currently on screen. If you want to save the current document as a different file, or with a new name, click File [image] Save As.

Related Topics

About Save


To scan images into the drawing window
To scan images into the drawing window,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Acquire Image.

2	Click Page bounded, Area bounded, or Fixed size to size your image to the scanning area.

3	Consult your scanner software documentation for instructions on manipulating the image.

Related Topics

About Acquire Image


To set up a scanner
To set up a scanner,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Select Image Source.

2	Highlight the image scanner you want, then click Select.

Tips

You must have an image scanner with a TWAIN-compatible driver installed. Each scanner has different capabilities which will affect how you can use it. Please refer to your image scanner manual for more information. If your scanner's TWAIN drivers are designed for an earlier version of Windows, you may need new drivers from your scanner's manufacturer.

Related Topics

About Select Image Source


To open documents
To open documents,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Specify the path and filename of the document you want to open.

Related Topics

About Open


To insert files
To insert files,

1	Click Insert [image] File.

2	Specify the path and filename of the graphics file to insert.

Tips

To insert text files, create a text box, then insert the file.

Related Topics

About Insert File


To choose page size and orientation
To choose page size and orientation,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Size tab, then select a pre-defined page definition , or click New to create your own definition.

Tips

You can only choose formatting options for slide shows and drawings that do not use a predefined master.

You can also right-click the drawing window outside of any other objects, then click Page Setup.

Related Topics

About Page Setup


Tips for Using Foreground and Background Colors in Bitmaps

All patterns consist of two colors--a foreground color and a background color. You can press the Ctrl key to quickly reverse these colors when creating or editing a bitmap image.

For example, suppose you are using the rectangle tool to create an image that resembles a brick wall. After selecting the rectangle tool, you select the brick pattern from the Fill Pattern palette, then you select gray as the foreground color (for gray mortar) and red as the background color (for red bricks). But wait--suppose you change your mind and want gray bricks with red mortar. Instead of having to select new foreground and background colors, you can hold down the Ctrl key to reverse the current foreground and background colors, then draw the rectangle. When you release the Ctrl key, then draw another rectangle, the color returns to the previous setting.

Related Topics


To choose pattern or gradient page backgrounds
To choose pattern or gradient page backgrounds,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup, then click the Page Color tab.

2	Click [image] or [image] as the fill style.

3	Select the foreground and/or the background colors you want.

4	Click a pattern or gradient.

Tips

You can also right-click the drawing window and click Page Setup.

Related Topics

About Page Setup


To size bitmap frames
To size bitmap frames,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Move the pointer over a corner or side handle until it changes to a double-headed arrow.

3	Drag the handle to size the bitmap frame.

Tips

You can also use the bitmap frame to cut away parts of the bitmap image. You might cut away the white space around your drawing, or parts of the image you do not want. Just drag one of the handles to move the frame over the portion of the image you do not want. Any part of the image moved outside the resized frame is deleted when you return the bitmap image to the drawing window.

Sizing a bitmap frame in the Bitmap Editor will not be possible if you have rotated or skewed the bitmap image in the drawing window.

Changing the size of the bitmap frame will alter the image and its size and position when you return it to the drawing window.

Related Topics


To move bitmap areas
To move bitmap areas,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click [image] on the toolbar.

3	Drag the pointer to designate the area you want to move.

4	Drag the selected area to a new location.

5	Click outside the selected area to deselect it.

Related Topics


To create posters
To create posters,

1	Click File [image] New, then double-click Presentations Drawing to open a new drawing window. The Posters feature is unavailable if you double-click Presentations Slide Show.

2	Create the content of your poster or retrieve a drawing saved as a .wpg file.

3	Click File [image] Page Setup, then click the Posters tab.

4	Click the Poster size button and drag to specify how many pages across and down you want your poster to be.

5	To print the poster, click File [image] Print, then click Full document from the Print list.

Tips

You can also right-click the drawing window and click Page Setup.

The maximum size for a poster is 6 rows by 6 columns.

Many printers have a minimum margin setting to allow for an unprintable region. This means that you may have white edges around the pages that make up your poster. You may need to cut these off before you fasten the sheets together to make your poster.

Related Topics

About Page Setup


To set default settings
To set default settings,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Double-click the icons and make any needed changes.

Related Topics

About Settings


To set backup defaults
To set backup defaults,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click Files.

2	Click the Backup tab, then select the backup options you want.

Related Topics

About File Backup Settings


To choose display defaults
To choose display defaults,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click Display.

2	Change any of the display options.

Related Topics

About Display Settings


To make bitmap colors transparent
To make bitmap colors transparent,

1	Create or double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Format [image] Set Transparent Color.

3	Select a color you want to make transparent from the color palette.

Tips

When you create new bitmaps, the default background in the Bitmap Editor is always set at transparent. If you want to turn off the transparent background, select No transparent color in the Transparent Color dialog box.

Related Topics


To size text boxes
To size text boxes,

1	Click [image] from the Text Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar, then drag to create a small text area.

2	Fill the text box with your own text. It expands downward as long as you type.

3	Click outside the text box to close it.

4	Drag a handle to size the text box (the font size is adjusted accordingly) or, press Shift and drag a corner handle to stretch/compress the text.

Tips

Use the QuickWarp feature or the Rotate feature to skew the text.

To extend a text box without increasing the text size, drag a left or right side handle after step 4 above.

Related Topics

About Text Box


To position text as superscript or subscript
To position text as superscript or subscript,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Place the insertion point where you want to begin typing superscript or subscript text.

3	Right-click the text, then click Font.

4	Select Superscript or Subscript as a Position option, then click OK.

5	Type your superscript or subscript text.

Tips

To make existing text superscript or subscript, select the text, right-click, click Font, then select a position.

Related Topics

About Font Properties


To change the relative size of text
To change the relative size of text,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Place the insertion point where you want to type text in a different size.

3	Right-click the text, then click Font.

4	Select a relative size option.

Tips

To change the size of existing text, select the text, right-click, click Font, then select a relative size.

Related Topics

About Font Properties


To rearrange text
To rearrange text,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Select the text you want to move.

3	Drag the selected text to a new position inside the current text box or text line.

Tips

A flashing bar indicates the position the text will take when you release the mouse button.

Related Topics

About Text Box


To align text
To align text,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Place the cursor in the text where you want the alignment change to begin.

3	Click Format [image] Paragraph.

4	Click an alignment option.

5	Type your text, then press Enter to end the indention.

Tips

To indent existing text, place the insertion point at the beginning of the text you want to indent, then click Format [image] Paragraph and select an option.

Related Topics


To choose default directories
To choose default directories,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click Files.

2	Specify the pathname for each category.

Related Topics

About Files Settings


To check grammar
To check grammar,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Click Tools [image] Grammatik.

Tips

If you want more information about using Grammatik, click the Help button on the dialog box.

Related Topics

About Grammatik


To export text
To export text,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Select the text you want to export.

3	Click File [image] Save As.

4	Select a text file format from the File type drop-down list.

5	Specify the drive and folder from the Save in drop-down list.

6	Specify a filename for the text file.

Related Topics


To change series colors
To change series colors,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select a series (a row of data) in the chart.

3	Click [image], select a foreground color, then click [image] to select a background color.

4	Click [image], then select a pattern or gradient for the series.

Tips

You can also double-click the series you want to change, then select series options.

Related Topics


To add more information to organization charts
To add more information to organization charts,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Select the boxes to which you want to add more information.

3	Right-click a box, then click Box Fields.

4	In the Add New Field text box, type the placeholder text for the new information field and click Add after each one.

5	When you are finished adding new fields, click OK.

6	Double-click a box, select the placeholder text, then type the necessary information in the fields.

7	Click outside the chart to close it.

Tips

You can also right-click a box, then click Box Fields.

Related Topics

About Box Fields


To create linear regression trend charts
To create linear regression trend charts,

1	Create a 3-D bar chart with your data.

2	Size the Datasheet so you can see the chart clearly.

3	Select a cell in a blank row where you want the results of the trend to appear.

4	Click Data [image] Formulas.

5	Select Fit Linear from the Function list.

6	In the Rows(s) text box, type the number of the row that contains the data you want to base your forecast on.

7	In the Number to Forecast text box, specify how far ahead you want to forecast, then click OK. For example, if you have plotted data for each financial quarter, type 2 to forecast data two quarters ahead.

8	Add additional labels to the Datasheet for the results row(s) for your forecasting.

9	Add a chart title, legend, and other options, then click outside the chart to close it.

Related Topics


To change series types and shapes
To change series types and shapes,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Series.

3	Click the arrow buttons at the top of the dialog box to select the series you want to change.

4	Click the Type/Axis tab, then click a series type.

5	Select a bar or marker shape if necessary.

Tips

You can also double-click the series you want to change, then select series options.

Related Topics

About Series Properties


To use two y axes in a chart
To use two y axes in a chart,

1	Create or double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Series.

3	Click the arrow buttons in the dialog box to select the series you want to assign to the secondary y axis.

4	Click Secondary (Y2) to attach this series to the secondary y axis.

5	Select a different series type to further distinguish the data on the secondary Y axis from the data on the primary Y axis, then click OK.

6	Click Chart [image] Axis [image] Secondary Y to select the axis options you want for that series.

Tips

You can also double-click a series, then assign it to a Y axis.

Related Topics

About the Axis Menu


To edit bulleted items
To edit bulleted items,

1	Create or double-click a bulleted list.

2	To add new text, place the insertion point at the end of the line above where you want to add it, press Enter, then type the text you want for that bullet.

3	To delete a bulleted item, place the insertion point at the end of the line above where you want to delete a bullet, drag downward to select the bulleted text you want to delete, then press Delete.

4	To delete a bullet for a level, click Format [image] Bulleted List Properties, click the Bullets tab, select a bullet level, then click None from the Bullet Shape drop-down list.

5	To change a bullet's level, place the insertion point at the beginning of the text of the bullet you want to change, then press Tab or Shift+Tab to move the bullet down a level (to the right) or up a level (to the left).

Tips

You can also right-click the bulleted list, then click Bulleted List Properties.

Related Topics

About Bulleted Lists


To use a Background slide
To use a Background slide,

1	Click the Slide Editor tab.

2	Click Background from the layout drop-down list on the Property Bar.

3	Add drawings, charts, bitmaps, Clipart, text areas, and text lines to the background.

Related Topics


To use a Title slide
To use a Title slide,

1	Click the Slide Editor tab.

2	Click [image], then click Insert Title Slide.

3	Double-click the Title placeholder to fill in your own title.

4	Double-click the Subtitle to fill in your own subtitle.

5	Click outside the text areas to close them.

Tips

You can also press Down arrow on the keyboard to move from the title to the subtitle.

Related Topics


To change level justification in bulleted lists
To change level justification in bulleted lists,

1	Create or double-click a bulleted list.

2	Right-click the bulleted list, click Bulleted List Properties, then click the Bullets tab.

3	Select a level, then select the option you want from the Justification drop-down list.

Tips

You can also right-click the bulleted list, then click Bulleted List Properties.

You can make changes to several levels at a time. Drag to select adjacent levels, or hold down the Ctrl key and select the levels you want to change.

To change the justification for all the levels at once, select the bulleted list, then click Format [image] Justification [image] Left, Right, Center, or Auto.

Related Topics

About Bulleted List Properties


To adjust documents for printing
To adjust documents for printing,

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Details tab.

3	Select Adjust image to print black and white to adapt your color drawing or slides for printing in black and white. (Text is converted to a solid black color, and objects are rendered in appropriate shades of gray.)

4	Select Print text as graphics if you want to send your document to the printer without downloading any fonts (all text is printed as a vector object).

5	Click Print.

Tips

You can also right-click a blank area in the drawing window, then click Print.

If you are printing slides, you can deselect Print background in the Details tab to create clean-looking handouts without the slide background. The text and layout are automatically adjusted to print black and white.

About Speaker Notes


To save documents as new files
To save documents as new files,

1	Click File [image] Save As.

2	Select a format from the File type drop-down list if you want to save the document to a format other than a Corel Presentations .shw or .wpg file.

3	Specify the path and filename for the new file.

Related Topics

About Save As


To use a Bulleted List slide
To use a Bulleted List slide,

1	Click the Slide Editor tab.

2	Click [image], then click Insert Bulleted List Slide.

3	Double-click the title and subtitle placeholders to edit them.

4	Double-click the bulleted list placeholder, then type the text for your bullets. Press Enter to insert a new bullet line, press Tab to move text down one level, or press Shift+Tab to move text up one level.

5	Continue adding bullets until your chart is complete, then click outside the chart to close it.

Tips

You can also press Down arrow on the keyboard to move from the title to the subtitle to the bulleted List.

Related Topics

About Bulleted Lists


To save documents as bitmaps
To save documents as bitmaps,

1	Click File [image] Save As.

2	Select a bitmap format from the File type drop-down list, such as BMP, CPT, GIF, JPG, MAC, TGA, or TIFF.

3	Specify a folder and filename in the Name text box, then click OK.

4	Select a pre-defined size, or specify the units of measure and values for the width and height of the image.

5	Select a resolution from the Resolution list, then click a color option.

Tips

Corel Presentations will automatically add the appropriate bitmap file extension, based on the format you selected.

Related Topics


To start a new slide show
To start a new slide show,

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Select Presentations from the Category drop-down list.

3	Click [Presentations Slide Show].

4	Right-click the first slide, click Master Gallery, then select the master you want to use.

5	Select a layout for your first slide from the layouts drop-down list on the Property Bar.

6	Click [image], then click the types of slides you want to insert them from the list.

Tips

Use the masters in the 35mm category if you intend to convert your slide show to 35mm color slides or to color transparencies. The masters in the Business, Color, Design, Nature, or Theme category are best suited for slide show presentations on a color monitor. The masters in the Printout category are recommended if you intend to print handouts of your slides for your audience or if you present your slide show using black and white transparencies.

Related Topics

About New


To use a Text slide
To use a Text slide,

1	Click the Slide Editor tab.

2	Click [image], then click Insert Text Slide.

3	Double-click the title and subtitle placeholders to fill in your own title and subtitle.

4	Double-click the text placeholder, then type your text.

Tips

You can use Shift and Shift+Tab at the start of a paragraph to change the text appearance and indentation.

You can also press Down arrow on the keyboard to move from the title to the subtitle to the text.

Related Topics

About Text Box


Tips for Displaying and Editing Your License Number

Use Edit Serial Number/PIN to record or edit your serial number and PIN (Personal Identification Number). You can enter your serial number when you install Corel Presentations or at a later time.

You need your serial number and PIN when ordering product upgrades and when calling Customer Support.

1	Click Help [image] About Corel Presentations.

2	Click Edit Serial Number/PIN.

3	Type the serial number that is printed on your registration card.

4	Type your PIN.

About Corel Presentations


alignment guides

Lines that you drag from the Ruler to help you align objects.


anchor handles

The handles surrounding a selected object that let you size and shape segments of the object.


Tips for Successful Slide Shows

Establish Your Purpose

How much does your audience already know about the subject? What do they expect or want to know?

What is the audience's education, age, and career orientation?

Do you want to entertain, motivate, sell, or instruct?

Write Your Objectives

Writing objectives can also serve as a way to evaluate your slide show and guide you in determining the content of your slides and speaker notes.

What do you want the audience to learn or be able to do at the conclusion of your slide show?

Start each objective with a noun or action verb and be specific about the results you expect.

Are your objectives realistic and attainable by your audience?

Organize and Create Your Slides Using the Outliner

Start by choosing a slide show master that sets the tone for your presentation. Then create your slides using the Outliner view.

Your slide outline should include the three basic divisions of a presentation:

Opener. Your title or text slide should make a statement about the subject of your slide show and its final objective.

Get the attention of your audience by using a title slide with a thought-provoking question or challenging statement. Then, use a text slide with an anecdote or famous quote to lead in to the main body of your slide show.

Main Body. Present your information, facts, and figures by creating bullet, text, organization, data, or combination chartslides in the Outliner view.

Combine title slides with Clipart images to separate and introduce the main sections of your slide show.

Use the Speaker Notes feature to prepare notes for each slide.

Conclusion. Use bulleted list slides to summarize and reinforce the key points you made during the slide show. A title slide with a Clipart image can serve as the ending slide.

Practice, Review, and Edit Your Slide Show

Is the pacing of your slides and spoken words adequate to hold the attention of your audience?

Do the slide contents relate to your objectives?

Does each slide present one concept? Is the concept clear and direct?

Are the slides in the right order? Use the Slide Sorter view if you need to rearrange them.

Avoid using more than five slide transition types for an entire slide show.

Does the slide show master fit the tone of the slide show?

Where appropriate, use drawings or Clipart images with your slides to add visual impact to text or data.

Check the spelling in the Outliner view using the Spell Checker.

Anticipate questions the audience will ask.

Consider printing handouts for participants using the Audience Notes feature in the Print dialog box.

Present

When the audience arrives, have the opening title or text slide of your slide show displayed on the monitor.

If you have printed Audience Notes, pass them out before you begin the presentation so participants can follow along and take notes during your slide show.

Be enthusiastic, genuine, and understandable.

Keep eye contact with your audience while you speak. Use your speaker notes only occasionally.

Vary the tone of your voice to add interest and maintain audience attention.

Ask for questions from the audience periodically.

Use the Highlighter to emphasize figures in a data chart or to call attention to a particular point in a text chart.

End your slide show on time.

If participants did not receive Audience Notes at the beginning of the slide show, hand out copies of your slides or speaker notes at the end of your presentation.

Evaluate

Evaluating your presentation after it is over can help you refine and improve the objectives, slide content, speech material, and your own effectiveness as a presenter.

Did you accomplish your objectives? How do you know?

What were the audience's thoughts and feelings about the slide show?

What worked well during your slide show? What could be improved?

Related Topics


arc

A segment of an ellipse or circle.


axes

The horizontal (X axis) or vertical (Y axis) lines used as reference points for plotting data charts.

The scale of a chart is like the scale of a map. Instead of indicating that 1 inch = 50 miles, the chart scale indicates that the length of the axis equals a given amount, such as $10,000. The axis is marked much like a ruler--it is broken up into units by marks called tick marks. Next to each tick mark is the amount or value at that point of the axis.


axis label

The value of a tick on an axis.


To create a slide show
To create a slide show,

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Click the Create New tab.

3	Select the Corel Presentations 8 category from the list.

4	Select the type of slide show you want to create or select [Presentations Slide Show], then click Create.

5	Select a master category from the drop-down list, then click the master you want to use.

6	Double-click the Title placeholder text to add a title.

7	Press Down arrow to add subtitle text.

8	Click outside the subtitle box to exit the text area.

9	Click [image], then click the type of slide you want to add.

10	Create your slide by following the directions of the placeholder text.

11	Add Clipart images, bitmaps, and other elements to the slides.

12	Right-click the first slide, then click Transition.

13	Select the transition you want to use for the first slide, then select the next slide from the drop-down list at the bottom of the dialog box.

14	Assign a transition for each slide in your slide show, or select Apply to all slides in the slide show.

15	To save your slide show, click File [image] Save As, type a path and filename for the slide show, then click OK.

16	Click View [image] Play Slide Show, select the play options you want, then click Play to see your slide show.

Tips

The masters in the 35mm category are suitable if you intend to convert your slide show to 35mm color slides or to color transparencies. The masters in the Business, Color, Design, Nature, or Theme category are best suited for slide show presentations on a color monitor. The masters in the Printout category are best if you intend to print handouts of your slides for your audience or if you present your slide show using black and white transparencies. You can, of course, use any master you want for your slide show. The categories, however, simply help you select the most appropriate master for your presentation format.

Related Topics

About PerfectExpert


border

The outer edge of a window or frame that can be moved to enlarge or reduce its size.


cell format

How data appears in the Datasheet. The data can be a number or a date.


center point

The point around which an object is rotated, or the point toward which or away from which an object is sized. Also called a pivot point.


CGM

Computer Graphic Metafile. A standard format for graphics images that can be shared among different applications.


chart

A diagram that contains graphed data, lines of text, organization structures, or a table.


To change text into objects
To change text into objects,

1	Select the text box or text line you want to change into objects.

2	Click Tools [image] Trace Text.

Tips

When you trace text, it becomes a series of objects and cannot be edited as text.

Related Topics

About Trace Text


CMYK

Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black. A system that uses varying amounts of these four basic colors to produce all colors in printed output modeled after the colors that print shops use for color separations. When all colors are at their maximum level, the color produced is black. When all colors are at their minimum level, the color produced is white.


color palette

A set of colors displayed on a rectangular grid. These colors can be used to add color to drawings or slides.


column

A vertical set of cells in a Datasheet designated by consecutive letters of the alphabet.


complement

The opposite of a specific color. Colors that are opposite each other on the color wheel are complementary colors. (Red and green are complementary colors, as are yellow and blue.)


coordinates

The address that identifies a cell in a Datasheet or spreadsheet by its column and row (for example, "A1").


cusp

 A pointed corner where two Bezier segments meet at different angles.


data chart

A chart created with data you enter in the Datasheet. Data charts include table, scatter, high/low, surface, radar, pie, bar, line, and area charts.


data label

A name assigned to a label box that displays the data value above or below the corresponding part of a chart (bar, pie slice, line, and so on).


data series

Each row in the Datasheet is a series. There are three types of data series you can use when you automatically fill in chart data using Fill:

Date series start with the date in the Start Value text box and multiply by the Step number, using the units you specify. For example, if the step value is 3, and the date step is Week, the interval is 3 weeks.

Linear series start with the Start Value and add the Step number to create each new number in the series. For example, if the step value is 3, the difference between each cell in the fill is 3.

Growth series start with the Start Value and multiply by the Step number to create each new number in the series. For example, if the step value is 3, the interval is a multiple of 3:  1, 3, 9, 27....


About Selecting Layouts

Layouts are pre-defined page designs with backgrounds for your slides. When you select a layout, you can concentrate on the content of your slides rather than on their design, color scheme, and background.

Select from any of the layouts from the drop-down list on the Property Bar:

Title Use a title slide to introduce your subject or to serve as a divider between subjects in your slide show.

Bulleted List Use a bulleted list slide to effectively summarize and reinforce major points in a slide show.

Text Use a text slide when you want to add long sentences or full paragraphs to your slide show.

Organization Chart Use an organization chart slide to show the structure of positions and span of control in a business, department, agency, group, division, or office.

Data Chart Use a data chart slide to visually depict percentages, trends, market shares, and relationships.

Combination Use a combination slide to display bulleted text next to a data chart.

Related Topics

About Slide Properties


To save a new slide show
To save a new slide show,

1	Click File [image] Save.

2	Specify the path and filename for the slide show.

3	Select Presentations Slide Show 7/8 from the File type drop-down list.

Related Topics

About Save


double-y axes chart

A chart with one X axis and two Y axes. Useful when you want to compare two items; for example, sales for a particular region during two different sales periods.


DPI

Acronym for dots (pixels) per inch. Determines the clarity of a graphics image on the monitor or when printed. The greater the dots per inch, the more detail is visible.


drawing window

The window in which you create slides in a slide show or drawings. When Corel Presentations starts, a new drawing window opens inside the application window. You can open as many as nine drawing windows inside the application window.


To import slide shows created in other applications
To import slide shows created in other applications,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Select the slide show file you want to import, then click OK.

3	Edit the slide show as you would any other slide show in Corel Presentations.

4	Click File [image] Save As.

5	Type a path and filename for the imported file, then click OK.

Tips

The file is saved with a .shw extension (the Corel Presentations slide show format).

Related Topics


To create arcs and wedges
To create arcs and wedges,

1	Double-click a circle or ellipse.

2	Keep the pointer inside the circle or ellipse while dragging the editing handle to create a wedge.

3	Keep the pointer outside the circle or ellipse while dragging the editing handle to create an arc.

Tips

This:  is an arc.

This:  is a wedge.

Related Topics


fill

A color, pattern, gradient, texture, or picture you can add to a closed object or data chart series.


To move slides to other slide shows
To move slides to other slide shows,

1	Open the slide shows you will be moving slides to and from.

2	Click the Slide Sorter tab.

3	Repeat step 2 for each slide show you have opened.

4	Click Window [image] Tile Side by Side.

5	Select the slide(s) you want to move.

6	Drag the slide(s) drop them into the other slide show.

Tips

To drag a range of consecutive slides, click the first slide, then hold down Shift and click the last slide in the range.

To drag multiple slides that are not consecutive, click the first slide, then hold down Ctrl while you click the rest of the slides you want to move.

Related Topics

About Slide Sorter


gallery

A dialog box that displays small sketches of slide show masters so you can view them together and select the one you want to use. Slide show masters are divided into several categories: 35mm, Business, Color, Design, Nature, Theme, and Printout.


To export files to different formats
To export files to different formats,

1	Create or retrieve the file to export.

2	Click outside the objects to deselect them.

3	Click File [image] Save As.

4	Select the format for the file from the File type drop-down list.

5	Specify a folder and filename. Corel Presentations automatically adds the extension assigned to the format you chose.

6	Click OK to save the file in the new format.

7	If you chose a bitmap format (BMP, JPEG, etc.), specify size and format options.

Tips

Select all bitmap objects, then click Tools [image] Trace Bitmap to convert them into vector objects before you export to a vector format.

Related Topics


HLS

Hue, Lightness, and Saturation which define colors in the context of a computer monitor. Changing any of these affects the intensity of the color or changes the hue entirely. You can think of the three settings as the hue, brightness, and contrast adjustments on your television. Hue adjusts the color tint (0=red, 120=green, 240=blue, 360=red), Luminosity adjusts the amount of white and black, and Saturation adjusts the amount of color.


To import graphics files as images
To import graphics files as images,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File.

2	Specify the path and filename of the graphic file you want to import, then click Insert.

3	Edit the graphic if necessary.

4	To save the graphic as a .wpg, click File [image] Save As, select WordPerfect 7 Graphics, WordPerfect 6.0 Graphics, or WordPerfect 5.1 Graphics from the File type drop-down list, specify a path and filename, then click Save.

Tips

You can also click Insert [image] File, then specify the name of the graphic you want to insert.

Related Topics

About Clipart


To use an Org Chart slide
To use an Org Chart slide,

1	Click the Slide Editor tab.

2	Click [image], then click Insert Org Chart Slide.

3	Double-click the title and subtitle text areas to edit them.

4	Double-click the chart area.

5	Double-click the placeholder text in each box, then type your own information.

6	Use the Subordinates, Coworkers, Staff, and Manager options on the Insert pull-down menu to complete your organization chart.

7	Click outside the organization chart when you are finished adding your information.

Tips

As you fill in the organization chart, you can right-click it to use the editing options from the QuickMenu.

You can save time moving from one text field to another by pressing Tab or Shift+Tab inside a box.

Related Topics

About Organization Chart


To use a Data Chart slide
To use a Data Chart slide,

1	Click the Slide Editor tab.

2	Click Slide [image] Add Slides, select Data Chart from the Template list, then click OK.

3	Double-click the title and subtitle text areas to edit them.

4	Double-click the data chart area, then select a chart type.

5	Deselect Use sample data, then click OK.

6	Type the name for each row of data in the Legend column, then type the labels for the X axis in the Labels row, starting with column A.

7	Type your data in the appropriate cells.

8	Click outside the chart to close it.

Related Topics

About Data Chart Gallery


To use a Combination slide
To use a Combination slide,

1	Click the Slide Editor tab.

2	Click [image], then click Insert Combination Slide.

.	3	Double-click the title and subtitle placeholders to fill in your own title and subtitle.

4	Double-click the bulleted list text area on the left side of the slide, type the text for the first bullet, then continue adding text for subsequent bullets until the text portion of your chart is complete.

5	Double-click the data chart area, select a chart type, then add your data to the chart.

6	Click outside of the chart when you are finished adding data.

Tips

You can deselect Use Sample Data if you do not want to use the sample data as a guide for entering your own data in the Datasheet.

You can also press Down arrow on the keyboard to move from the title to the subtitle to the bulleted list.

Related Topics


To create a master
To create a master,

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Select Corel Presentations 8 from the Category drop-down list, then click [Presentations Slide Show].

3	Click File [image] Save As.

4	Open or create a Masters folder (such as 35mm, Color, or Printout) where you want to save the new master.

5	Select Presentations Master 7/8 from the File type list, type a filename for the new master, then click Save.

6	Click Edit [image] Background Layer.

7	Click Edit [image] Clear [image] Master [image] OK.

8	Right-click the drawing window, then click Page Setup.

9	Click the Page Color tab, select the page color options you want to use, then click OK.

10	Add any text, images, or other objects that you want to display as part of the background on the slides.

11	Click Insert [image] New Background, type a new background name, then click OK to add more backgrounds.

12	When you are finished adding backgrounds, click Edit [image] Layout Layer

13	Click Edit [image] Clear.

14	Click Edit [image] Rename Layout, type a name for the first layout, then click OK.

15	Click [image], [image], [image], or [image], then click in the window to add a data chart, organization chart, image, text, title, subtitle, or bulleted list area to your layout.

16	Create each basic element of the layout. For example, you can assign a font, style, size, and color to text areas; modify a data chart's layout, appearance, and size; or drag elements to a new position.

17	Click Layouts [image] Assign Background, then select the background you want to use with the layout you just created from the Available backgrounds list.

18	Click Insert [image] New Layout, type a new layout name, then click OK to add more layouts.

19	When you have finished adding layouts to the new master, click File [image] Save As, then  double-click your master (.MST) filename.

Tips

The first layout in the list becomes the sample template that automatically appears in the Master Gallery. You may, therefore, want to first create a "Title of Show" layout similar to those seen in the Master Gallery, then create your remaining layouts.

To use your new master, just create or open a slide show, go to the Master Gallery, then select your master from the appropriate category.

Related Topics

About Master Gallery


master

A slide show master consists of a set of layouts and backgrounds. A layout is a slide with predefined styles, settings, and placeholders for elements such as titles, subtitles, bulleted lists, text, data charts, and organization charts. Each layout has a page format and color scheme that is consistent with the other layouts and backgrounds that are part of the same slide show master. Backgrounds may include a border, a gradient background, related images, and so on.


pixel

Short for picture element. A pixel is the smallest dot that can be represented on a screen or in a paint (bitmap) graphic.


range

A rectangular region in a spreadsheet file defined by the cell in the upper-left corner and the cell in the lower-right corner, sometimes with a specific range name. When you specify a range to import into a chart, the cell coordinates for the upper-left cell and the lower-right cell should be separated by a colon. Use the assigned row numbers and column letters. For example, A:C includes cells in columns A, B, and C.


RGB

Red, Green, or Blue. Uses the primary colors of light to define colors. When each color is at its maximum intensity, the color defined is white. RGB is commonly used for on-screen slide shows.


row

A horizontal set of cells in a Datasheet designated by consecutive numbers.


shortcut keys

A series of keys that perform a specific action; sometimes called accelerator keys, hotkeys, or keystrokes. Shortcut keys are used in place of a mouse.

Use shortcut keys to access the most commonly used features from the keyboard. For example, type Ctrl+B to type bold text.

Some shortcut keys are shown on the pull-down menus next to various menu commands. You can modify existing shortcut keys or create new ones using the Keyboard Editor.


slide show

A slide show is a series of drawing windows containing communication tools such as data charts, organization charts, bitmaps, text, and drawings presented in a slide format. You can add QuickLinks, animation, transitions, sound, and speaker notes to each slide, as well as elements like titles, subtitles, bulleted lists, bitmaps, data charts, Clipart, organization charts, and text.


startup options

Commands you can set to be executed when you start Corel Presentations. These commands are in two categories:  some are for your convenience and others are necessary for certain hardware setups.

You can find more information about Corel Presentations' startup options on the Documentation home page.


template

A pre-designed page layout you can use to make different slides look consistent with each other and to automatically format each slide.


thumbnail sketch

A miniature version of a slide, chart, Clipart image, or master. The Master Gallery, the Scrapbook, and the Slide Sorter use thumbnail sketches to let you view several masters, Clipart images, or slides at once.


tick

A small line perpendicular to the X axis or Y axis used in data charts to mark off amounts such as dollars, distances, or numbers of objects. Ticks are grouped as either major or minor. Major tick marks usually have labels, while minor marks fall between the labels. For example, on a ruler the inch marks would be major tick marks and the fraction marks would be minor tick marks. Tick marks on an axis are one-half the font height you specify for the label of that axis.


vector image

A vector is a line segment or curve created with a mathematic equation. A vector image is an image created through a series of vector lines. A vector image is treated as a whole object and cannot be broken down into individual elements (such as a portion of a circle). All Corel Presentations images (except for bitmaps) are vector images.


Datasheet

The matrix of rows and columns that is the basic working element for creating data charts. Data you type in the Datasheet appears in the data chart you are creating or editing.


x axis

The horizontal line of a vertical data chart. If you are using a horizontal chart, the X axis is a vertical line.


y axis

The vertical line of a vertical data chart. If you are using a horizontal chart, the Y axis is a horizontal line. It is possible to have more than one Y axis in a chart.


primary and secondary Y axes

The left and right vertical axes in a double-Y data chart. The primary Y is the left vertical axis, and the secondary Y is the right vertical axis. The secondary axis lets you chart one or more components on a different scale from the other components. For example, if you use a bar chart on the primary Y axis to show the income of individual regions over a period of time, you could use a line chart on the secondary Y axis to show the total income for all regions during that period. You would use the secondary Y because the scale could be as much as four times larger than the primary Y scale.


To display shortcut keys on menus
To display shortcut keys on menus,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then double-click Display.

2	Select Shortcut keys.

Related Topics

About Display Settings


To access menus using the keyboard
To access menus using the keyboard,

1	Hold down the Alt key and type the mnemonic (underlined letter) for the menu you want to open.

2	Use the arrow keys to move from menu to menu and option to option, then press Enter to choose a highlighted option.

Tips

For example, type Alt+E to open the Edit menu.

Related Topics


To choose options on a dialog box using the keyboard
To choose options on a dialog box using the keyboard,

1	Press Alt and type the mnemonic (underlined letter) for the option you want.

2	Use the Tab key to move from option to option.

3	Press the arrow keys to select radio buttons.

4	Press the Spacebar to select and unselect radio buttons and check boxes.

5	Tab to text boxes to select them, then type information into them.

6	Tab to pop-up lists to select them, then press the Spacebar to open them.

7	Tab to buttons to select them, then press Enter to activate them.

Related Topics


To draw objects using the keyboard
To draw objects using the keyboard,

1	Press Alt+I to select the Insert menu, type P to display the Shape menu, then type the underlined letter for the tool you want to use.

2	Position the pointer where you want the object to begin using the arrow keys on the keyboard.

3	Press the Spacebar to place the first handle.

4	Hold down the Spacebar and use the arrow keys to draw the object.

5	Release the Spacebar to place another handle, then press it again to continue drawing with the arrow keys.

6	Press Enter to stop drawing.

Tips

Releasing the Spacebar while drawing objects with only one handle (squares, circles, and so on) finishes the object.

Related Topics


To assign a QuickKey
To assign a QuickKey,

1	Right-click a slide, then click QuickKeys.

2	Click the key you want to use as a QuickKey from the Keystrokes list.

3	Click Go to to move to another slide when you press the key; or click Action to play a sound, launch another application, open a browser, and so on.

Tips

Select Apply to all slides in slide show to use this QuickKey in all your slides.

Related Topics

About QuickKeys


To edit a QuickKey
To edit a QuickKey,

1	Right-click a slide, then click QuickKeys.

2	Select the keystroke you want to change from the Keystrokes list.

3	Select a new keystroke or a new event or action, then click OK.

Tips

To remove a QuickKey, select a keystroke from the list, then click Unassigned.

Related Topics

About QuickKeys


To add a slide to the current slide show
To add a slide to the current slide show,

1	Click Insert [image] New Slide.

2	Specify the number of new slides you want to add.

3	Select the layout you want to use for the new slide(s).

Tips

You can also add slides in the Slide Outliner by placing the insertion point at the end of a line and pressing Ctrl+Enter.

To add a new slide with a particular layout, click [image], then click the type of slide you want to insert.

Related Topics

About New Slide


To delete slides
To delete slides,

1	Select the slide you want to delete from the list of slides in the lower right of the application window.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete Slide(s).

3	Click Yes to delete the selected slide.

Tips

You can also select one or more slides in the Slide Sorter, then press Delete.

Related Topics

About Delete Slide(s)


To create a portable slide show
To create a portable slide show,

1	Open the slide show you want to play on a different computer.

2	Click File [image] Show on the Go.

3	Click Change to specify the name, destination, system, and display type.

4	Specify the path where you want the slide show files copied (for example, a:), then click Next.

5	Click On Windows 95/NT to create a runtime slide show that will play under the Windows 95 and Windows NT operating systems, or click On Windows 3.x and Windows 95/NT to create a runtime slide show that will play under either the Windows 3.x or the Windows 95/NT operating systems, then click Next.

6	Click Any Windows display to display your slide show at 640x480 pixels with 256 colors, or click Windows displays matching current setup to use the screen size and resolution settings your computer is currently using to play the portable slide show, then click Finish.

7	Click Create to build the portable slide show file in the location you specified.

Tips

Portable slide shows that play with Windows 3.x as well as Windows 95 and Windows NT do not support animation or QuickLinks, but do support cascading bullets.

Runtime shows compatible with Windows 3.x cannot span disks and are not self-executing. A .PQW version of the slide show is created and associated with SHOW30.EXE and any OLE files.

Runtime shows created as e-mail attachments are mailed at the end of the creation process and then deleted from your computer. To keep a version of the Runtime show, create it on a local or network drive, then send it as an attachment.

Choosing Any Windows display uses a standard display setting that is compatible with most monitor and computer settings. If you choose Windows displays matching current setup, the computer you use to play your show must also have the same settings, or your slide show may have display problems.

Related Topics

About Show on the Go


To play a portable slide show
To play a portable slide show,

1	In Windows 95 or Windows NT, click Start [image] Run, then go to the drive and folder containing the Runtime show.

2	Specify the executable file (.EXE) of the show you want to play, then click OK.

3	To stop the slide show, press Esc.

Tips

In Windows 3.x, instead of step 1, click File [image] Run, go to the drive and folder containing the portable slide show, select show31.exe, then click OK. When prompted, specify the show file (.SHW), then click OK.

Under Windows 3.x, all transitions are Normal, QuickLinks are not supported, and OLE objects are displayed but are not functional.

Related Topics

About Show on the Go


To use the master gallery
To use the master gallery,

1	Right-click a slide, then click Master Gallery.

2	Select a category from the Category list.

3	Click the master you want to use.

4	Click OK to apply it to your current slide show.

Tips

Select Save As Default to save the currently selected master as the default for all new slide shows.

Click Browse to select a master you have previously created and stored in another folder.

Related Topics

About Master Gallery


To import slide show masters
To import slide show masters,

1	Right-click a slide, then click Master Gallery.

2	Click Browse.

3	Select the master (.mst) file you want to use.

4	Click Insert.

Tips

You can display other masters in the Master Gallery by moving them to folders inside the Masters folder.

Related Topics


To create speaker notes
To create speaker notes,

1	Right-click a slide, then click Speaker Notes.

2	Select the slide you want to create notes for using the arrow buttons in the dialog box.

3	Type a note for the slide.

4	Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed, then click OK

5	Click File [image] Print, then click Speaker notes from the Print list.

6	Select the options you want to use, then click Print.

Tips

You may find it helpful to include reminders about any QuickKeys or QuickLinks you have included on a slide.

When you print speaker notes, half of each page is devoted to slide thumbnails, the other half to speaker notes. To increase the font size of the notes, reduce the number of slides on each page.

To print a handout of the slide show with ruled lines, use audience notes. Like speaker notes, half of each page is devoted to slides. The other half is for lines where the audience can write notes.

Related Topics

About Speaker Notes


To animate an image
To animate an image,

1	Right-click an image, then click Object Animation.

2	Click the type of animation you want to use.

3	Select an animation effect, and click a direction and speed if needed.

Tips

If there are two or more animated objects on the slide, you can specify the order they appear in by choosing a number in the Object display sequence drop-down list.

Bulleted lists usually display before animated images on a slide. To specify which animated objects should occur first, right-click the slide, click Display Sequence, then choose the options you want to use.

Time delays also apply to animated images. For example, if you set a two-second time delay for the slide, the first animated object automatically appears two seconds after the transition finishes, the next animated object follows two seconds later, and so on until two seconds after the last animated object displays and the show advances to the next slide.

Related Topics

About Animating Objects


To display the next slide or object automatically
To display the next slide or object automatically,

1	Right-click the slide, then click Display Sequence.

2	Select the slide you want to display automatically from the drop-down list at the bottom of the dialog box.

3	Select After a delay of, then specify the number of seconds you want the slide and each animated object to display before going to the next slide.

Tips

Time delays also apply to animated images. For example, if you set a two-second time delay for the slide, the first animated object automatically appears two seconds after the transition finishes, the next animated object follows two seconds later, and so on until two seconds after the last animated object displays and the show advances to the next slide.

Time delay begins the second the slide first appears on the screen.

To use the same time delay for all slides in the show, select Apply to all slides in the slide show.

Related Topics

About Display Sequence


To add a transition to a range of consecutive slides
To add a transition to a range of consecutive slides,

1	Click the Slide Sorter tab.

2	Click the first slide in the range, then hold down Shift and click the last slide in the range.

3	Right-click a slide, then click Transition.

4	Select a transition type, then click a direction and the speed if needed.

Tips

You can also add transitions to multiple slides that are not consecutive. Click the first slide, then hold down Ctrl while you click each slide you want to include.

Related Topics

About Slide Transitions


To play a slide show
To play a slide show,

1	Create or retrieve a slide show.

2	Click View [image] Play Slide Show.

3	Select the slide you want to begin the show with from the Beginning slide drop-down list.

4	Select Repeat slide show to let your slide show run continuously.

5	Click Play to run your slide show.

Tips

While you play the slide show, press the Spacebar, Right arrow, or Down arrow keys to move to the next slide. To go back one slide, press the Left arrow or Up arrow keys. If you set your slide show to advance after a time delay, you do not need to manually advance each slide.

You can press Esc anytime during playback to exit your slide show and return to the last view you were in.

If you have used Custom Audiences to create more than one version of the slide show for different audiences, select which version of the show you want to play from the Audience drop-down list.

Related Topics

About Play Slide Show


To speed up slide show display
To speed up slide show display,

1	Click View [image] Play Slide Show.

2	Click Create QuickShow, then click OK.

3	Select Use QuickShow, then click Play to play the QuickShow.

Tips

Create QuickShow saves the entire slide show as bitmaps for quicker display. Slides from a QuickShow file appear on the screen with no delay time, but the files use far more memory than regular slide show files. If you change any part of the slide show, you will have to re-create the QuickShow file.

Related Topics

About Play Slide Show


To highlight during slide shows
To highlight during slide shows,

1	Create or open the slide show you want to play.

2	Click View [image] Play Slide Show.

3	Select a color and width for the Highlighter.

4	Click Play.

5	As the slide show plays, drag the mouse to highlight areas of each slide.

Tips

To erase highlighting on the current slide, press Ctrl+E.

Highlighting is automatically erased when the slide show advances to the next slide.

Related Topics

About Highlighting


To add a Wave or MIDI sound clip
To add a Wave or MIDI sound clip,

1	Right-click the slide you want to add a sound clip to, then click Sound.

2	Specify the Wave or MIDI sound clip you want to attach to this slide.

3	Select Save within slide show document to incorporate the sound into your slide show. This is useful if you plan on creating a portable slide show.

4	Select Loop sound if you want the sound to play continuously through the slide show, or until another sound begins. You can also click a keystroke to stop it.

5	To listen to the sound clip, click Play Sound. Adjust the volume by dragging the control toward Soft or Loud.

Tips

The volume of the sound clip depends on both the loudness setting you choose in the dialog box and on your sound card. If the clip is not playing at the right volume, try using the Windows 95 Volume Control dialog box to adjust the volume.

Wave and MIDI sound clips start at the beginning and play to the end, or until the next slide is displayed, or you stop them manually.

To add a sound clip to another slide, select that slide from the drop-down list at the bottom of the dialog box.

Related Topics

About Sound


To record a Wave sound
To record a Wave sound,

1	Right-click a slide, then click Sound.

2	Select the slide you want to add your voice or narration to from the drop-down list at the bottom of the dialog box.

3	Click Record.

4	Click Record (the button with the red dot on it), then speak, sing, or play into the computer's microphone.

5	Click Stop when you finish recording.

6	Click File [image] Save As in the Sound-Sound Recorder dialog box to save the recording.

7	Specify the folder and filename, then click Save.

8	Click File [image] Exit in the Sound-Sound Recorder dialog box.

9	Specify the folder and filename of the Wave sound you just recorded in the Wave text box.

10	Click Play to hear the Wave sound clip, then click Stop when you are finished.

11	Drag the Wave sound control button to adjust the playback volume.

Tips

You can hear the newly recorded sound when you play the slide show.

Related Topics

About Sound


To add a sound clip from a CD track
To add a sound clip from a CD track,

1	Right-click the slide, then click Sound.

2	Click

3	Type a description of the sound clip, then press Tab.

4	Specify the track number of the CD you want to use.

5	To begin the clip at the beginning of the track and play it to the end, select From beginning and To end.

6	To begin and end the clip somewhere else in the track, deselect From beginning, click Play, click Mark in the Start location area when you want the clip to begin. Deselect To end, then click Mark in the End location area when you want it to end.

7	To listen to the clip, click Play.

8	To discard the track settings, click Reset.

9	To fine-tune the starting and ending points, adjust the Minutes, Seconds, and Frames settings. A frame is 1/74th of a second.

10	Click OK.

11	To repeat the clip in the slide show until the next slide is displayed, or until you  stop it manually, select Loop sound.

12	To change the volume, drag the control toward Soft or Loud.

Tips

If you want to assign a clip to several slides, select the slides in the Slide Outliner, then right-click and click Sound.

CD sound clip settings are saved as part of the slide show, not as a separate sound file.

To add a sound clip to another slide, select the next slide from the drop-down list at the bottom of the dialog box.

Related Topics

About Sound


To create slide titles
To create slide titles,

1	Click the Slide Outliner tab.

2	Click the line for the slide you want to add a title to.

3	Type a title for the slide.

4	Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have given each slide a title.

5	Click the Slide Editor tab to return to the Slide Editor.

Tips

While in the Slide Editor view, you can edit an existing title or subtitle in a slide by double-clicking the text area.

Titles you type in the Slide Outliner appear in the Title placeholder on the layout of the slide. If you are not using a layout on a slide, you can also use a text line as a title for the slide.

Related Topics


To select a layout for a slide
To select a layout for a slide,

1	Right-click the slide, then click Appearance.

2	Select the slide you want to apply a layout to from the drop-down list at the bottom right of the dialog box.

3	Click the layout you want to use.

4	Click the background you want to use with the layout.

Tips

You can also select a template from the layout drop-down list on the Property Bar.

Related Topics


To add layouts to the current slide show
To add layouts to the current slide show,

1	Click Edit [image] Layout Layer.

2	Click Insert [image] New Layout.

3	Type a name for the new layout, then click OK.

4	Create your layout by adding text, drawn objects, bitmaps, a data chart, an organization chart, and whatever other elements you want.

5	Click Edit [image] Slide Layer to return to your slide show.

Tips

The new background appears in this slide show only, not in other slide shows using this master.

The layout name can be up to 15 characters long and can include spaces and numbers.

To use the new layout after you return to the Slide Layer, select it from the layout drop-down list on the Property Bar.

Related Topics

About the Layout Layer


To assign backgrounds to layouts in the current slide show
To assign backgrounds to layouts in the current slide show,

1	Click Edit [image] Layout Layer.

2	Click Format [image] Assign Background.

3	Select a layout in the list box.

4	Select a new background for the layout from the Available backgrounds drop-down list.

5	Repeat steps 3 and 4 to assign other backgrounds to selected layouts, or click OK.

6	Click Edit [image] Slide Layer to return to your slide show.

Tips

The new layout and background combination appears in this slide show only, not in other slide shows using this master.

Related Topics

About the Background Layer


To rename layouts in the current slide show
To rename layouts in the current slide show,

1	Click Edit [image] Layout Layer.

2	Click Edit [image] Rename Layout.

3	Select the layout you want to rename using the arrow buttons in the dialog box.

4	Type a new name for the layout, then click OK.

5	Click Edit  [image] Slide Layer to return to your slide show.

Tips

The new layout name appears in this slide show only, not in other slide shows using this master.

The layout name can be up to 15 characters long and can include spaces and numbers.

Related Topics

About the Layout Layer


To use text boxes and text lines
To use text boxes and text lines,

1	Click [image] or [image] on the toolbar.

2	Drag the area to the width you want, or click once to start a line.

3	Type or retrieve your text.

4	Click outside of the text box or text line, or select another tool, to close it.

Related Topics

About Text Box


To retrieve text files
To retrieve text files,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Click Insert [image] File.

3	Specify the path and filename of the text file to retrieve.

Tips

You can retrieve a macro file into a text box to edit it. Corel Presentations comes with a macro named MACEDIT.WCM that can help you edit macros.

Related Topics


To date documents
To date documents,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Click Insert [image] Date/Time.

3	Click the date format you want to use.

Tips

To place the current date/time as a code in a text line or text box, select Keep the inserted date current. This option inserts the date as a code that is updated to the current date and time each time you retrieve or print the file. Because the date is a code, you cannot edit it as text.

To insert the current date/time in a text line or text box as characters you can edit and apply attributes to, click the date format you want to use, then click Insert.

Related Topics

About the Date/Time Menu


To create a custom date format
To create a custom date format,

1	Click Insert [image] Date/Time [image] New Format.

2	Build the date format by inserting the date and time codes and typing text and punctuation in the Edit date/time text box.

Tips

The date format you create appears in the Date/time sample field.

Related Topics

About Date/Time Format


To adjust text kerning
To adjust text kerning,

1	Click Format [image] Manual Kerning.

2	Specify how much you want to expand or compress the spaces between letters.

3	Create and/or select the text in a text box, text line, or Slide Outliner.

4	Press Ctrl+ or Ctrl- to expand or compress the letterspacing, respectively.

Related Topics

About Manual Kerning


To justify text
To justify text,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Place the insertion point where you want the justification to begin.

3	Click Format [image] Justification [image] Left, Right, or Center.

4	Type the text.

Tips

To justify existing text, place your insertion point in the text box or text line you want to justify, then click Format [image] Justification [image] Left, Right, or Center. You can use only one justification in each text box or text line.

You can also right-click the text and click a Justification option.

Related Topics

About the Justification Menu


To choose fonts
To choose fonts,

1	Right-click the text, then click Font.

2	Select a font face, font style, and font size.

3	Select an appearance option.

4	Select a relative size option.

5	To select fill options, click the Fill Attributes tab.

6	To select the width, style, and color of the outlines around your letters, click the Outline tab.

Tips

If you are creating a drawing, you can select Use as default in the Font tab to use the current font and size for all new text in your drawing. (This option is not available when you create a slide show.

Click [image] or [image] to increase or decrease the point size of the selected text, respectively.

Select a font combination from the QuickFonts list on the Property Bar to re-use a font.

Related Topics

About Font Properties


To center a text line
To center a text line,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Place the insertion point where you want the centered text to begin.

3	Click Format [image] Line [image] Center.

4	Type your centered text. Press Enter at the end of the centered line to finish it and begin a new line.

Tips

To center existing text, place the insertion point in the text you want to move to the middle, then click Format [image] Line [image] Center.

Click Format [image] Justification [image] Center to center more than one line in a text box.

Related Topics

About Center


To right-justify a line of text
To right-justify a line of text,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Place the insertion point where you begin right alignment.

3	Click Format [image] Line [image] Flush Right.

4	Type your text, then press Enter at the end of the line to finish the flush right alignment and begin a new line.

Tips

To right-justify existing text, place the insertion point to the left of the text you want to align, then click Format [image] Line [image] Flush Right.

Click Format [image] Justification [image] Right to right-justify more than one line in a text box.

Related Topics

About Flush Right


To indent text
To indent text,

1	Create or double-click a text box.

2	Move the insertion point to the beginning of the line of text.

3	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Indent, Hanging Indent, or Double Indent.

4	Type your text, then press Enter to end the paragraph.

Tips

You can also indent existing text by placing the cursor where you want the indenting to begin, then following step 3.

Related Topics


To release margins
To release margins,

1	Create or double-click a text box.

2	Place the insertion point where you want the margin to move one tab stop to the left.

3	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Back Tab.

Tips

You can also use Back Tab like Shift+Tab to move text up one level in a bulleted list.

Related Topics

About Back Tab


To find and replace text
To find and replace text,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace.

3	Type the word or phrase you want to search for.

4	Type the replacement word or phrase.

5	Select a search direction.

6	Click Find Next.

7	Click a find or replace option for each instance of the search text.

8	Click Close when the search is completed.

Tips

Find and Replace is case-sensitive and finds the search text wherever it appears.

Press the Spacebar before and after the word you are searching for to avoid finding the letters you have typed within other words (such as "the" appearing in "these," "therefore," and "other").

Related Topics

About Find and Replace


To spell-check text
To spell-check text,

1	Create or double-click the text box or text line you want to check.

2	Click Tools [image] Spell Check.

3	When the spell-check is done, click Yes to close the Spell Checker.

Tips

If you want more information about using the Spell Checker, click the Help button on the Writing Tools dialog box.

Related Topics

About Spell Checker


To display or hide a bar or palette
To display or hide a bar or palette,

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Select the bars or palette you want to display or hide.

Tips

You can also right-click the far-right area of the Application Bar, click Toolbars, then select the bars you want to display or hide.

About Toolbars


Tips for Creating Data Charts

You can create nine different types of data charts, or combine them into mixed charts. Each chart type contains certain features and benefits that can visually enhance the display of your data.

The following suggestions can help you create effective data charts with X and Y axes:

The chart title should appear at the top and focus on one main topic.

Limit the number of items to 6 or less; if you must have more items, break up the data into separate charts.

Use the same font throughout a chart.

Use a legend for clarity.

Position data labels inside the bars to show their value.

Click these terms for a brief explanation of each type of chart and when to use it (click the Back button in the Help window to return to the list):

Area Chart

Bar Chart

Bubble Chart

High/Low Chart

Line Chart

Pie Chart

Radar Chart

Scatter Chart

Surface Chart

Table

Related Topics

About Data Chart Gallery


To use a crosshair pointer
To use a crosshair pointer,

1	Click View [image] Crosshair.

Tips

To return to a normal pointer, click View [image] Crosshair again.

Related Topics

About Crosshair


To display in Draft view
To display in Draft view,

1	Click View [image] Draft.

Tips

To return to normal display, click View [image] Draft again.

You can use Draft to view the location of an object that is situated behind another object, or to view the location of a transparent object on a slide (such as a transparent QuickLink) or drawing.

Related Topics

About Draft


To edit slides
To edit slides,

1	Retrieve an existing slide show, or create a new one.

2	Click the Slide Editor tab.

3	Select the slide you want to edit from the drop-down list at the lower right of the application window.

4	If you are using a layout, double-click the placeholders to insert your own titles, subtitles, bulleted lists, text, data charts, and organization charts.

Tips

You can also click Edit [image] Go To List to open the slide list.

Related Topics

About Slide Editor


To outline a slide show
To outline a slide show,

1	Click File [image] New, click the Create new tab, select Presentations from the Category drop-down list, then click the project you want to work on.

2	Click Format [image] Master Gallery, select a slide show category from the Category list, select a slide show master, then click OK.

3	Click the Slide Outliner tab.

4	Type a slide title, then press Enter.

5	Press Tab or Shift+Tab to change the outline level, if necessary.

6	Type the text you want, then press Ctrl+Enter to create a new slide.

7	Select a layout for the new slide from the layout list on the Property Bar.

8	Repeat steps 4 through 7 until you have created all the slides in the slide show.

Tips

To add several slides at once, you can click Insert [image] New Slide, then specify the number and type of slides you want to add.

Click the Slide Editor tab to add images to a slide, edit text or data, or to view how the slide looks.

You can send your slide show outline to a Corel WordPerfect outline for greater document manipulation. Click File [image] Send To [image] Corel WordPerfect, then click Outline.

Related Topics

About Slide Outliner


To display detailed information about each slide
To display detailed information about each slide,

1	Click the Slide Sorter tab.

2	Click the Slide Editor tab to return to the Slide Editor.

Tips

The icons under each slide give you information about the layout, sound, advance options, speaker notes, and QuickKeys for each slide. The transition for each slide appears beside the slide number.

Related Topics

About Slide Sorter


To sort slides
To sort slides,

1	Click the Slide Sorter tab.

2	Drag a slide you want to move to a new position.

3	Click the Slide Editor tab return to the Slide Editor.

Tips

When you drag a slide, the vertical red bar indicates the position the slide will take when you release the mouse button. Corel Presentations renumbers each slide.

To select a range of consecutive slides, click the first slide in the range, then hold down Shift and click the last slide in the range. Drag the slides to a new position.

To select multiple slides that are not consecutive, click the first slide, then hold down Ctrl while you click the rest of the slides. Drag the slides to a new position.

Related Topics

About Slide Sorter


To reveal codes in the current line of text
To reveal codes in the current line of text,

1	Create or double-click a text box or a text line.

2	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

Tips

The codes appear in the far-right area of the Application Bar.

Click View [image] Reveal Codes again to turn it off.

Related Topics

About Reveal Codes


To display or hide the Ruler
To display or hide the Ruler,

1	Click View [image] Ruler.

Tips

You can also right-click the far-right area of the Application Bar, then click Display Ruler.

Related Topics

About Ruler


To display or hide the grid/guides
To display or hide the grid/guides,

1	Click View [image] Grid/Guides/Snap [image] Display Grid or Display Guides.

Tips

You can also right-click the Ruler, then click Display Grid or Display Guides.

Related Topics

About Grid/Guides


To choose grid, guide, and snap options
To choose grid, guide, and snap options,

1	Click View [image] Grid/Guides/Snap [image] Grid/Guides/Snap Options.

2	Select Display grid to display the grid.

3	Select Snap to grid to force objects to align with the grid and alignment guides.

4	Specify how much space to leave between grid lines in the Horizontal spacing and Vertical spacing text boxes. For example, specify .5 (1.25 cm) in both the Horizontal spacing and Vertical spacing text boxes to space the dots every .5 (1.25 cm.) both horizontally and vertically.

5	Specify the interval between grid lines displayed on the screen. For example, specify 2 if you want every second grid line to display.

6	Specify a snap zone value to define how far objects can be from the alignment guides before they automatically snap to the guides.

Tips

You can keep your grid settings to use in all your drawings and slides by clicking Save as defaults. You can also return any changes to the original settings by clicking Load defaults.

Related Topics

About Grid/Guide/Snap Options


To use alignment guides
To use alignment guides,

1	Click View [image] Ruler if the Ruler is not displayed on the screen.

2	Place the pointer on the Ruler, then drag to place an alignment guide.

3	Run the cursor over the guide until it turns into a double-headed arrow, then drag an alignment guide to move it.

4	Drag an alignment guide off the drawing window to remove it.

Tips

You can also right-click the Ruler, then click Clear Guides to remove all the alignment guides in the window.

Related Topics

About Clear Guides


To align objects with the grid
To align objects with the grid,

1	Click View [image] Grid/Guides/Snap [image] Snap to Grid.

Tips

Snap to Grid forces objects to align to the Grid even when it is not displayed.

You can also right-click the Ruler and click Snap to Grid.

Related Topics

About Snap to Grid


To change your view of the document
To change your view of the document,

1	Click View [image] Zoom.

2	Click a zoom percentage or a zoom option you want to use.

Related Topics

About Zoom


Importable Spreadsheet Formats

These are the spreadsheet formats you can import into Corel Presentations:

Corel Quattro Pro 7-8 for Windows 95

Corel Quattro Pro for Windows (versions 5.0-6.0)

Quattro Pro (versions 2.0-4.0)

Lotus for Windows (versions 4.0-5.0)

Lotus 1-2-3 (versions 2.01-3.1)

Microsoft Excel (versions 2.1-5.0)

PlanPerfect (versions 3.0-5.1)

Related Topics

About Import Data


regression types

Predicted values for one variable based on the pattern set by another variable.


About Select Image Source

Use Select Image Source to set up your image scanning device.

You must have an image scanner with a TWAIN-compatible driver connected to your computer to use this feature. Each scanner has different capabilities which will affect how you can use it. Please refer to your image scanner manual for more information. If your scanner's TWAIN drivers are designed for an earlier version of Windows, you may need new drivers from your scanner's manufacturer.

Depending on the scanner you are using, the Select Image Source dialog box will vary. Click the Help button in the dialog box for more information, or consult your scanner manual.

To set up a scanner

Related Concepts


About Delete Slide(s)

Use Delete Slide(s) to delete one or more slides from a slide show. All other slides are automatically renumbered.

To delete slides

To remove a layout from a slide

Related Concepts


To convert a vector object into a bitmap image
To convert a vector object into a bitmap image,

1	Select the object(s) you want to convert to a bitmap.

2	Click Tools [image] Convert to Bitmap [image] Convert.

Tips

If you change your mind immediately following the conversion, you can return the image to its original vector-based format by clicking Edit [image] Undo.

Related Topics

About Convert to Bitmap


About Clear Guides

Use Clear Guides to remove all alignment guides from the drawing window.

You can use up to 30 vertical and 30 horizontal alignment guides to help you align objects you create or edit. Use Snap to Grid to position alignment guides precisely on the current grid setting. The alignment guides do not appear on the printed page.

To use alignment guides


About Convert to Bitmap

Use Convert to Bitmap to change selected vector objects, such as text lines, charts, figures, graphics, and drawings, to a bitmap format. Any vector objects with a Quick 3-D or a QuickWarp effect applied to them can also be changed to a bitmap format. Once a vector image is converted, you can use the tools in the Bitmap Editor to modify the image.

Convert to Bitmap is also useful for existing bitmap images. For example, if you have a large bitmap image that you want to use as an icon on a web page, you can size the image, then reconvert it to a bitmap. This method will also help to reduce the file size of the bitmap.

Because bitmap images tend to redraw faster than vector images, they are most useful in slide shows and in web pages that you intend to publish on the Internet.

Bitmaps vs. Vector Objects

To convert a vector object into a bitmap image

To save documents as bitmaps

Related Concepts


About Actual Size (100%)

Use Actual Size (100%) to display your drawing in the size it would appear if printed.

To change your view of the document

Related Concepts


Mixed Chart

A chart that uses different series types. For example, you can use a bar chart with one series displayed as a line or area chart.


To embed objects in other applications
To embed objects in other applications,

1	Create the object you want to embed.

2	Select the object, then click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Switch to the application into which you want to embed the object.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste in the target application.

Tips

You can also drag a file icon from the desktop and drop it into your drawing or slide show to insert a file.

Related Topics

About Paste Special


To insert linked objects
To insert linked objects,

1	Create the object you want to link, then save the document.

2	Select the object, then click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Open or switch to the Corel Presentations document into which you want to paste the object.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste Special in Corel Presentations.

5	Click Paste Link, then select the type of object you want it to be.

Tips

You can also click Display As Icon to display the object as an icon. This is especially useful when you are linking sound or multimedia files.

Related Topics

About Object


To edit OLE links
To edit OLE links,

1	Retrieve a drawing or slide show containing a linked object.

2	Click Edit [image] Links.

3	Select the link you want to edit.

4	Select the editing options you want.

Tips

For more information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

Related Topics


To cut and paste data
To cut and paste data,

1	Select the Datasheet cell(s) or text to cut.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut.

3	Click the cell where you want the pasted data to begin.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste to transfer the information from the Clipboard to the Datasheet.

Tips

Pasted data overwrites any data currently in the Datasheet cells in the area.

You can also right-click the Datasheet and click Cut and Paste.

Related Topics

About Cut


To cut and paste objects, positions, and text
To cut and paste objects, positions, and text,

1	Select the object(s) or text to cut. In an organization chart, select the branch you want to cut.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut.

3	Click Edit [image] Paste to transfer the objects from the Clipboard to the drawing window. In an organization chart, select the position you want the cut branch pasted to, then click Edit [image] Paste Branch.

Tips

Pasted text appears at the insertion point. Pasted objects appear in the same place as the original. Drag to move them to a different place.

In the Bitmap Editor, click [image] from the bitmap toolbar, then drag the pointer to select the area you want to cut.

You can also right-click the objects and click Cut and Paste.

Related Topics

About Cut


About Display Sequence

When you play a slide show, you can go from one slide to the next (or from one animated object to the next) by clicking the mouse or pressing the Spacebar or Enter. You can also specify the number of seconds an object or slide is displayed before advancing to the next one automatically.

The time delay begins as soon as the slide is displayed. If the slide contains animated objects, they are automatically displayed one after the other. When the last animated object is displayed, the delay begins again, and when it expires, the show advances to the next slide.

Animated objects can be displayed as soon as the slide appears, before a bulleted list is displayed, or after it is displayed.

After the first object is displayed, you can display the rest of the objects:

Immediately (without a mouse-click, keystroke, or automatic delay)

Manually or after a time delay, depending on which option you selected in the Display next slide area.

Display Sequence settings apply to the current slide and all animated objects on the slide. You can also apply the settings to all slides in the slide show.

To specify Display Sequence settings for a range of slides, select the range in the Slide Sorter first.

For more information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To display the next object or slide manually

To display the next slide or object automatically

To choose a transition for multiple slides

Related Concepts


To create an invisible QuickLink on a slide
To create an invisible QuickLink on a slide,

1	Click the Slide Editor tab.

2	Click [image] on the toolbar.

3	Click outside the area you want to cover with an invisible object, drag diagonally until the area is covered, then release the mouse button.

4	Right-click the rectangle you just created, then click QuickLink.

5	Select Invisible while playing or printing slides.

6	Click Go to, then specify which slide the QuickLink will display when it is activated; or click Action if you want the QuickLink to play or stop a sound, end the slide show, or launch another program or Internet browser.

Tips

Invisible QuickLinks are visible in the Slide Layer. They are only transparent when you play the slide show.

Though invisible QuickLinks are usually used over text, you can use them anywhere on a slide. Using an invisible QuickLink over a layout element (title, subtitle, and so on) lets you use them to navigate or trigger actions.

Related Topics

About QuickLinks


To edit backgrounds in a master
To edit backgrounds in a master,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Go to the Masters category folder containing the master file (*.MST) you want to edit.

3	Select the master file you want to edit, then click OK.

4	Click Edit [image] Background Layer.

5	Select the background you want to edit from the list of backgrounds in the lower right of the application window.

6	Edit the background by adding, deleting, or rearranging page colors, objects, drawings, logos, and so forth.

7	Click File [image] Save As.

8	Go to the Masters category folder in which you want to save the edited master.

9	Type a new filename for the master in the Name text box to prevent writing over the original master file.

Tips

You can also type the original master filename in the Name text box if you want to write over the existing file. You will need to reinstall it to return the original master.

Related Topics

About the Background Layer


To edit layouts in a master
To edit layouts in a master,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Go to the Masters category folder containing the master file (*.MST) you want to edit.

3	Select the master file, then click OK.

4	Select the layout you want to edit (such as Bulleted List or Title) from the list of layouts in the lower right of the application window.

5	Edit the layout by adding, deleting, or rearranging text areas, drawn objects, bitmaps, charts, and so on.

6	Click File [image] Save As.

7	Go to the Masters category folder in which you want to save the edited master.

8	Type a new filename for the master in the Name text box to prevent writing over the original master file.

Tips

You can also type the original master filename in the Name text box if you want to write over the existing file. You will need to reinstall it to return the original master.

Related Topics

About the Layout Layer


To add a new master gallery category
To add a new master gallery category,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Go to the folder where your Masters category folders are located.

3	Right-click outside all the current folders, then click New [image] Folder.

4	Select the folder, then click the title to change it from "New Folder" to the name of your new slide show Master category.

5	Click Close.

Tips

The new master category you created is added automatically to the Category drop-down list in the Master Gallery. You can now add masters to the new folder. After you create and save a new master (or paste an existing master) into the folder, it will appear in the Master Gallery.

You may find it helpful to create a master category folder for masters you use often. For example, you could cut/copy and paste frequently used masters from the existing categories into a "Favorites" category folder for faster selection in the Master Gallery.

Related Topics

About Master Gallery


To add layouts to a master
To add layouts to a master,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Go to the Masters category folder containing the master file (*.MST) you want to add a layout to.

3	Select the master file, then click OK.

4	Click Insert [image] New Layout.

5	Type a name for the new layout, then click OK.

6	Create your layout by adding text, drawn objects, bitmaps, charts, and any other elements.

7	Click File [image] Save As.

8	Go to the Masters category folder in which you want to save the master.

9	Type a new filename for the master in the Name text box to prevent writing over the original master file.

Tips

The layout name can be up to 15 characters long and can include spaces and numbers.

You can also type the original master filename in the Name text box if you want to write over the existing file. You will need to reinstall it to return the original master.

Related Topics

About the Layout Layer


To add backgrounds to a master
To add backgrounds to a master,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Go to the Masters category folder where you want to add a background.

3	Select the master file, then click OK.

4	Click Edit [image] Background Layer.

5	Click Insert [image] New Background.

6	Type a name for the new background, then click OK.

7	Create your background by adding page colors, logos, objects, text, and any other elements that should appear in the background of every slide.

8	Click File [image] Save As.

9	Go to the Masters category folder in which you want to save the master.

10	Type a new filename for the master in the Name text box to prevent writing over the original master file.

Tips

The background name can be up to 15 characters long and can include spaces and numbers.

You can also type the original master filename in the Name text box if you want to write over the existing file. You will need to reinstall it to return the original master.

Related Topics

About the Background Layer


To delete layouts in a master
To delete layouts in a master,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Go to the Masters category folder containing the master file (*.MST) you want to edit.

3	Select the master file (*.MST), then click OK.

4	Select the layout you want to delete (such as Org Chart or Combination) from the list of layouts in the lower-right corner of the application window.

5	Click Edit [image] Delete Layout [image] Yes.

6	Click File [image] Save As.

7	Go to the Masters category folder you selected in step 2 above to save the edited master file without the deleted layout.

8	Type a new filename for the master in the Name text box to prevent writing over the original master file.

Tips

You can also type the original master filename in the Name text box if you want to write over the existing file. You will need to reinstall it to return the original master.

Related Topics

About the Layout Layer


To rename backgrounds in a master
To rename backgrounds in a master,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Go to the Masters category folder containing the master file (*.MST) you want to edit.

3	Select the master file, then click OK.

4	Click Edit [image] Background Layer.

5	Click Edit [image] Rename Background.

6	Select the background you want to rename using the arrow buttons in the dialog box.

7	Type a new name for the background.

8	Click File [image] Save As.

9	Go to the Masters category folder in which you want to save the edited master.

10	Type a new filename for the master in the Name text box to prevent writing over the original master file.

Tips

The background name can use up to 15 letters, characters, and spaces.

You can also type the original master filename in the Name text box if you want to write over the existing file. You will need to reinstall it to return the original master.

Related Topics

About the Background Layer


To rename layouts in a master
To rename layouts in a master,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Go to the Masters category folder containing the master file (*.MST) you want to edit.

3	Select the master file, then click OK.

4	Click Edit [image] Rename Layout.

5	Select the layout you want to rename using the arrow buttons in the dialog box.

6	Type a new name for the layout.

7	Click File [image] Save As.

8	Go to the Masters category folder in which you want to save the edited master.

9	Type a new filename for the master in the Name text box to prevent writing over the original master file.

Tips

The layout name can use up to 15 letters, characters, and spaces.

You can also type the original master filename in the Name text box if you want to write over the existing file. You will need to reinstall it to return the original master.

Related Topics

About the Layout Layer


To assign backgrounds to layouts in a master
To assign backgrounds to layouts in a master,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Go to the Masters category folder containing the master file (*.MST) you want to edit.

3	Select the master file, then click OK.

4	Click Format [image] Assign Background.

5	Select a layout in the list box.

6	Select a new background for the layout from the Available backgrounds list.

7	Click File [image] Save As.

8	Go to the Masters category folder in which you want to save the edited master.

9	Type a new filename for the master in the Name text box to prevent writing over the original master file.

Tips

You can also type the original master filename in the Name text box if you want to write over the existing file. You will need to reinstall it to return the original master.

Related Topics

About the Background Layer


To print a specified number of slides per page
To print a specified number of slides per page,

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click Handouts, Speaker notes, or Audience notes from the Print list.

3	Specify a number in the Number of slides per page text box.

4	Click the Details tab, then select any other print options you want to use, such as Print slide title or Print slide number.

5	Click Print.

Tips

Handouts are printed with thumbnail versions of the slides. Speaker notes are printed with slide thumnails and any text you have written as speaker notes for each slide. Audience notes are printed with slide thumbnails and blank lines for your audience to take notes on.

Related Topics

About Handouts


About Background Gallery

Use the Background Gallery to display and apply a pre-designed slide show background to slides in the current slide show. Each background gives you the added flexibility of quickly customizing your slide show with just the right look for each slide. Usually, you use the same background for every slide in a show, but you may use a different background to emphasize important slides.

You can add to the Background Gallery by creating your own background designs and saving them as .WPG files in a background category folder (such as Business, Color, or a new category folder you have added). The next time you want to change the background layer in a slide show, your background will appear in the Background Gallery under the appropriate category.

You can also access the Background Gallery from the Background category drop-down list in the Slide Properties dialog box. This is especially useful if you want to mix and match background types in the current slide show.

To create a master

To use the background gallery

To select a layout for a slide

Related Concepts


To use the background gallery
To use the background gallery,

1	Click Edit [image] Background Layer.

2	Click Format [image] Background Gallery.

3	Select a category from the Category list.

4	Select a background.

5	Click OK to apply the background to the background layer of your current slide show. (Any text or data you have added in the Slide Layer will remain intact.)

6	Click Edit [image] Slide Layer to return to your slide show.

Tips

If you have added drawings, bitmaps, Clipart, or text to the background layer of your slide show and want to maintain the objects when you apply a different background, select Keep current graphic objects with the new background.

Click Other File to select a background you have previously created and saved as a .WPG in another folder.

Related Topics

About Background Gallery


About Time Delays

Use Display Sequence to advance slides, bulleted text, and animated objects manually or automatically. By default, slides and animated objects advance manually, with a mouse-click or keystroke. You can also change the setting to advance automatically after a specified number of seconds. This is called a time delay. If you specify a delay, it also applies automatically to all animated objects in the slide. For example, if slide 2 contains a title and an animated object and you specify a three-second delay, when you play the slide show, the object automatically appears three seconds after the slide transition. Then, three seconds later, the slide show moves on to the next slide.

You can also specify whether animated objects advance before or after lists, and whether they each advance manually, or automatically after the first object is displayed.

For more information about controls on the dialog box, click [image], then click a control.

To display the next object or slide manually

To display the next slide or object automatically

Related Concepts


Keystrokes to Use While Playing Slide Shows

While playing a slide show you can press default keystrokes to advance slides or objects, adjust the volume of a sound clip, jump to certain slides, and so on. The following default keystrokes apply to all slides in the show.

Increase Volume

+

Decrease Volume

-

Stop Sound

End

Replay Sound

Home

Previous Slide

PgUp

Next Slide

PgDn

Backtrack

Backspace

Go to Slide

Ctrl+G

Next Transition

Space

Erase Highlighter

Ctrl+E

Stop Slide Show

Esc

You can also specify keystrokes (QuickKeys) or links (QuickLinks) to go to any specified slide in the show, play a sound clip, or launch your Internet browser or other program.

 	Related Topics

About Slide Show Tools


To animate a bulleted list
To animate a bulleted list,

1	Right-click a bulleted list, then click Object Animation.

2	Click Animate object in place to have each bullet point appear in its place in the chart, or click Animate object across screen to have each bullet point move across the slide.

3	Select the animation effect you want to use from the list box.

4	Select an animation direction and speed if needed.

5	To display bullet items sequentially, select Display one at a time.

6	To emphasize each bullet item as it appears by dimming the other items, select Highlight.

7	To display bullet items sequentially beginning with the last item and continuing back to the first, select Reverse order.

Tips

If the slide also contains one or more animated images, the list is displayed before the image(s). To change the display order, right-click the slide, then click Display Sequence [image] Before bulleted list.

Time delays also apply to animated bulleted lists. For example, if you set a two-second time delay for the slide, the first animated bullet point automatically appears two seconds after the transition finishes, the next bullet point follows two seconds later, and so on until two seconds after the last bullet point displays and the show advances to the next slide.

Related Topics

About Animating Objects


About Audience Notes

Use Audience Notes to give your listeners a set of printed slide thumbnails with blank lines beside them for taking notes. When you print the slide show with audience notes, half of each page is devoted to slide thumbnails. The other half is for lines where the audience can write notes.

To print audience notes, speaker notes, and handouts

To create notes for the audience

To send a slide show to Corel WordPerfect

Related Concepts


To create notes for the audience
To create notes for the audience,

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click Audience notes from the Print list.

3	Specify the number of slides to print on a page.

4	Click Print.

Tips

Half of the printed page is devoted to slide thumbnails. Lines are printed on the other half for audience notes.

To print your speech notes for each slide instead of blank lines, click Speaker notes from the Print list in step 2.

Related Topics

About Audience Notes


To display the next object or slide manually
To display the next object or slide manually,

1	Click View [image] Play Slide Show [image] Play to begin playing the slide show.

2	Click the mouse or press the Spacebar to display the next object, bullet point, or slide.

Tips

All animated objects on a slide must be displayed before going to the next slide.

To use the mouse to advance to the next slide or object, click in an area of the slide not occupied by a title, chart, image, or other object.

The Right arrow, Down arrow, and PgDn keys also display the next object or slide.

To assign another keystroke to display the next object or slide, use QuickKeys.

To display the next object or slide by clicking an object or other area in the slide, use QuickLinks.

If you set a time delay to display objects and slides automatically, right-click the slide, click Display Sequence [image] Manually (using mouse click or Spacebar).

Related Topics

About Display Sequence


To erase highlighting
To erase highlighting,

1	While playing a slide show, press Ctrl+E after highlighting.

Tips

You can also right-click the slide, then click Erase highlighting.

You can also move the mouse pointer to any edge of the screen to display Slide Show Tools, then click Erase highlighting.

Related Topics

About Highlighting


About Slide Show Tools

While you are playing a slide show, you can use Slide Show Tools to:

Advance to a specific slide

Return to the previous slide

Change the highlighter color and width

Erase highlighting

Adjust sound volume

Stop and restart a sound clip

Stop the slide show

To display Slide Show Tools, move the mouse to the edge of the screen while playing the show. To hide it, move the mouse off the Slide Show Tools.

Keystrokes to Use While Playing Slide Shows

To play a slide show


To change the highlighter color, width, and style
To change the highlighter color, width, and style,

1	Click View [image] Play Slide Show.

2	Select a color from the Highlighter color palette.

3	Select a line width from the Width palette.

Tips

You can change the highlighter color, width, and line style as you play the slide show. To change the highlighter settings during a slide show, move the mouse pointer to any edge of the screen to display Slide Show Tools, then select the options you want. You can also right-click a slide to display the Slide Show Tools.

Related Topics

About Highlighting


About Highlighting

During a slide show you can emphasize points by using the Highlighter to circle, underline, and mark objects on a slide. You can change the default color, width, and style of the Highlighter for each slide show, and you can change the settings while the show is playing.

Highlighting remains on the screen until the show advances to the next screen. You can also erase the highlighting at any time.

To play a slide show

Keystrokes to Use While Playing Slide Shows

To highlight during slide shows

To erase highlighting

To change the highlighter color, width, and style

Related Concepts


To adjust sound clip volume during a slide show
To adjust sound clip volume during a slide show,

1	Click View [image] Play Slide Show.

2	On the numeric keypad, press + for louder or - for softer.

Tips

To change the volume and other settings during the slide show, move the mose pointer to any edge of the screen to display the Slide Show Tools, then select the options you want.

Related Topics

About Slide Show Tools


About Show It!

You can create a version of the current slide show that you can play on the Internet with all transitions, animations, time delays, and other features.

When you publish a slide show to Show It!, you can specify the title, the destination drive and folder, basic information, the window size the slide show should use when playing, and appearance options. You can also choose to repeat the show until the viewer presses Esc.

You can play your slide show in both Netscape and Internet Explorer browsers with a plug-in available from the Corel Presentations web site: Corel Presentations.

To create an Internet slide show with full multimedia capabilities

To play a slide show on the Internet

Related Concepts


To create an Internet slide show with full multimedia capabilities
To create an Internet slide show with full multimedia capabilities,

1	Open the slide show you want to display on the Internet.

2	Click File [image] Internet Publisher [image] Publish to Show It!

3	Type in a title for the slide show, and specify a location for the slide show files.

4	Specify the information you want to include on your slide show, the page formatting, and other options as you are prompted for them.

Tips

Launch your browser with the slide show, then double-click the slide show icon to play the slide show.

Right-click the slides to choose options as the slide show plays.

Related Topics

About Show It!


To play a slide show on the Internet
To play a slide show on the Internet,

1	Open your browser, click File [image] Open File, then select the Active-X slide show.

2	Double-click the icon to play your slide show.

3	As the show plays, right-click the screen to choose options.

Tips

To see the slide show right after you create it, click Launch Web Browser with Slide Show.

Related Topics

About Show It!


To create a slide show from a Corel WordPerfect outline
To create a slide show from a Corel WordPerfect outline,

1	Click File [image] New, then click the Create a New tab.

2	Select Presentations from the Category drop-down list, then click [Presentations Slide Show].

3	Click Format [image] Master Gallery, select a master, then click OK.

4	Click the Slide Outliner tab.

5	Click Insert [image] File, then double-click the name of the Corel WordPerfect outline file you want to build your slide show from.

Tips

If the Corel WordPerfect outline document has a title, the first slide will contain the title, and the outline will begin on the second slide.

Each first-level outline item becomes a new slide title.

Related Topics

About Bulleted Lists


To add a Clipart image to the slide show background
To add a Clipart image to the slide show background,

1	Click Edit [image] Background Layer.

2	Click [image] on the toolbar to open the Scrapbook.

3	Browse through the category folders until you find the Clipart image you want to insert.

4	Drag the image from the Scrapbook into your document.

5	Size the image by selecting it and dragging one of the corner handles. Dragging a side handle changes box proportions and distorts the image.

6	Move the image by selecting and dragging it a new position.

7	Click Edit [image] Slide Layer when you have finished. The image will appear behind all the objects on the Layout and Slide Layers.

Tips

You can also move an image from the slide layer to the background layer. Select the image, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play, then double-click Obj2back.wcm.

Related Topics

About the Background Layer


To add a Clipart image to the slide show layout
To add a Clipart image to the slide show layout,

1	Click Edit [image] Layout Layer.

2	Select the layout you want to add the image to from the drop-down list at the bottom of the application window.

3	Click [image] on the toolbar to open the Scrapbook.

4	Browse through the category folders until you find the Clipart image you want to insert.

5	Drag the image from the Scrapbook into your document.

6	Size the image by dragging one of the corner handles. Dragging a side handle changes box proportions and distorts the image.

7	Move the image by dragging it to a new position.

8	Click Edit [image] Slide Layer when you are finished. The image appears behind any objects on the Slide Layer.

Tips

To edit the image, click Edit [image] Layout Layer.

Related Topics

About the Layout Layer


About Resample Bitmap

The Resample Bitmap feature helps you optimize the display of a bitmap object on your monitor by automatically adjusting the bitmap resolution after you have resized it in the drawing window. This in turn affects the actual size of the file on a disk or hard drive.

For example, if you insert a large bitmap object, then size it smaller in the drawing window, you can use Resample Bitmap to reduce the memory and file size requirements of the object when editing, printing, and so forth. If you insert a small bitmap object, then size it larger in the drawing window, you can use Resample Bitmap to reduce the jagged edges in the image and improve the visual quality.

In some cases, the print quality of a bitmap object that you have sized smaller and resampled may be affected. However, a bitmap object that you have sized larger and resampled will improve the resulting printout.

To convert a bitmap image into a vector object

To resample a bitmap image

To convert a vector object into a bitmap image

Related Concepts


To resample a bitmap image
To resample a bitmap image,

1	Size a bitmap object in the drawing window.

2	With the object still selected, click Tools [image] Resample Bitmap.

Tips

You can also right-click a bitmap object you have sized, then click Resample Bitmap from the QuickMenu.

About Resample Bitmap


About Bubble Chart

A bubble chart is similar to a scatter chart except that you are plotting three different data values on the x and y axis.

For example, you may have a set of data on a business giving the number of units sold, the gross profit, and the net profit. Using a bubble chart, you could plot the number of units sold on the x axis, and the gross profit on the y axis. The bubble for each data value is centered over the intersecting x and y value, and the radius of the circle represents the net profit. You could also plot the same type of data for different departments or business units within an organization, on the same chart. Just remember to use different colored bubbles.

Tips for Creating Data Charts

To create data charts

Related Concepts


About Password

When you attempt to preview a password-protected Corel WordPerfect document (.WPD) in the Corel Presentations Open File dialog box, you are required to type the correct password before you can view the file contents. If the Corel WordPerfect document was saved with Enhanced Password Protection, the password may be case sensitive.

Related Concepts


To insert TextArt
To insert TextArt,

1	Click [image] from the Text Object Tools pop-out on the toolbar.

2	Type your text in the text box.

3	Select 3-D Mode to toggle your text between 2-D or 3-D mode.

4	Click a tab to select the visual effects you want.

5	Click Close to insert your TextArt into the drawing window or slide.

Tips

Click Help in the Corel TextArt dialog for additional information about TextArt.

You can size and position TextArt as you would any other drawing object.

Related Topics

About Contour Text


To insert a spreadsheet
To insert a spreadsheet,

1	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet.

2	Create your spreadsheet.

3	Click anywhere outside the spreadsheet to return to your drawing or slide.

Tips

You can size and position the spreadsheet as you would any other drawing object.

Related Topics

About Import Data


To insert a comment
To insert a comment,

1	Click Insert [image] Comment.

2	Type your comment in the text window.

3	When you are finished, click File [image] Exit & Return to close CorelMEMO and insert the comment into your drawing or slide.

Tips

Click Help [image] Index in CorelMEMO for more information about creating a comment.

You can size and position the comment in your drawing or slide as you would any other drawing object.

Double-click the comment in your drawing or slide to edit it in CorelMEMO.

Related Topics

About Text Line


To insert an equation
To insert an equation,

1	Click Insert [image] Equation.

2	Create your equation.

3	Click File [image] Exit and Return to close the Equation Editor and insert the equation into your drawing or slide.

Tips

Click Help [image] Equation Editor Help Topics in the Equation Editor for more information about creating equations and formulas.

You can size and position the equation in your drawing or slide as you would any other drawing object.

Double-click the equation in your drawing or slide to edit it in the Equation Editor.

Related Topics

About Insert File


About Version Control

Corel Versions is the solution to the problem of trying to control and track multiple copies of the same file. Instead of trying to keep track of all your updates to a file by saving new versions of it under different file names, Corel Versions lets you save the changes you have made to each successive version of your file. Each version is archived to its own folder, or the folder of your choice, on any read/write drive, including hard drives and disks. Corel Versions lists all your archived files in a history list, allowing you to retrieve any archived file if you need a previous version. Corel Versions also lets you compare any two files to see the text differences between them.

With Corel Versions you can:

archive previous versions of your files

retrieve any archived version of a file

view any archived version of a file

compare archived files to see the differences between them

attach meaningful information to each archived version that can be viewed in the document history window

track multiple users of a common file

delete any archived file from the history list

specify how many versions to keep in the document history list(when the number is reached the oldest version is discarded); or keep all of them

protect a specific archived version from being discarded from the history list

Corel Versions can also be used on a network when a group will work on the same files. Each saved version displays the name of the user who archived it.

NOTE: Version control is available from the File menu only if you have done a custom installation of the suite, and selected the Corel Versions component in the Accessories category.


What Is New?

Corel Presentations 8 has been enhanced with the addition of many new features. This Help page summarizes those enhancements. Click What is Different? in Related Concepts at the end of this page to find additional information about features in Corel Presentations 8.

Application Bar

The Application Bar, located at the bottom of the drawing window, displays the names of open documents. You can click an open document in this area to quickly move back and forth between documents, or you can drag objects from a maximized window to one of the documents on the bar. The document where you are dragging the object to is maximized, allowing you to place the object in it.

Corel Barista

When you publish a slide show to Corel Barista, it now includes support for your slide transitions and sound.

CorelMEMO

With CorelMEMO you can insert notes and bitmapped images into Corel Presentations. Use CorelMEMO when you want to leave yourself a reminder, note a change in a slide or drawing, or place a comment into a program. You can add one of the bitmapped images provided with CorelMEMO, or include your own bitmapped image to customize your comment.

Corel Versions

Corel Versions is the solution to the problem of trying to control and track multiple copies of the same file. Instead of trying to keep track of all your updates to a file by saving new versions of it under different file names, Corel Versions lets you save the changes you have made to each successive version of your file. Each version is archived to its own folder, or to the folder of your choice, on any read/write drive, including hard drives and disks.

Corel Versions lists all your archived files in a history list, allowing you to retrieve any archived file if you need a previous version. Corel Versions also lets you compare any two files to see the text difference between them.

With Corel Versions you can

Archive previous versions of your files

Retrieve any archived version of a file

View any archived version of a file

Compare archived files to see the differences between them

Attach meaningful information to each archived version that can be viewed in the document history window

Track multiple users of a common file

Delete any archived file from the history list

Specify how many versions to keep in the document history list

Protect a specific archived version from being discarded from the history list

Corel Versions can also be used on a network when a group will work on the same files. Each saved version displays the name of the user who archived it.

Custom Audiences

Use Custom Audiences when you need to create an alternative version of a slide show without having to re-create it or save a copy under a different filename. Different audiences need different information. As you create a presentation, you may have several different audiences in mind. Instead of re-creating the presentation or saving several different .SHW files, you can tailor a single presentation to each audience. Custom Audiences helps you create different versions of a slide show by allowing you to specify which slides you want to skip while presenting.

For example, you may need to include a slide listing a product's technical specifications for a client company's Information Systems manager, but you know that the business manager cares more about its primary features. With Custom Audiences, you can create an IS version with the technical specs slide, and another Business version that skips that slide.

Data Charts

The new Range Highlighter feature is a great tool for helping you easily distinguish between your data and the Legend and Labels area in the Datasheet. You can highlight each area of the Datasheet with the color you select.

Bubble charts are the latest addition to the wide variety of data charts you can easily create in Corel Presentations.

Direct Video Support

Use Movie to insert video files (.AVI, .MOV, .MPEG) onto your slides to add interest to your presentation. Using a movie clip can catch the audience's attention and reinforce your point. When you insert .MOV or .MPEG files, you need to have the drivers installed to play them correctly. The latest drivers are usually available for downloading on the manufacturers' websites. Using Movie instead of OLE lets you position the clip anywhere on the slide, and ensures that when it plays it remains in that location and at the same size, and gives you added appearance and playback controls.

DirectDraw

DirectDraw technology means that your slide show transitions will be smoother, faster, and better than ever. Check out the wide variety of eye-catching transition and animation effects available for slides and other objects.

Equation Editor

With the new Corel WordPerfect 8 Equation Editor inside Corel Presentations, you can easily build complex equations using simple point-and-click techniques and drop them into your slides or drawings.

Layout and Background Gallery

Choose layouts and backgrounds for each slide in the slide show, independent of the master you are using. Corel Presentations gives you seven different layouts to let you concentrate on the content of your slide instead of the design. In addition, you can use any of the colorful, professionally designed backgrounds in your slide show, no matter which master you are using.

MMX Support

Corel Presentations takes advantage of MMX technology to speed up transitions for smoother slide shows. It also redraws the screen faster and more accurately to let you see your changes quickly and clearly.

Navigation tabs

Tabs representing each slide make it easier than ever to switch between slides in your slide show. Simply click the slide's tab, and the slide appears. For longer slide shows, the Go To list gives you quick access by both slide number and title.

PerfectExpert

The PerfectExpert combines the best features from QuickTasks, templates, Help, and Coaches to help you accomplish your work more quickly. PerfectExpert can guide you through a detailed project such as creating a slide show (even if you want to use other suite applications to create parts of the document), or it can guide you through a smaller task such as inserting a Clipart image. The PerfectExpert provides you with a gallery of professionally designed slide shows to choose from, and you can change the layout and content in any number of ways to match your needs.

Property Bar

The Property Bar, which displays below the toolbar, gives you a quick and easy way to access the right tools at the right time to complete a task. For example, when you are working on a slide show, the Property Bar displays tools specific to creating and editing slides. When you select a bitmap image, the Property Bar changes to bitmap tools.

QuickPlay tab

When you want to see how a slide will look when you play your slide show, click the QuickPlay tab. The current slide appears with all transition, animation, sound, and other properties just as they appear when you play a slide show.

Resample Bitmap

The Resample Bitmap feature helps you optimize the display of a bitmap object on your monitor by automatically adjusting the bitmap resolution after you have resized it in the drawing window. This in turn affects the actual size of the file on a disk or hard drive. For example, if you insert a large bitmap object, then size it smaller in the drawing window, you can use Resample Bitmap to reduce the memory and file size requirements of the object when editing, printing, and so forth. If you insert a small bitmap object, then size it larger in the drawing window, you can use Resample Bitmap to reduce the jagged edges in the image and improve the visual quality.

Scrapbook

This suite-wide utility displays all your Clipart images in one location for fast access. Just drag and drop an image into your document, then size and move it as you would any other drawing object.

Send To

Corel Presentations now gives you a variety of options for sending your slide shows and drawings.

Corel WordPerfect

With the click of a button, you can send your slide show or the text outline of your slide show directly to Corel WordPerfect for publishing. This handy feature will allow you greater document manipulation of your speaker notes or your audience notes.

Graphicsland

If you have a modem, you can send your Corel Presentations slides directly to Graphicsland, a slide service bureau.

Windows 95

Now you can click the destination you want within Corel Presentations. You can send your document to your (A) drive, My Briefcase, or Mail Recipient.

Show It!

Corel Presentations lets you publish your slide show to the Internet with full support for animations, sound, transitions, QuickLinks, and much more. You can set it to run automatically, or allow your reader to navigate through it.

Slide Show Playback Tools

As you play a slide show, use the Slide Show Tools to adjust the sound volume, choose highlighter characteristics, navigate through the slide show, and much more.

Smart Color Matching

Selecting a Master also means selecting an entire color scheme. Each bulleted list, data chart, and organization chartperfectly matches the background and master you chose.

Spreadsheets

Insert a Corel Quattro Pro spreadsheet easily into a slide or drawing.

TextArt

TextArt, a popular feature of Corel WordPerfect, is now fully integrated into Corel Presentations.

View tabs

Switch between the Slide Editor, Slide Sorter, and Slide Outliner quickly and easily by clicking tabs.

Related Concepts


Where Did It Go?

This Help page summarizes a few of the changes made in Corel Presentations 8. For a list of new features in Corel Presentations 8, click What is New? in Related Concepts at the bottom of this page.

What Feature Names Have Changed Since Corel Presentations 7?

Power Bar is now Property Bar

Clipart Browser is now Scrapbook

Runtime Expert is now Show on the Go

Help Online is now Corel Web Site

ActionLink is now QuickLink

ActionKey is now QuickKey

Preferences is now Settings

Text area is now Text Box

Bullet Chart is now Bulleted List

QuickArt is now Clipart

Status Bar is now Application Bar

Slide menu name is now Format

WordPerfect Characters is now Symbols

Draft Mode is now Draft

What Features Have Moved Since Corel Presentations 7?

Graphics menu moved to the Graphics drop-down list on the Property Bar

File [image] Preferences moved to Tools [image] Settings

Slide [image] Runtime Expert moved to File [image] Show on the Go

Slide [image] Play Slide Show moved to View [image] Play Slide Show

Format [image] Page Setup moved to File [image] Page Setup.

Tool palette is turned off by default. All the features found on the tool palette can also be found on the toolbar.

What Features Were Removed Since Corel Presentations 7?

Color palettes

Slide List View

Related Concepts


About the Year 2000

Corel Presentations 8 stores dates entered in date format (beginning with January 1, 1900) as a unique date/time serial value. unique date/time serial value.  So, for example, if you typed a 1 into a date formatted Datasheet, it would be displayed as 1/1/1900.  Therefore, Corel Presentations 8 provides for date storage which includes the century information. To prepare for the transition to the Year 2000:

Enter dates using all 4 digits for the year:

We recommend that you enter and display all dates in Corel Presentations 8 using all 4 digits, or "explicit century" format, for the year (i.e., mm/dd/yyyy).

Set the date display to default to all 4 digits:

After you have created a Datasheet, you can choose a 4-digit year display for an individual cell or a range of cells. Select the cell(s) to be formatted, then click Data [image] Format. In the Format Type dialog box, select Date, choose the 4-digit display option you prefer, and click OK.

Insert Current Date/Time:

You can insert the current Date/Time in 4-digit format by clicking Insert [image] Date/Time, and then choosing one of the 4-digit display options offered.

If you choose to enter dates in 2-digit, or "implicit century" year format (i.e. mm/dd/yy), please be aware of the following:

When you enter dates into date-formatted Datasheet cells, you can type shortcuts (such as 7/25/99) for the date. If you enter 00-50 for the year, Corel Presentations 8 will assume you are entering dates for 2000 through 2050. If you enter 51-99 for the year, Corel Presentations 8 will assume 1951-1999.  You can override the century assumption by entering 4 digits for the year, such as 7/25/2099.

To edit dates in Corel Presentations 8 Datasheets:

If you have entered a date and then decide to change the last two digits, Corel Presentations 8 will follow the 00-50 and 51-99 rules above, and the original century designation may not be kept.  For example, if you enter 7/25/1999 and you reenter 7/25/39, Corel Presentations 8 will assume 7/25/2039. If you want to override the 00-50 and 51-99 rules, you must reenter all 4 digits for the year (7/25/1939).

 Tip

Corel Corporation has a Year 2000 policy Web site. For the latest information, feel free to visit the site at http://www.corel.com/2000.htm.

To automatically fill in chart series

Related Concepts


To rename box fields in organization charts
To rename box fields in organization charts,

1	Create or double-click an organization chart.

2	Select the boxes whose box fields you want to rename.

3	Right-click any selected box, then click Box Fields.

4	In the Current fields list box, select the box field name you want to rename.

5	Click Rename.

6	Type the new box field name in the text box, then click OK.

Tips

In step 2 above, you can hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple boxes or you can right-click a clear area in the chart, then click Select All to select all boxes at once.

Related Topics

About Box Fields


Sizes the image to the page.


Sizes the image to the selected area.


Keeps the image at a fixed size.


Orient the axis title vertically or horizontally.


Specify the number of slides you want to add to your slide show.


Select the layout you want to assign to the new slide(s).


Lists which layouts are using which backgrounds. Select the layout which contains the background you want to change.


Lists the backgrounds available. Select the background you want to assign to the selected layout.


This is the window in which you create a single drawing or one or more slides in a slide show. When Corel Presentations starts, a new drawing window opens inside the application window. You can open as many as nine drawing windows at one time.


This is a text object. Double-click it to edit the text, or select it to size, position, or rotate it.


Inserts a placeholder for a bulleted list into your layout.


Represent data values as a topography that bulges and dips like the contour of a landscape. For example, you can use a surface chart to show business profits and losses as the peaks and valleys of a mountain range. The color of the topography changes as the surface rises and falls.


Show the height of all values under the line defined by the data points. Area charts can also display continuous solid areas measuring the data in your Datasheet. Use area charts to show trends and amount of change over time.


Display the data as bars of varying heights or lengths for easy comparison. You can create vertical or horizontal bar charts. Use bar charts to show variations between components, but not parts in relationship to a whole.


Use lines and bars to show the high and low values compared over time. For example, a high/low chart could compare daily low and high values of a stock over five days; or it could show the opening, closing, and range of stock prices. A vertical line or bar connects high and low values for the time period; horizontal marks or bars show opening and closing values. Type a new label in every fourth column. For each label, type all four data values.


Show trends and rate of change over time by connecting the data points with lines.


Use different series types for added emphasis or contrast. For example, you could contrast your division's performance against that of the company as a whole by using a bar chart with one series displayed as a line or area.


Show each data cell in the Datasheet as a slice of the circle, what proportion that slice is, and how it relates to the whole. You can create as many as nine pie charts in the same Datasheet.


Use a radial or angular grid to compare data over time and to show variations and trends.


Plot the intercept of two data values, placing a dot or marker at each point where data on the x and y axes intersect.


Dismisses the dialog box.


Displays the chart with height, width, and depth.


This is an activated text area or text line. You can create and edit the text, change the font, and format the text. Click outside the border or click another tool to close the Text Editor.


This is a drawing object. You can edit its points, position it on the page, or change its properties. In slide show mode, you can assign a QuickLink or an animation to it.


This is a grouped object, made up of other objects (drawing, text, or both). You can separate it into its component parts, or select each part to edit it individually without breaking the grouping. Clipart figures are groups of vector objects.


You have multiple objects selected. You can group, arrange, and position them in relation to each other. To deselect them one at a time, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking the ones you want to deselect.


This is an organization chart. It shows an organization's structure, and the relationships of people and positions within it. Double-click the organization chart to edit its data and change its appearance.


This is a chart created with data you enter in the Datasheet. Data charts include area, bar, high/low, line, pie, radar, scatter, surface, and table charts. Double-click the chart to edit its data or change its appearance. Click outside the chart to close it.


This is a bulleted list. Use it to display a series of text lines as a bulleted list. Double-click the bulleted list to edit its text or change its appearance.


The directory for your keyboard layout and toolbar files.


Save the current grid and snap settings to use in all new drawings and slide shows.


Select the bitmap special effect you want to use from the list.


Select to blur the borders between colors and objects at low, medium, or high.


Select to lighten or darken the image. Specify low brightness percentages for dark areas, or high percentages for light areas.


Select to increase or decrease the contrast between colors and backgrounds. Specify high contrast percentages for lots of contrast, or low percentages for low contrast.


Select to give a three-dimensional effect to the edges of objects and lines.


Select to even out the contrast between objects and backgrounds.


Select to give the effect of an image made up of squares of color. You can specify the size of the squares.


Select to give the effect of colors running down the page in the rain. You can specify the size of the streaking effect.


Select to make colors more or less vivid. Specify high percentages for stronger colors, and low percentages for duller colors.


Select to sharpen the edges between colors and objects. You can choose low, medium, or high sharpening.


Select to smooth the edges between colors and objects. You can choose low, medium, or high smoothing.


Removes spikes and irregular spots on the edges of colors and objects. You can choose low, medium, or high spike removal.


Select to trace the edges of objects, removing the color and leaving only the contour lines. You can choose low, medium, or high contouring.


Select to give the effect of wind blowing colors horizontally across the page. You can specify the strength and direction of the wind.


Specify the amount, percent, size, and/or direction for each special effect.


Reset all grid and snap options to the default settings.


Applies the effect to the entire area.


Applies the effect to the area of the bitmap you selected before choosing Special Effects.


Applies the effect outside the area of the bitmap you selected before choosing Special Effects.


Click to undo any spacing changes you have made and use the default spacing in your bulleted list.


Click to return all effects options and the preview box to their initial states.


Specify the folder for your background files.


Select to convert the image into a black and white stereogram. A stereogram is a seemingly random pattern that reveals three-dimensional images as you concentrate on it.


Click the box shape you want to use.


Creates a placeholder for a bulleted list title in your layout.


Select a color for borders.


Specify how thick the pie slices, lines, markers, areas, and bars in your chart will appear.


Select the shape of the bitmap brush.


Specify how many pixels across your brush will cover.


Specify what percentage of pixels within the brush area will change color.


This is an active bulleted list. You can change the font, appearance, justification, and bullets for each level, and add and delete bulleted items. Click outside the bulleted list or click another tool to close the editor.


This is a bulleted list in the bulleted list template. Double-click it to create and edit bulleted items, and to change the font, justification, and bullets for each level.


This is a data chart in the Data Chart template. Double-click the chart to add and edit data and change the chart's appearance.


This is a layout. Layouts are predefined templates for slides. You can edit the layouts in the current master or create your own by adding elements such as charts, text areas, and graphics.


This is a background. Backgrounds appear behind the layouts in a slide. You can edit the backgrounds in the current master, or create your own backgrounds by adding elements such as page colors, graphics, and so on.


This is the Slide Outliner. Type a title and subtitle for each slide, and the text for bulleted lists using bulleted list layouts. Use Tab and Shift+Tab to move bulleted items up and down, and press Return to add a new line.


This is the Slide Sorter. It displays a thumbnail sketch of each slide in your slide show. Select and drag slides to change the slide order, or double-click a slide to edit it.


This is a slide in your slide show. Drag it to put it in a different place in your slide show, or double-click it to edit its contents.


These are slides in your slide show. Drag them to re-position them in the slide show, or cut or copy and paste them. Double-click each slide to edit its contents.


This is the Slide List. It displays information about each slide in the slide show. Select and drag slides to change their order, or double-click each slide to edit its contents.


Select an available (installed) font from the alphabetical list.


Select a predefined style for the current font.


Specify a point size for the current font.


Specify how wide your 3-D vertical bars and high/low markers appear.


Fills the Datasheet with correctly formatted sample data, labels, and legend titles. You can clear all sample data and enter your own.


The list displays the current settings for each slide. Right-click the bar to add items or drag the buttons off to eliminate them.


Click the branch structure you want to use. Each branch consists of a manager and subordinates.


Creates a placeholder for a bulleted list subtitle in your layout.


Select a pattern, gradient, texture, or picture fill.


This is a bitmap, which is a graphics image formed by a series of dots called "pixels." Bitmaps are also called paint or raster images. Scanned photographs and images created in "paint" applications are bitmap images. Double-click the bitmap to edit it.


This is the Bitmap Editor. Use it to create, edit, and size bitmap images. Click File>Close Bitmap Editor to return the bitmap to the drawing window or slide.


This is the menu bar. Use it to select options and features. You can edit the current menu bar or create your own using the Menu Bar Editor.


Specify how tall your 3-D bars, lines, and high/low markers appear.


Select a position for the label of each pie slice.


This is the Application Bar. It displays, among other things, the name of open documents, and the cursor position, if you select the Show Pointer Position option from the View menu. You can click an open document in this area to quickly move back and forth between documents, or you can drag objects from an open window to one of the documents on the bar.  The document you are dragging the object to on the bar is maximized, allowing you to place the object in it.


This is a scroll bar. Use it to move up, down, right, and left in the current drawing or slide.


Click to clear the data out of the currently selected cells.


Click to clear the formatting (date or numeric) from the selected cells.


Click to clear both data and formatting from the selected cells.


Display values in even increments. For example, using the linear method might result in values of 1, 2, 3, and so on, all equal distances apart.


Exponentially increases the values on an axis. For example, using the logarithmic method might result in values of 10, 100, 1000, and so on, all equal distances apart. Choosing this option disables the value setting options.


Specify a minimum value, or select Automatic to automatically read the present minimum value.


Specify a maximum value, or select Automatic to automatically read the present maximum value.


Specify how far apart major grid lines will be. For example, specifying 20 means that major grid lines will appear at 0, 20, 40, 60, and so on. Or select Automatic to automatically choose grid values.


This is the toolbar. It provides easy access to commands you use often. You can edit the current toolbar or create your own using the Toolbar Editor.


Specify a number to divide the values in your chart. For example, if the maximum value for an axis is 1000 and the label scale factor is 10, the new maximum value will be labeled 100. Using smaller data values can make some charts easier to read.


Select a line style and color for your horizontal major grid lines.


Click Rows or Columns to fill cells with data from right to left or top to bottom. If you have a row or column selected already, these options are unavailable.


Use the currently selected master as the default for all new slide shows.


Begins with the Start Value and adds the Step number to it. For example, if the step value is 3, the difference between each cell in the fill is 3:  1, 4, 7, 10...


Begins with the Start Value and multiplies it by the Step number. For example, if the step value is 3, the interval is a multiple of 3:  1, 3, 9, 27...


Begins with the Start Value date and multiplies it by the Step number, using the time units you specify. For example, if the step value is 3, and the date step is Week, the interval is 3 weeks.


Specify the directory for your texture (.bmp) files.


Specify the number or date to begin the data with. For example, if you specify 2 as the Start value and 1 as the Step value, then click Linear, the data fills the cells like this: 1, 2, 3, 4...


Specify how much the Start value will increase in each cell. For example, if you specify 1 for the Start value and 2 for the Step value, then click Linear, the data fills the cells like this: 1, 3, 5, 7...


Click to use a bulleted list style you previously defined and saved.


Select an available numeric format, or click User Defined to set your own options.


The directory for your Clipart files.


Select to automatically adjust the number of decimal digits to the size of the cell and round the number if necessary.


Specify how many digits will display after a decimal point.


Click to display negative numbers either in parentheses or preceded by a minus sign.


Controls how numeric data displays. Combining Currency with Percent or Exponential gives meaningless results. Thousands has no effect when combined with Exponential.


Click to save the current font, bullet, spacing, and box attributes to use again later. Saving the style does not save any text or data, just the formatting.


Displays the currently selected date format.


Select an available date/time format, or click New Format to create your own date/time format.


Apply the formula to a specific row or rows, placing the results in the column you specify. You can use either a colon or two periods to identify multiple columns. For example, use A:C or A..C to indicate columns A through C.


Apply the formula to a specific column or columns, placing the results in the row you specify. Use commas to separate row numbers when you want to include multiple rows. For example, use 1,2,3 to indicate rows 1 through 3.


Select one of the available formulas. Click the Help button for more information about each of the formulas.


Delete a formula in a row or column, leaving only the data.


Specify the level you want to start your selection with, and how many levels down from that position you want to include in the selection.


Display ticks outside the grid line.


Specify the value for n in a polynomial equation: y=c0+c1*+c2...+cn*xn (where n is the order of the fit). The higher the order (any number up to one less than the number of data points), the more curvature is allowed.


Display ticks inside the grid line.


Specify a value for fit formulas to predict future values. For example, if you have plotted data for each financial quarter, type 2 to forecast two quarters ahead.


Specify how many cells before and after each cell to include in the moving average. For example, if you type 2, the moving average for each cell will be the average of the current cell and the two cells on each side (a total of five cells). You can smooth the curve of your data by charting a moving average.


Display fit types, correlations, r-squared values, and formulas for each fit type.


Display ticks overlapping the grid line on both sides.


Select the sides of the chart on which frames will appear.


Specify a width (in inches) for the frame borders, or click a predefined border width.


Select a line style and color for your horizontal minor grid lines.


Select a line style and color for your vertical major grid lines.


Select a color for lines.


Specify a height for an elevated base underneath your chart.


Select a line style and color for your vertical minor grid lines.


Click a predefined ratio of major grid lines per data series, or specify how many major grid lines you want for each series.


Displays labels attached to each bar, marker, line, area, or slice in your chart.


This is the Ruler, a graphic representation of a ruler. Use it to help you create and align objects with precision. The ruler displays units of measure according to the default set in your Display Settings in Corel Presentations. The Ruler does not print on your slides or drawings.

You can drag up to 30 horizontal and vertical alignment guides from the Ruler to help you align objects. Just place the cursor on a ruler bar, then drag to position the guides. To delete them, drag them off the drawing area. To clear all guides, right-click the Ruler and click Clear Guides from the QuickMenu.


This is the Data Chart Editor. Use it to enter and edit data, change chart appearance, and size charts. Click outside the Chart Editor to close it.


This is a series. It represents a row of data from your Datasheet. You can have several different kinds of series in the same chart, or assign series to different Y axes for clearer display.


Specify the directory for your picture (.bmp) files.


Click a predefined number of minor grid lines between each major grid line, or specify how many minor grid lines you want between each major grid line.


This is an axis. There are three available axes in a chart: X, Primary Y, and Secondary Y. Double-click the axes to change their properties.


Positions labels inside or outside their data representations.


Specify how many coworkers you want to add, then click Right or Left to add them beside the currently selected box.


This is the title of the axis. Double-click the title to edit it or change its properties.


Type placeholder text for a new organization chart field. Your placeholder can be up to 26 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and characters.


Select the pie you want to choose options for.


Display the chart horizontally instead of vertically. In a horizontal chart, the X axis is vertical.


Click to display a table of the Datasheet data below the graph.


Displays each data series on a different Y axis for clarity.


Display the data in each column as clustered groups.


Display the data in each column as overlapping groups.


Display the data in each column as a combined total, stacked from bottom to top.


Display the data in each column as a percentage of the whole column. The percentage figures are stacked to 100% for each column.


Specify the size of the pie chart in relation to the chart area. 100 fills the area.


This is a tick. It is a small line perpendicular to an axis that marks off amounts such as dollars, distances, or numbers of objects. Ticks are either major or minor. Double-click the ticks to change their properties.


Display a legend with your chart.


Cancels the new document and exits Corel Presentations.


Click the side of the chart where the legend appears. You can also drag the legend to position it on the chart.


Click the direction the legend runs, either horizontally or vertically.


Type or edit the name of the document's author.


Start with a slide show filled with sample text and formatting.


Select the previously-saved document you want to work on.


Type a title for the legend box. The title can include spaces, numbers, punctuation, and characters.


This is the chart grid. Grid lines represent value increments in a chart frame, and are parallel to the X and Y axes in the chart. Grid lines are either major or minor, and major grid lines may have labels. Double-click the grid lines to change their properties.


Make 45-degree angles in your chart.


Specify the amount of horizontal displacement.


Specify the amount of vertical displacement.


Display the chart in the view box as a series of line shapes for faster display.


Save your drawings (.wpg files) in WPG 7 or WPG 2.0 format. If you want to use .wpg files in earlier versions of Corel Presentations, click WPG 2.0.


Return horizontal and vertical values to the original settings.


Displays the currently selected language. Click a language in the list to select it.


Select Other in the list, then type in a code for a language not already displayed.


Displays the currently selected series. Use the arrow buttons to switch between available series.


Display the subtitle you type.


Display the series as a solid area, with data points defining the top.


Display the series as one or more solid bars, one bar for each data point. Click to choose a bar shape.


Display the series as a line connecting the data points.


Display the series as a line with a device marking each data point. Click to choose a marker shape and size.


Click a position for your chart title and subtitle in relation to your chart.


Select the Y axis you want this series to appear on. You can select different properties for each axis to differentiate your series data.


Display the series as a set of graphics devices marking each data point. Click to choose a marker shape, then specify a size.


Display divider lines between labels and data in the table.


Click Rows to sort selected values in each row, or Columns to sort selected values in each column.


Click Ascending to begin with the lowest values, or Descending to begin with the highest values.


Specify the Key Row or Column to use as a basis for sorting while keeping all the values in that row or column together. For example, to alphabetically sort the series by the legend names, specify the Legend column (0) as the sort key, or to sort by labels, specify the Labels row (A) as the sort key. You need to include the sort key in your sort selection.


Display statistics for the row the selected cell is in.


Display statistics for the column the selected cell is in.


The number of cells containing data in the row, column, or selected area.


The smallest data value in the row, column, or selected area.


The largest data value in the row, column, or selected area.


The average of all data values in the row, column, or selected area.


How widely each data value differs from the Average in the row, column, or selected area.


If the data conforms to a fit formula, this is the fit information.


Display the title you type.


Repeats the bitmap image inside the object until the object is completely filled.


Specify the number of rows you want to delete. Existing rows below the insertion point move up to fill the empty space.


Specify the number of columns you want to delete. Existing columns to the right of the insertion point move left to fill the empty space.


This is the chart's title. You can drag it to position it in relation to the chart. Double-click the title to edit it and change its properties.


This is the chart's subtitle. You can drag it to position it in relation to the chart. Double-click the subtitle to edit it and to change its properties.


This is the legend for the chart. It lists the colors, patterns, and symbols you are using to show which series label corresponds to which bar, line, pie slice, and so on. Double-click the legend to change its properties.


This is a data label for the data in a box corresponding to a bar, line, pie slice, etc. Double-click the data label to change its properties. Change the value itself in the Datasheet.


This is the Datasheet. It is a matrix of rows and columns that is the basic working element for creating data charts. Data you type in the Datasheet appears in the chart you are creating or editing.  You can automatically adjust the width of all columns at one time. Just click the cell in the upper-left corner of the Datasheet, then drag a vertical line that separates a column header.


This is a column in the Datasheet. You can enter and edit data in the cells in the column, cut and paste data, and include or exclude the column. Click the alphabetical button at the top of the column to select all the cells in it. To easily adjust the width of a column, simply move the pointer between two columns (at the top of the Datasheet) until it changes to a double-headed arrow, then drag.  You can automatically adjust the width of all columns at one time by clicking the cell in the upper-left corner of the Datasheet, then dragging a column.


This is a row in the Datasheet. It is also a series of data. You can enter and edit data in the cells in the row, cut and paste data, and include or exclude the row. Click the numbered button in the Labels column to select all the cells in a row.


This is a cell in the Datasheet. Enter and edit the chart data in the cells. Use the arrow keys to move from cell to cell. Click and drag to select a range of cells, or click the blank button in the top left  corner of the Datasheet to select all cells.


Edit or replace current data with data you type in.


Shows the location of the current cell. Letters stand for columns and numbers stand for rows.


Use the page colors assigned to this master. To select your own page color options, deselect this control.


This is a surface chart. It displays data values as a solid area that bulges and dips like the contour of a landscape as it connects data points. The color of the areas change as the surface rises and falls.


Select what parts of your slide show you want to print.


This is a box in an organization chart. It indicates a position or person in the organization. Double-click the box to add or edit its data. Click the box to select it for changes, or to add a manager, subordinates, coworkers, or staff members to it.


Select the type of data chart you want to use.


Click the color you want to make transparent. Overlapping objects show through that color in the drawing window.


This is an axis label. Double-click the label to edit it and to change its properties.


Select a gradient color. The color you select will fill the outside of gradients (the black in the sample gradients).


Textures are built by repeating bitmaps (like your Windows wallpaper). Click this option to repeat the texture in relation to the entire drawing window, so that as you move or size the object, it shows a different part of the tiled textures.


This is the frame of the chart. It is a group of lines enclosing the sides of the chart. Each line in the frame represents a data value. Double-click the frame to change its properties.


This is a selected area in the bitmap. You can cut, copy, delete, or move it, or apply special effects to it.


Specify how much you want to move the gradient color horizontally (along the X axis). 0 moves the gradient color to the far left, 100 moves the gradient color to the far right.


Specify how much you want to move the gradient color vertically (along the Y axis). 0 moves the center gradient to the top, 100 moves the gradient color to the bottom.


Select the shape of the color blend. Linear gives a series of flat lines, while Circular and Rectangular bend the color bands around straight or curved lines.


Specify the angle of the gradient. As the degree value increases, the gradient rotates counterclockwise within objects or on the page.


Automatically assigns the number of blending steps between the selected colors.


Specify the number of blending steps between two colors.


Click the method you use to fill an object. If outlines cross in a filled object, they create cells in that object. If a cell borders directly on other cells in the object, the bordered cells may be left empty or filled, depending on the fill method you use.

Alternating - fills every other enclosed area.

Winding - fills the enclosed areas, including overlapping areas.


This is a selected set of objects. It includes different types of objects with different editing options. To deselect one object at a time, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking the objects you want to deselect.


If the Font style you selected does not have text attribute options (such as Bold or Italic), you can select Bold, Underline, or Italic in this area to alter the font's appearance.


Positions text relative to the rest of the text. Superscript text appears above the baseline, while Subscript text appears below it.


Sizes the text relative to other text in the same font.


Use the currently selected options as the default settings.


This is a table. It is a two-dimensional list displaying your Datasheet data in rows and columns. Double-click the table to change its properties. Use the Datasheet to change the data appearing in the table.


Select the kind of data in the file you want to import. Importing options are different for spreadsheets and text files.


Switch data from columns to rows and rows to columns.


Delete all the data already in the Datasheet.


Link the imported data to the existing chart, so that the chart data automatically updates every time you open the chart.


Begin the imported data at the selected cell instead of the top-left cell in the Datasheet. Imported data overwrites any existing data in the datasheet.


Specify the path and filename of the data file you want to import.


Select any of the range names listed to import them.


Specify the range of data you want to import. For example, A1:D4 imports data from cells A1 through D4.


Specify the field and record delimiters for text data.


Specify the codes used for encapsulated characters and codes to strip out.


Click to draw objects and text with no outlines. Objects and text with fills the same color as the background will be invisible, but will still be there.


Click a line style.


Set a style for line angles. Miter gives a sharp point at the angle. Rounded gives a rounded angle. Beveled flattens the point of an angle, like a jewel facet.


Set a style for the end of lines.


Select how you want the start of your lines to appear.


Specify a line width, or click a predefined line width.


Tell Corel Presentations where to look for the printer paper.


Stacks the bitmap inside the object until it fills the object.


Stretches or shrinks the bitmap to fit inside the object. The bitmap may not retain its original proportions.


Makes the bitmap smaller or larger to fit inside the object, keeping the original proportions.


Repeats the bitmap inside the object in offset vertical columns until the object is filled.


Deselect Print Background if you want to create clean-looking slide handouts without the background layer. The text and layout is automatically adjusted to print black and white.


Repeats the bitmap inside the object in offset horizontal rows until the object is filled.


Displays the currently selected color palette.


Specify how many characters wide the columns are. All columns will be the same width.


Connect the positions on your chart with right-angled lines or direct lines.


Displays the organization chart as a series of ordered boxes, with no lines between them.


Select to start the cascade effect with the last bullet in the chart and progress to the first bullet.


Select the color palette you want to use. Each color palette contains a different color scheme.


Replace gradient colors in the Clipart images with solid colors when you insert them into the drawing window.


This is the title of the current slide. Click the scroll bar to move back and forth in your slide show.


Click to retrieve original or predefined color palettes.


Click to save color palettes you have customized.


Click to define a new color palette or edit an existing one.


This is a linked or embedded object. Double-click it to edit it in the application or file it was originally created in.


You can include the text of your speaker notes or blank lines for the audience to take notes on. Click "Text below slides" or "Text next to slides" to position the notes or blank lines in relation to graphical representations of your slides.

To choose whether to display speaker notes or blank lines, click Options.


Click to copy all the text in the Slide Outliner into a Corel WordPerfect document. This option does not include graphic images of your slides, or of any text that does not appear in the Slide Outliner.


The options in this area have individual help associated with them. Click [image], then click an option for more information.


Display a box with the bulleted list.


Position the text in relation to the object, beginning at the first anchor point.


Displays the contoured text alone, making the object transparent.


Displays the currently selected date and time format.


Click to create your own date and time format. (If you are setting date formats for chart data, select User Defined from the Predefined Formats list.)


Select a template for the current slide.


Select a different background to replace the current one for this slide.


Click to choose whether to include speaker note text or blank lines with images of your slides, page numbering, the source files for any sounds you used, and header/footer information.


Click to apply the selected template to all slides in your slide show.


Click to apply the selected template to the current slide only.


Click to apply the selected template to a specified range of slides.


Click to remove the link between the selected template and its master so you can edit its components (change colors, explode charts, and so on).


Displays a table of the Datasheet data underneath the chart.


Specify the path and filname for the slide show. All the pages in your slide show will be included in one file with an .HTM extension.


Specify the path and filename for the slide show. Each slide will be a separate page in the folder you specify.


Specify the path and filename of the movie file.


Select one of the last nine documents you worked on.


Choose a border type for the movie file. The border displays around the movie on the slide and while you are playing the movie.


Select to display a control panel with progress indicator and pause, play, and stop buttons when playing the movie. The controls do not appear until you click the movie to play it.


Make the pointer invisible while you draw objects.


Select to rewind the movie when it stops playing. The image returns to the first frame of the file and freezes. If you do not select this option, the movie stops at tne last frame and displays that image.


Select to keep the movie running over and over. To stop the movie, click it or click the stop button on the control panel.


Display keystrokes next to the feature names on the menus. For example, display Ctrl+W next to Characters on the Insert menu.


Display filenames of the last nine files you worked on. The filenames appear at the bottom of the File menu, and you can re-open the files by clicking them.


Select the units used for displaying and entering values in dialog boxes, and the units used on the Grid and Ruler.


Select a predefined paper type, size, and printing adjustment. Some printers cannot work with user-defined page sizes, so they translate custom page sizes into the nearest compatible predefined size.


Select to specify the amount of white space that surrounds a drawing object when you save it. When you insert a .wpg file created in Corel Presentations into another application, saving with the least possible amount of white space is a good way to control the amount of white space that appears inside the graphics box.


Specify the amount of white space on each side of the page. Many printers have a minimum margin setting to allow for an unprintable region. If you specify a smaller margin than is allowed for the selected printer, Corel Presentations changes the margins to the smallest margin allowed. For example, if the left unprintable region for your printer is .25" and you specify 0" as your left margin, Corel Presentations changes your left margin to .25".


Click the shape of the box that will display with the bulleted list.


Enlarge your current drawing, text, or chart and print it across the number of pages you select. You can print only individual drawings as posters. You can make posters from slides after saving them as drawings (.wpg).


Select to adapt your color drawing or slide for printing in black and white. The colors are translated to the appropriate shades of gray.


Select to make the movie invisible until you click it to play it during your slide show. When this slide displays, you can click the spot where the movie is to make it appear and play. When it finishes playing, it disappears again.


Select to play the movie when you click it. As you play the slide show, the movie will remain still until you click it, and then it will start playing.


Select to play the movie automatically after the slide displays. Specify the number of seconds you want the movie to wait before it begins playing.


Select the version of the slide show you want to play if you have used Audience Manager to create alternative versions of this slide show for different audiences.


Type the word, abbreviation, or typographical error you want QuickCorrect to automatically replace.


Type the word(s) or symbols you want to replace the text in the Replace box.


Add the word and correction combination to the replacement list.


Delete the selected word and correction combination from the replacement list.


Select to save the MIDI or Wave sound file inside the slide show. This increases the slide show file size, but also ensures that the sound will be available for playback. Use this option if you want to create a portable slide show.


Let QuickCorrect replace words as you type. QuickCorrect acts as soon as you press the space bar.


Select the types of corrections and quote marks QuickCorrect uses.


Click to select a stationary animation effect. Each bullet point appears in place on the slide, instead of moving into place.


Click to move each bullet point into place on the slide. The bullet comes in from one side of the slide and moves to its place.


Automatically insert two spaces instead of one after a period.


Automatically insert one space instead of two after a period.


Automatically capitalize the first letter of a sentence and the first letter of words preceded by four or more spaces.


Automatically convert two capital letters in a word to an initial capital letter and a lowercase second letter.


Automatically eliminate double spaces between words in a sentence.


Select Turn on SmartQuotes, then select the type of paired opening and closing quotes you want to use.


Disable SmartQuotes when you type numbers (for example, 6'5" for six feet, five inches).


Type the letters, word, or phrase you want to find.


Type the letters, word, or phrase you want to use as replacement text.


Select a search direction. Forward searches from the current cursor position to the end of the document. Backward searches from the current cursor position to the beginning of the document.


Find the next occurrance of the search text.


Replace this instance of the search text with the replacement text.


Replace all instances of the search text with the replacement text.


Select the animation effect you want from the list box.


Select the direction of the animation effect. Some animations do not require you to select a direction.


Click to attach a sound file to the QuickLink object.


Click to select the slide that will appear when you click the QuickLink object during a slide show.


An asterisk (*) in the Slide Only column indicates that the keystroke is assigned to the current slide only. No asterisk indicates that the keystroke is assigned to all slides in your slide show.


Click to select the action that is put into effect when you click the  QuickLink object during a slide show.


These are the keystroke(s) that you can press during a slide show to activate the event or action assigned to it, and the current assignments. Click a key to select it.


Click to specify the location of your Internet browser.  When you press the assigned QuickKey or click the QuickLink object during a slide show, the browser will be launched.


Click to select the file you want to open when you press the assigned QuickKey or click the QuickLink object during a slide show.


Specify the drive and folder where you want the runtime files copied to.


Select the speed of the animation effect. Some animations do not require you to select a speed.


Click to retrieve and use a slide show master (.mst) file you previously created but did not add to the gallery.


Click the type of animation you want to use. The object can either appear in place on the slide, or move across the slide.


Click to open a new drawing window.


Click to open a new slide show.


Type or edit the name of the person who last saved the document.


Click to select a predesigned set of templates for your slide show.


Select the animation effect you want to use.


Click to select default startup options, setup options, and page formatting for all new slide shows.


Specify how many times larger or smaller you want the object to be.


Size the object around its center point.


Click to change a copy of the object while leaving the original unchanged.


This is the name of the layout the current slide is using.


Click the layout you want to use. There are seven layouts to choose from.


Select the category of backgrounds you want to choose from. All the backgrounds in the Background Gallery are available.


This is the name of the background you have selected.


Click the background you want to use for this slide. The background applies only to the current slide or slides you have selected, not to all the slides in the slide show. To use this background for all slides, select Apply selected Background to all slides in slide show.


Select to use the background you have selected in all the slides in this slide show.


These are the alternative presentations you have defined for this slide show. Select the one you want to play, edit, and so on.


Click to put a new entry int the list of custom audiences. After you create a new audience, click Rename to give the entry a meaningful name.


Click to remove the selected custom audience entry.


Click to give the selected custom audience entry a new name. When you create a new entry, it always appears as "Copy of [original name]." Give each entry a meaningful descriptive name.


These keys already have actions assigned to them which cannot be changed.


Select to remove the assignment from the selected keystroke.


Click to select the slide that will appear when you press the selected keystroke during a slide show.


Select the action the embedded or linked object takes during a slide show.


Click to hide the object until it's time to play it. When it finishes playing, the object disappears again.


Select the slide you want to choose options for from the list.


Select to make the object play when you click on it during a slide show.


Click to automatically play the object a certain number of seconds after a slide transition ends. You specify the delay time.


Select a color and style for the box that displays with the bulleted list.


Position the box relative to the bulleted list.


Select the template you always want selected and displayed in the New Slide Show dialog box.


Select to use these options in all the slides in your slide show.


Click to select fill attributes for the box that displays with the bulleted list.


Type a name for the QuickLink. Although the name does not appear directly on the object, it serves as an easy way for you to manage numerous QuickLinks in a slide.


Select to make a bullet transition or animation effect apply to all bulleted lists in your slide show.


Specify where Corel Presentations will store and access specific types of files.


Click to advance slides using the space bar or a mouse click.


Click to automatically advance slides with a specified amount of time between each one. The delay option you select also applies to animated bulleted lists and objects on the slide.


Click to specify the amount of time each slide stays on the screen between transitions.


Select a cascade effect for the bullet list.


Select to make the QuickLink object invisible on the slide. This is useful if the object is a rectangle or square shape that covers a bullet text line or some other text area.


Displays the font, justification, and assigned bullet for each level in the bulleted list. Click the levels to make changes to their properties.


Click a level, then select a justification from the drop-down list.


Click a level, select and delete the current bullet, then insert a bullet character from the drop-down list.


Select the slide that will begin your slide show. This slide displays first.


Select a color and specify a width for the Highlighter. During a slide show, you can drag the Highlighter (the pointer) to temporarily emphasize text and data on a slide. Highlighting disappears when you display the next slide.


Specify the default language, startup document, beep options, and text selection method.


Select to run your slide show in a continuous loop until you press Esc.


Click to speed up slide show display by using a series of bitmaps instead of redrawing each slide. You must create a QuickShow before you can use it.


Click to save an entire slide show as a series of bitmaps for faster display during playback. Using QuickShows does take up more space on your hard drive.


Click to select the action that is put into effect when you press the selected keystroke during a slide show.


The title of the slide.


Click to attach a sound file to the selected keystroke.


This is the icon that appears in the Slide Sorter view to indicate if the slide is using a manual (mouse) or time delay (clock) advance option.


Click to copy the text on the slide into the speaker notes text box. All the text from the Slide Outliner appears in the speaker note for the slide. Text from text lines and areas you have created on the slide does not appear.


Select the direction of the transition effect. Some transitions do not require you to select a direction.


Select this option to automatically launch an Internet browser to display your slide show as soon as Corel Barista finishes building it.


Click to send the current slide show file to Corel Barista.


Click to create a backup copy of your current document when you save the document.

When you make changes to a document, you have two versions of the file: the one on disk, and the edited one onscreen. Every time you save, the file onscreen replaces the one on disk. When you save a document with Original Document Backup on, the file on disk is renamed with a .bk! extension. If you want to recover the original, you can retrieve the .bk! file.

If you use Original Backup, you should give files different names, not just different extensions. For example, Original Backup renames both PRES.1 and PRES.2 to PRES.BK!. Therefore, PRES.BK! is the backup file only for the last file you saved.


Creates a backup copy of your current document at the time interval you specify. Each new backup replaces the previous backup. Timed backup files are named ~{Prn.TMP, where n is the number of the drawing window).  They are saved to the default Backup directory, or in the same directory as the Corel Presentations program files.

Corel Presentations deletes timed backup files when you exit normally. If a system failure occurs, the most current backup files remain on disk so you can recover your work.


Select the language you want for menus, dialog boxes, Help prompts, and messages.


Click the type of document Corel Presentations begins with when it opens. You can also choose to display the Document Selection dialog each time you begin a new document, so that you can choose to create a drawing or slide show.


Select "an error" to hear a beep when error messages display. Select "a search failure" to hear a beep when a search fails.


Click to publish the current drawing or slide show in HTML format. Each slide is converted into a graphic and displayed with the options you choose.


Specify the folder for your timed backup files. If you do not specify a Backup folder, Corel Presentations saves all backup files in the folder where Corel Presentations program files are located.

Original document backup files are stored in the same folder as the original file. Location of Files does not affect them.


Specify the folder for your drawing (.wpg) and slide show (.shw) files.


Specify the folder for your master (.mst) files.


Specify the folder for your macro (.wcm) files.


Specify the folder for your sound (.wav and .mid) files.


Click to publish your slide show in Java format using Corel Barista. Your slide show is converted to a series of pages that preserve the original formatting. Corel Barista supports Arial, Courier, and Times Roman fonts.


Displays data as currency amounts.


Displays data in thousands.


Control how display features appear and function.


Select the view you want to see (Slide Editor, Outliner, Slide List, or Slide Sorter) when you create or open a slide show.


Specify the default master file you always want displayed in the New Slide Show dialog box. The master contains the layouts and backgrounds for each slide in your slide show.


Select the template that is automatically applied to the first slide.


Select to display the New Slide Show dialog box each time you create a new slide show. The dialog box allows you to specify the master and the first template for your slide show.


Select the speed of the transition effect. Some transition effects do not require you to select a speed.


Specify the number of slides the Slide Sorter will display on each row. The more slides per row you specify, the smaller the slide thumbnails will be.


Select to display main level bullets and sub-level bullets one at a time during a slide show.


Click the page settings for the current master you are using or the default page settings used in your drawings or charts.


Click to publish your slide show as a file that you can play over the Internet. All the transitions, animations, time delays, sounds, and other elements you have built into your slide show remain intact. You may need to download a player for your browser to play Show It! slide shows.


Click to launch your web browser. The page that displays is the home page that you selected in your browser's Preferences settings.


Select to visually emphasize one bulleted item at a time and dim all other bullets on the slide.


Click to select a bullet color for the selected level.


Select to specify a keystroke for the QuickLink.  Attaching a keystroke provides the user with another method for activating a QuickLink besides clicking the object on the slide.


This is the name of the currently selected texture or picture.


This is the name of the currently selected picture.


Choose the paper definition you want to use. You can also create and edit your own paper definitions by clicking New.


Select to insert the date as a code that changes to the current date and time whenever you open this document.


Click to apply the format you selected in the Date/Time formats list.


Click to delete the selected date/time format from the list.


This is the name of the currently selected layout.


Select the default language module, or type the name of another in the Other text box. You need to purchase a language module before you can use one.


Click to edit the selected QuickLink assigned to the slide.


Click to fill text letters with solid, pattern, or gradient colors.


Click to edit the selected QuickKey assigned to the slide.


Click to assign a new QuickKey to a particular slide.


Specify the number of slides or notes appearing on a page.


Click to remove a selected QuickKey from the slide.


Click to choose fills, outlines, and other properties for boxes.


Select to print the slides with their titles centered underneath. If you also selected Print Slide Number, the slide title will print to the right and the slide number will print to the left, under each slide.


Select to print slide numbers right-justified under the slides.


Display ticks next to labels. Grid lines without labels do not display ticks.


Specify how much you want to rotate the image around each axis, or click a predefined rotation.


Click the perspective you want, then specify the depth of the image.


Make the sides of the image lighter or darker.


Select a predefined bullet style.


Specify the amount of space you want between text lines on the same level in the bulleted list.


Specify exactly how many degrees you want to rotate the object. The object rotates counter-clockwise.


Select to display the grid.


Force objects to align with the grid as you create or move them.


Specify the amount of space you want between horizontal points (the X axis).


Specify the amount of space you want between vertical points (the Y axis).


Specify the interval between grid lines displayed on the screen. For example, specifying 4 means that every fourth grid line is displayed.


Specify a snap zone value to define the area in which objects snap to alignment guides. For example, if you specify .5", all objects you create or move within one half inch of the alignment guides will automatically snap to the guides.


Convert the currently selected object into a bitmap.


Specify the directory into which you want to put the new .wpg files. Do not convert all figures into .wpg's in your root directory, since it is limited in the number of files it can contain.


Alternate labels up and down to make room for longer labels.


Skip labels alternately along the x axis. If you click 1, every other label displays. If you specify 7, every seventh label displays.


Proportionally size two or more pie charts in the current Datasheet. Pies with greater data values will appear larger than pies with smaller data values.


Separate a slice from the rest of the pie chart for emphasis.


Specify the slice you want to move away from the rest of the pie.


Specify the percent of distance (1-200) you want to move the pie slice from the center of the pie chart. If you choose a distance of 200, the slice is moved away 200% from the center of the pie, or two times the radius of the pie.


Select, create, copy, edit, rename, and delete keyboard layouts.


Select, create, copy, edit, rename, and delete menu bars.


Select, create, copy, edit, rename, and delete toolbars.


Specify how much to rotate the slices counterclockwise around the pie chart.


Specify how much to tilt the pie chart in the chart area.


Link the slice you specify in the first pie to the second pie. Select Pie 1 in the Pie drop-down list to activate these controls.


Select the startup view, default master and template, default number of slides per row in the Slide Sorter, and the page size and margins for slides.


Display the pie chart as a stacked column.


Arrange the pie chart slices by size. Sorting does not work with linked pies.


Select the elements you want to display on menus, bars, and other places on the screen.


Indicate how much you want to clear.


Corel Presentations uses video memory to display your slide shows with smoother transitions. You can choose how to deploy the video memory. You can use video memory for smoother transitions without changing how the slide show looks, or you can choose to use the memory to keep your slides in high resolution or truer color palettes.

If DirectDraw is not installed, these options are unavailable.


Select a transition and transition speed for the current slide. Some transitions allow you to specify a direction.


Display each set of data as horizontal and vertical lines.


Display each set of data as bars with error indicators.


Display each set of data with top and bottom error markers.


Display each set of data as solid areas.


Click an orientation for labels outside the pie chart. Stacked stacks the value, percent, and label text vertically for each slice. One Line lists them horizontally.


Display percentage labels with each pie chart slice. All the percentage labels add up to 100%. You can also specify how many digits display after decimal points.


Select a toolbar, Property Bar, tool palette, keyboard layout, or menu bar from the list to use, edit, copy, rename, or delete.


Select a position for the Datasheet value for each pie slice.


Select to have the Master Gallery dialog appear each time you open a new slide show. This lets you choose the master you want to use with the presentation before you begin working.


Display the axis title horizontally or vertically.


Select the length of lines connecting outside labels to pie slices.


Specify the number of rows or columns you want to delete.


Select this option to use Corel WordPerfect file management dialog boxes. If you deselect this option, the default Windows file management dialog boxes appear when you click Open, Save, and so on.


Automatically convert graphics saved in WMF format to WPG format when you open them.


Specify the folder for your movie (.avi, .mov, and so on) files.


Radial displays data on a round grid. Linear displays data on an angular grid.


Specify a name for the CD track number you are using.


Specify the number of the CD track you want to use.


Specify where in the CD track you want to begin playback: from the beginning, at a specified time, or at a specific frame.


Specify where in the CD track you want to end playback: at the end, at a specified time, or at a specific frame.


Click to hear the sound file or the CD track number you specified.


Click to stop playback of a sound file or a CD track.


Click to cancel all changes and return to default settings.


Type or edit the title of the document.


Specify the MIDI sound file you want to attach to the slide. MIDI sound files are usually stored with a .MID extension.


Specify the wave sound files you want to attach to a slide. Wave audio sound files are usually stored with a .WAV extension.


Click to attach CD sound tracks to a slide.


Drag the indicator to set volume levels for each sound format you are using in a slide.


Click to record wave audio sound clips to accompany your slide show. The Windows 95 Sound Recorder has its own Help system which you can refer to if you need further instructions on recording.


Click to select playback options for each type of sound file.


Display the selected colors for each range in the table cells.


Blend the range colors for a table or surface chart. Select the starting color (at the 1-10% row) and the ending color (at the 91-100% row), then click Blend.


Type or edit a line explaining the subject of the document.


Type or edit any keywords you want for this document. You can use QuickFinder to search your computer or network for these keywords.


Select a color for each range of data.


Draw border lines for each cell in a table.


Select a color for the whole table.


Type or edit any comments you want to make about this document.


Display data as a topography.


Draws an outline around each area in surface charts.


Select a color for the outlines in surface charts.


Click the shadow you want to use, or use the scroll bars to position the shadow around the object.


Make the shadow partially transparent. This makes the shadow look lighter.


Select a shadow color.


Specify a number or use the bottom scroll bar to move the shadow horizontally. Negative numbers move the shadow to the left of the object.


Specify a number or use the side scroll bar to move the shadow vertically. Negative numbers move the shadow below the object.


Specify how far you want to skew the object. Positive numbers pull objects up or right. Negative numbers pull objects down or left.


Skew the object around its center point.


Click to return the selected Property Bar or tool palette to its original state. Any editing changes you made will disappear, and the Property Bar or tool palette will appear as it did right after you installed the program.


Click to edit the currently selected page definition.


Choose how the current slide will advance to the next slide.


Select to leave out the current slide when you play your slide show. In the Slide Sorter view, a skipped slide will appear dimmed.


Displays the master this slide show uses.


Displays the revision number for the document. Each time you open and save the document, the revision number goes up one.


Specify the folders where Corel Presentations should look for certain types of files. Many of these options have folders already specified from the installation options you chose. If you move any of the folders (for exmaple, if you moved the Textures folder to another place in the directory), you will need to specify the new folder name for that type of file. If you do not update the folder, Corel Presentations will not be able to find that type of file automatically.


Select to display the pie title with your pie chart.


Click to let a selected sound file or CD track play continuously during a slide show until another sound file or CD track begins.


Select this option to have multiple slide shows access and play a single audio file that is stored on disk. This option can help you conserve disk space.


Specify how many times wider, taller, shorter, or narrower you want the object to be.


Stretch the object from its center point.


Display the next deletion.


Display the previous deletion.


Restore the currently displayed text.


Specify a percentage size for the smallest bubble in your chart. All remaining bubbles are sized proportionally larger, based on the size of the smallest bubble. If you specify a bubble size of 100, all the bubbles will be the same size.


Select to make sure this message never appears again. If you do not plan to download DirectDraw, you may want to select this check box to avoid displaying this message each time you play a slide show.


Click to launch your browser and display the Corel Web Site so you can download DirectDraw.


Click to close this error message and play your slide show without using DirectDraw.


Select the fit you want to display statistics for. The dialog box displays the formula and statistics about that data.


Displays the currently selected color blocks and any changes you have made. Click colors to change them, or click Reset to return to the original palette.


Displays the currently selected color on the color wheel, intensity bar, and New color sample box. You can drag the black or white square indicator on the intensity bar and color wheel to select a different color. Click OK to use the color that is displayed in the New color sample box.


Select the colors you mix to create new colors. The available color models are RGB, HLS, and CMYK.


Build new colors by specifing the amounts of each color to blend. RGB lets you blend red, green, and blue. CMYK lets you blend cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. HLS lets you define the amount of hue, lightness, and saturation.


Position objects relative to the new margins.


Select a rectangular cross-section of the color palette by dragging the pointer over the colors you want to edit.


Select a notched cross-section of the color palette by dragging the pointer over the colors you want to edit.


Create new color shades between the two end colors in a selection by mixing them. A blend is like pouring two cans of different colored paint towards each other so the paint flows to a central point. At that point, the paint mixes evenly. But at either end, one color is more intense than the other.


Change each color in a selection to its complement. For example, yellow turns into blue.


Change a selection to an array of colors displayed following the color spectrum from red to violet.


Make a copy of the currently selected color(s). Copying allows you to modify the copied color without changing the original color.


Brings the copied color(s) from the Clipboard to the selected place on the palette. Select an area equal to the area you copied to paste the entire selection, and the pasted colors will overwrite the ones already there.


Restore the palette to its original colors and configuration.


Specify the number of rows you want to insert. Existing rows below the insertion point move down to make room.


Specify the number of columns you want to insert. Existing columns to the right of the insertion point move right to make room.


Save the entire file, including any current selection.


Save only the currently selected items in a format you specify.


Display axis labels next to the grid lines and ticks on your chart.


This is how your current selections will appear.


Select a color for your text.


Positions the title horizontally, left to right, beside the axis.


Positions the title vertically, bottom to top, beside the axis.


Displays major ticks inside, outside, or overlapping the axis lines of the chart. None displays no ticks.


Displays minor ticks outside, inside, or overlapping the axis lines on the chart. None displays no ticks.


Click to view an overview Help topic about this dialog box. For specific help, click [image], then click any control.


Closes the dialog box without recording any of the changes you made.


Closes the dialog box and implements the changes you made.


Displays how the selected options appear, before implementing them. Click the Back button to return to the dialog box.


Brings the dialog box back to full size after you click Preview to see your changes.


Specify the number of steps you want in the blend. Each step is an object, each slightly changed in color and/or shape.


Adds the placeholder text you typed as a new field.


Removes a current field from the list and from the organization chart boxes.


Moves the selected field up one position in the list, until it reaches the top.


Moves the selected field down one position in the list, until it reaches the bottom.


Displays the current fields in the order they appear inside organization chart boxes. Click the fields to select them for moving or deleting.


Displays only text, without a box around it.


Displays boxes with fill colors only, and without line or beveled borders.


Select a background color. The color you select will fill the background of patterns and the outside of gradients.


Select a pattern (or gradient) color. The color you select will fill the foreground of a pattern or the inside of a gradient.


Switches the fill color with the pattern or gradient color.


Click to customize your pattern, gradient, and picture fills.


Select the types of textures or pictures you want to use as fills. Textures and pictures are bitmap files. Click Browse to use your own bitmaps as textures and pictures.


Textures are built by repeating bitmaps (like your Windows wallpaper). Click this option to repeat the texture within the object, so that the texture stays with the object as you size or move it.


Specify the order in which you want the selected objects displayed during a slide show. For example, if you have three objects in a slide, you can specify which object is displayed first, and which is displayed second.


Select to turn off an animation effect in a bulleted list or a selected object.


Size or stretch objects or margins to adjust for the new page settings. Sizing retains the objects' and margins' original proportions, while stretching may distort objects and margins.


Click Row(s) or Column(s) to include the rows or columns you previously excluded.


Click Row(s) or Column(s) to exclude the rows or columns you want to keep from appearing in your chart. The data is still there, but it does not show up in the chart display.


Select the screen resolution (in dots per inch) for the bitmap.


Click the number of bits and colors for your bitmap. The higher the number of colors, the larger the bitmap file will be, and the more memory space it will use.


Compresses the bitmap to take up less memory space.


Select a predefined size, or select User Defined, then specify a custom Width and Height for the bitmap.


Select Inches, Centimeters, or Pixels as the units you use to specify the Height and Width of the bitmap.


Displays how much memory space the bitmap will use.


Select the type of data you want to format.

Select Date to choose or edit a date format. Corel Presentations interprets regular numbers in imported data as Julian date values, and inserts the date that corresponds to that value.

Select Numeric to select decimal precision, number format, type, and negative number style.


Click to copy the color, line, and fill attributes of drawing objects, text, or both to apply to other objects or text.


Specify the cell you want to move to, with the column letter and the row number. For example, A1 takes you to the cell in the first row of the first column.


Use the scroll bar to move to the slide you want.


Specify the number of rows or columns you want to insert.


Specify how many staff positions you want to add.


Specify how many subordinate positions you want to add.


Click to select a bitmap file to insert as a texture or picture.


Select the fill you want to use.


Displays text and objects as outlines only, without any fill style.


Click the line you want to use.


Specify the number of lines you want between each text line in a text area.


E-mail just the currently displayed slide.


E-mail the entire slide show.


Specify how much to expand or compress the space between letters.


Click an orientation for the currently selected branch of the organization chart.


Specify the amount of space between manager and subordinate positions.


Specify the amount of space between coworker positions.


Click the direction you want your page to run.


Click the shape you want the selected object to warp into. Click the rectangle shape at the top left to reset the object to its original shape.


Displays the list of words to replace along with their replacements.


Perform no end of sentence corrections.


Specify the number of sides you want the regular polygon to have. For example, specifying 3 creates a triangle.


Specify the rows or columns you want to include in the formula, and the row or column in which you want the results of the formula to appear.


Display no tick lines at all.


Click the left or right arrow button to select a slide.


Select to remove the QuickLink from the object.


Select the transition effect you want from the list box.


If you have a modem, these instructions tell you how to use an online service to get more information about suite applications.


Do not adjust the object to fit into the new margins.


Specify how wide you want your page to be.


Click the left or right arrow button to select a layout name.


Specify a new name for an existing layout. Use the arrow buttons in the dialog box to select the layout you want to rename.


Specify a name for your runtime slide show.


Click to use the selected slide show master in your current slide show.


Click to play your slide show.


Type notes in this area that correspond to each slide in your slide show. You can then print and use them as cue cards or speaker notes during your presentation.


Specify a name for the new background.


Specify a name for the new layout.


Select to activate animated objects immediately following a slide transition.


If you select Manually, then select this option, the first animated object is advanced (displayed) manually with a mouse click or keystroke; all remaining animated objects follow automatically with no manual trigger or time delay. If you select Time delay, then select this option, the first animated object is advanced automatically following the specified time delay; all remaining objects follow automatically with no manual trigger or time delay.


If you select Manually above, then select this option, the first animated object is advanced (displayed) manually with a mouse click or keystroke; all remaining objects are advanced with a mouse click or keystroke. If you select Time delay above, then select this option, each animated object is advanced automatically following the specified time delay.


Advance animated objects before the bulleted list is displayed.


Advance animated objects after the bulleted list is displayed.


Specify a new name for an existing background. Use the arrow buttons in the dialog box to select the background you want to rename.


Click the format for the document. If you imported a document originally saved in a different format, you can save it in its original format, or in the Corel Presentations format you choose.


Select the type of master you want to use for your slide show. The different types of masters are suited to different types of presentations. For example, select a 35mm master if you want to convert your slide show to 35mm color slides or to color transparencies, or select a Color master if you want to present your slide show on a color monitor.


Click to select fill and line colors for fonts.


Specify how tall you want the page to be.


Specify how much whitespace you want between each main bullet level.


Specify how much whitespace you want between subordinate bullet levels.


Click an orientation for the axis title.


Use the current bulleted list properties in all slides using the bulleted list layout.


Display underlined letters (mnemonics) for easy keyboard access to menu items.


Connect to the online information and support service you selected.


Click the master you want to use in the current slide show.


Click to configure the online service you selected so you can get more information about suite applications.


Display helpful information about each menu item in a floating tip box.


Automatically selects whole words when you drag to select in a text area or text line.


Displays data as percentages.


Displays data in exponential notation.


Click the style of chart you want to use.


Specify a value.


This is the wave (.WAV) file you will hear when you play sound with this QuickLink or QuickKey. Click Sound to change it.


This is the MIDI file you will hear when you play sound with this QuickLink or QuickKey. Click Sound to change it.


This is the CD track you will hear when you play sound with this QuickLink or QuickKey. Click Sound to change it.


This is the type of OLE object you have selected. All the play settings you choose will apply to it.


This is how your bitmap looks now.


This is a representation of how your bitmap will look when you click the Apply button.


Display the result of the selected effect in the After sample box. This feature does not apply the effect to your bitmap.


Apply the current settings to the selected bulleted list.


Uses the screen size and resolution settings your computer is using right now to play the runtime slide show. The computer you use to play your show must have the same settings, or your slide show may have display problems.


Displays your slide show at 640x480 pixels with 256 colors. This is a standard display setting that is compatible with most monitor and computer settings.


Creates a runtime slide show that will play on a Windows 3.x or a Windows 95 system.


Creates a runtime slide show that will play under the Windows 95 operating system only.


Click to create a new page definition.


Click to delete the currently selected page definition.


Display the title you type. The title can include spaces, numbers, punctuation, and characters.


This is the Tool Palette. Use it to quickly and easily select graphic, chart, text, object, line, or bitmap tools.


This is the Property Bar. Use it to quickly and easily change such things as font face, point size, templates, slides, layers, fill and line colors and patterns.


Include any speaker notes you have prepared for a slide with the text indented below each slide.


Click the autosize option you want.


Specify how tall the boxes will be, based on a percentage of the text height within the box.


Specify how wide the boxes will be, based on a percentage of the text width within the box.


Select a Toolbar, menu bar, or keyboard layout.


Click to create a new toolbar, Property Bar, tool palette, keyboard layout, or menu bar.


Click to edit the currently highlighted toolbar, Property Bar, tool palette, keyboard layout, or menu bar. You cannot edit the predefined interface elements, but you can make copies of them to edit.


Click to copy the currently highlighted toolbar, keyboard, or menu.


Click to assign a new name to the currently highlighted toolbar, Property Bar, tool palette, keyboard layout, or menu bar.


Click to delete the currently highlighted toolbar, Property Bar, tool palette, keyboard layout, or menu bar.


Click to choose appearance, location, and size options for the toolbar, Property Bar, and tool palette.


Specify whether you want the buttons of a toolbar, tool palette, or Property Bar to display as text, pictures, or text and pictures. The bar or palette will take up less screen space when it displays pictures only.


Specify where in the application window you want the bar or palette to appear.


Specify how many rows or columns of buttons the toolbar, tool palette, or Property Bar displays. The buttons wrap in rows or columns if there are too many to display on one line. If you specify fewer rows or columns than the bar or palette has, scroll arrows will appear at the right of the row or at the bottom of the column.


Type a name for the Toolbar, menu bar, or keyboard layout.


Specify how large or small the bullet is in comparison to the text. You can specify any relative size from 50% to 150%.


Display numerical data in a two-dimensional grid of rows and columns. Use tables alone, or display them with other types of charts using the Display Table option.


Click to retrieve and use a background image (.WPG) you previously created but did not add to the gallery.


Select a background category from the drop-down list.


Click the background you want to use in the current slide show.


Displays the name of the currently selected background.


Click to use the currently selected background in your slide show.


Displays the name of the currently selected master.


Select if you have added drawings, bitmaps, Clipart, or text to the background layer of your slide show and want to maintain the objects when you apply a different background.


Click to display a drawing, chart, or slide as it will appear when printed.


This area lists each keystroke you have assigned to a particular slide along with its associated event or action. An asterisk (*) in the right column indicates that the event/action is active on the current slide only. No asterisk indicates the event/action is active throughout the slide show.


Select to apply the keystroke and associated event/action to the current slide only. Deselect to apply the keystroke and associated event/action to all slides in your slide show.


Specify the print range for your slides, handouts, speaker notes, or audience notes in the From and To text boxes.


Specify the last page of the print range.


Select the bars you want to display in Corel Presentations.


Displays the document at 50% actual size.


Displays the document at 75% of actual size.


Displays the document at actual size.


Displays the document at 150% of actual size.


Displays the document at 200% of actual size.


Displays a complete drawing or slide within a window, with minimal white space to the left and right.


Displays the width of the page, including margins, within a window.


Displays all page margins in the document window.


Specify a zoom percentage between 5% and 600%.


Specify a zoom option for viewing the document.


Customize toolbars, Property Bars, tool palettes, keyboard layouts, and menu bars.


Click to resample the selected bitmap image.


Display x, y, and z data on two axes.  For example, you could plot units sold (x-axis data) versus gross profit (y-axis data) with the bubble size being net profit.


Click to edit the software serial number and your PIN (personal identification number).


Click to list all copyright information for Corel Presentations.


Specify the software serial number.


Specify your PIN (personal identification number).


The vertical line of a vertical data chart. If you are using a horizontal chart, the Y axis is a horizontal line. It is possible to have more than one Y axis in a chart.


Specify the number of columns you want to display under a manager position when you select a Multiple column structure.


Eliminates excessive white space around positions in a selected branch or level.


Highlights specific columns (or rows) of data in the Datasheet using the colors you select from the drop-down color palettes. Select View highlighted ranges to toggle the color display on or off in the Datasheet.


Box size is determined by the size of the largest box in the branch below your selection.


Box size is determined by the size of the largest box in the same level. Boxes are in the same level if they have the same number of managers, counting from their immediate manager to the top manager in the chart.


Box size is determined by the largest box in the chart.


Box size is determined by its contents.


Rename the currently selected field.


If you have entered negative values in the Datasheet, you can select this option to display a line and x-axis tick marks (if you have not hidden them) at the zero point in your chart.


Click to specify how tall and wide the selected boxes will be, based on a percentage of the text height and width inside the boxes. You can also drag a corner handle on a selected box to manually adjust all boxes on that level to a fixed size.


Select a horizontal or vertical orientation for the X-axis title.


Select this option if you do not want to choose a master each time you begin a new slide show. Corel Presentations will use the default master automatically. If you want to change the master later, you can select another from the Master Gallery.


Select to let a web browser display the image in stages. The image appears at once, then gradually becomes sharper. If an image is not interlaced, a browser must receive the entire image before it can display anything. Using interlaced images gives your readers a preview of what the image is without making them wait for the entire image to transfer.


Select to use the standard .GIF transparent color in the image. If you do not select this option, Corel Presentations will use the current transparent color in the bitmap editor as the transparent color for the exported .GIF.


Displays the name and location of the password-protected file.


Prompts for the password when you attempt to preview a password-protected Corel WordPerfect document.


Click to select a graphics file as a background.


Displays the number and title of the currently selected slide.


Drag the blinking square to quickly move to a specific slide in your slide show. The number and title of the slide is displayed in the text box.


This displays the current name of the box field.


Type the new name of the box field.


This is an embedded movie file. Movie files you can use in slide shows include .avi, .mov, and others. Double-click the movie to play it. You can also right-click it, then click Movie Properties from the QuickMenu to select appearance and playback options.


Select this option if you do not want to see this message each time you convert an object into a bitmap.


Save a copy of the movie file inside the slide show. Use this option if you plan on sending the show to someone else, or playing it on a computer other than your own.